// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { Consideration } from "./lib/Consideration.sol";
/**
 * @title Seaport
 * @custom:version 1.1
 * @author 0age (0age.eth)
 * @custom:coauthor d1ll0n (d1ll0n.eth)
 * @custom:coauthor transmissions11 (t11s.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Kartik (slokh.eth)
 * @custom:contributor LeFevre (lefevre.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Joseph Schiarizzi (CupOJoseph.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Aspyn Palatnick (stuckinaboot.eth)
 * @custom:contributor James Wenzel (emo.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Stephan Min (stephanm.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Ryan Ghods (ralxz.eth)
 * @custom:contributor hack3r-0m (hack3r-0m.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Diego Estevez (antidiego.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Chomtana (chomtana.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Saw-mon and Natalie (sawmonandnatalie.eth)
 * @custom:contributor 0xBeans (0xBeans.eth)
 * @custom:contributor 0x4non (punkdev.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Laurence E. Day (norsefire.eth)
 * @custom:contributor vectorized.eth (vectorized.eth)
 * @custom:contributor karmacoma (karmacoma.eth)
 * @custom:contributor horsefacts (horsefacts.eth)
 * @custom:contributor UncarvedBlock (uncarvedblock.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Zoraiz Mahmood (zorz.eth)
 * @custom:contributor William Poulin (wpoulin.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Rajiv Patel-O'Connor (rajivpoc.eth)
 * @custom:contributor tserg (tserg.eth)
 * @custom:contributor cygaar (cygaar.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Meta0xNull (meta0xnull.eth)
 * @custom:contributor gpersoon (gpersoon.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Matt Solomon (msolomon.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Weikang Song (weikangs.eth)
 * @custom:contributor zer0dot (zer0dot.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Mudit Gupta (mudit.eth)
 * @custom:contributor leonardoalt (leoalt.eth)
 * @custom:contributor cmichel (cmichel.eth)
 * @custom:contributor PraneshASP (pranesh.eth)
 * @custom:contributor JasperAlexander (jasperalexander.eth)
 * @custom:contributor Ellahi (ellahi.eth)
 * @custom:contributor zaz (1zaz1.eth)
 * @custom:contributor berndartmueller (berndartmueller.eth)
 * @custom:contributor dmfxyz (dmfxyz.eth)
 * @custom:contributor daltoncoder (dontkillrobots.eth)
 * @custom:contributor 0xf4ce (0xf4ce.eth)
 * @custom:contributor phaze (phaze.eth)
 * @custom:contributor hrkrshnn (hrkrshnn.eth)
 * @custom:contributor axic (axic.eth)
 * @custom:contributor leastwood (leastwood.eth)
 * @custom:contributor 0xsanson (sanson.eth)
 * @custom:contributor blockdev (blockd3v.eth)
 * @custom:contributor fiveoutofnine (fiveoutofnine.eth)
 * @custom:contributor shuklaayush (shuklaayush.eth)
 * @custom:contributor 0xPatissier
 * @custom:contributor pcaversaccio
 * @custom:contributor David Eiber
 * @custom:contributor csanuragjain
 * @custom:contributor sach1r0
 * @custom:contributor twojoy0
 * @custom:contributor ori_dabush
 * @custom:contributor Daniel Gelfand
 * @custom:contributor okkothejawa
 * @custom:contributor FlameHorizon
 * @custom:contributor vdrg
 * @custom:contributor dmitriia
 * @custom:contributor bokeh-eth
 * @custom:contributor asutorufos
 * @custom:contributor rfart(rfa)
 * @custom:contributor Riley Holterhus
 * @custom:contributor big-tech-sux
 * @notice Seaport is a generalized ETH/ERC20/ERC721/ERC1155 marketplace. It
 *         minimizes external calls to the greatest extent possible and provides
 *         lightweight methods for common routes as well as more flexible
 *         methods for composing advanced orders or groups of orders. Each order
 *         contains an arbitrary number of items that may be spent (the "offer")
 *         along with an arbitrary number of items that must be received back by
 *         the indicated recipients (the "consideration").
 */
contract Seaport is Consideration {
    /**
     * @notice Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *         separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) Consideration(conduitController) {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to retrieve and return the name of this
     *      contract.
     *
     * @return The name of this contract.
     */
    function _name() internal pure override returns (string memory) {
        // Return the name of the contract.
        assembly {
            mstore(0x20, 0x20)
            mstore(0x47, 0x07536561706f7274)
            return(0x20, 0x60)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to retrieve the name of this contract as a
     *      string that will be used to derive the name hash in the constructor.
     *
     * @return The name of this contract as a string.
     */
    function _nameString() internal pure override returns (string memory) {
        // Return the name of the contract.
        return "Seaport";
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    BasicOrderParameters,
    OrderComponents,
    Fulfillment,
    FulfillmentComponent,
    Execution,
    Order,
    AdvancedOrder,
    OrderStatus,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title SeaportInterface
 * @author 0age
 * @custom:version 1.1
 * @notice Seaport is a generalized ETH/ERC20/ERC721/ERC1155 marketplace. It
 *         minimizes external calls to the greatest extent possible and provides
 *         lightweight methods for common routes as well as more flexible
 *         methods for composing advanced orders.
 *
 * @dev SeaportInterface contains all external function interfaces for Seaport.
 */
interface SeaportInterface {
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order offering an ERC721 token by supplying Ether (or
     *         the native token for the given chain) as consideration for the
     *         order. An arbitrary number of "additional recipients" may also be
     *         supplied which will each receive native tokens from the fulfiller
     *         as consideration.
     *
     * @param parameters Additional information on the fulfilled order. Note
     *                   that the offerer must first approve this contract (or
     *                   their preferred conduit if indicated by the order) for
     *                   their offered ERC721 token to be transferred.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillBasicOrder(BasicOrderParameters calldata parameters)
        external
        payable
        returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *         consideration. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based orders or partial filling of orders (though
     *         filling the remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param order               The order to fulfill. Note that both the
     *                            offerer and the fulfiller must first approve
     *                            this contract (or the corresponding conduit if
     *                            indicated) to transfer any relevant tokens on
     *                            their behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                            `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155 tokens
     *                            as consideration.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Seaport.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillOrder(Order calldata order, bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey)
        external
        payable
        returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Fill an order, fully or partially, with an arbitrary number of
     *         items for offer and consideration alongside criteria resolvers
     *         containing specific token identifiers and associated proofs.
     *
     * @param advancedOrder       The order to fulfill along with the fraction
     *                            of the order to attempt to fill. Note that
     *                            both the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                            approve this contract (or their preferred
     *                            conduit if indicated by the order) to transfer
     *                            any relevant tokens on their behalf and that
     *                            contracts must implement `onERC1155Received`
     *                            to receive ERC1155 tokens as consideration.
     *                            Also note that all offer and consideration
     *                            components must have no remainder after
     *                            multiplication of the respective amount with
     *                            the supplied fraction for the partial fill to
     *                            be considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers   An array where each element contains a
     *                            reference to a specific offer or
     *                            consideration, a token identifier, and a proof
     *                            that the supplied token identifier is
     *                            contained in the merkle root held by the item
     *                            in question's criteria element. Note that an
     *                            empty criteria indicates that any
     *                            (transferable) token identifier on the token
     *                            in question is valid and that no associated
     *                            proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Seaport.
     * @param recipient           The intended recipient for all received items,
     *                            with `address(0)` indicating that the caller
     *                            should receive the items.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillAdvancedOrder(
        AdvancedOrder calldata advancedOrder,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    ) external payable returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, each with an arbitrary number
     *         of items for offer and consideration. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *         Note that this function does not support criteria-based orders or
     *         partial filling of orders (though filling the remainder of a
     *         partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders                    The orders to fulfill. Note that both
     *                                  the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                                  approve this contract (or the
     *                                  corresponding conduit if indicated) to
     *                                  transfer any relevant tokens on their
     *                                  behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155
     *                                  tokens as consideration.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used, with
     *                                  direct approvals set on this contract.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, fully or partially, with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration per order
     *         alongside criteria resolvers containing specific token
     *         identifiers and associated proofs. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders            The orders to fulfill along with the
     *                                  fraction of those orders to attempt to
     *                                  fill. Note that both the offerer and the
     *                                  fulfiller must first approve this
     *                                  contract (or their preferred conduit if
     *                                  indicated by the order) to transfer any
     *                                  relevant tokens on their behalf and that
     *                                  contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` to enable receipt of
     *                                  ERC1155 tokens as consideration. Also
     *                                  note that all offer and consideration
     *                                  components must have no remainder after
     *                                  multiplication of the respective amount
     *                                  with the supplied fraction for an
     *                                  order's partial fill amount to be
     *                                  considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers         An array where each element contains a
     *                                  reference to a specific offer or
     *                                  consideration, a token identifier, and a
     *                                  proof that the supplied token identifier
     *                                  is contained in the merkle root held by
     *                                  the item in question's criteria element.
     *                                  Note that an empty criteria indicates
     *                                  that any (transferable) token
     *                                  identifier on the token in question is
     *                                  valid and that no associated proof needs
     *                                  to be supplied.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used, with
     *                                  direct approvals set on this contract.
     * @param recipient                 The intended recipient for all received
     *                                  items, with `address(0)` indicating that
     *                                  the caller should receive the items.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of orders, each with an arbitrary
     *         number of items for offer and consideration along with as set of
     *         fulfillments allocating offer components to consideration
     *         components. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based or partial filling of orders (though filling the
     *         remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders       The orders to match. Note that both the offerer and
     *                     fulfiller on each order must first approve this
     *                     contract (or their conduit if indicated by the order)
     *                     to transfer any relevant tokens on their behalf and
     *                     each consideration recipient must implement
     *                     `onERC1155Received` to enable ERC1155 token receipt.
     * @param fulfillments An array of elements allocating offer components to
     *                     consideration components. Note that each
     *                     consideration component must be fully met for the
     *                     match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of full or partial orders, each with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration, supplying
     *         criteria resolvers containing specific token identifiers and
     *         associated proofs as well as fulfillments allocating offer
     *         components to consideration components.
     *
     * @param orders            The advanced orders to match. Note that both the
     *                          offerer and fulfiller on each order must first
     *                          approve this contract (or a preferred conduit if
     *                          indicated by the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                          tokens on their behalf and each consideration
     *                          recipient must implement `onERC1155Received` in
     *                          order to receive ERC1155 tokens. Also note that
     *                          the offer and consideration components for each
     *                          order must have no remainder after multiplying
     *                          the respective amount with the supplied fraction
     *                          in order for the group of partial fills to be
     *                          considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root. Note that
     *                          an empty root indicates that any (transferable)
     *                          token identifier is valid and that no associated
     *                          proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components. Note that each
     *                          consideration component must be fully met in
     *                          order for the match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata orders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Cancel an arbitrary number of orders. Note that only the offerer
     *         or the zone of a given order may cancel it. Callers should ensure
     *         that the intended order was cancelled by calling `getOrderStatus`
     *         and confirming that `isCancelled` returns `true`.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to cancel.
     *
     * @return cancelled A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully cancelled.
     */
    function cancel(OrderComponents[] calldata orders)
        external
        returns (bool cancelled);
    /**
     * @notice Validate an arbitrary number of orders, thereby registering their
     *         signatures as valid and allowing the fulfiller to skip signature
     *         verification on fulfillment. Note that validated orders may still
     *         be unfulfillable due to invalid item amounts or other factors;
     *         callers should determine whether validated orders are fulfillable
     *         by simulating the fulfillment call prior to execution. Also note
     *         that anyone can validate a signed order, but only the offerer can
     *         validate an order without supplying a signature.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to validate.
     *
     * @return validated A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully validated.
     */
    function validate(Order[] calldata orders)
        external
        returns (bool validated);
    /**
     * @notice Cancel all orders from a given offerer with a given zone in bulk
     *         by incrementing a counter. Note that only the offerer may
     *         increment the counter.
     *
     * @return newCounter The new counter.
     */
    function incrementCounter() external returns (uint256 newCounter);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the order hash for a given order.
     *
     * @param order The components of the order.
     *
     * @return orderHash The order hash.
     */
    function getOrderHash(OrderComponents calldata order)
        external
        view
        returns (bytes32 orderHash);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the status of a given order by hash, including whether
     *         the order has been cancelled or validated and the fraction of the
     *         order that has been filled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash in question.
     *
     * @return isValidated A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been validated (i.e. previously approved or
     *                     partially filled).
     * @return isCancelled A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been cancelled.
     * @return totalFilled The total portion of the order that has been filled
     *                     (i.e. the "numerator").
     * @return totalSize   The total size of the order that is either filled or
     *                     unfilled (i.e. the "denominator").
     */
    function getOrderStatus(bytes32 orderHash)
        external
        view
        returns (
            bool isValidated,
            bool isCancelled,
            uint256 totalFilled,
            uint256 totalSize
        );
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the current counter for a given offerer.
     *
     * @param offerer The offerer in question.
     *
     * @return counter The current counter.
     */
    function getCounter(address offerer)
        external
        view
        returns (uint256 counter);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve configuration information for this contract.
     *
     * @return version           The contract version.
     * @return domainSeparator   The domain separator for this contract.
     * @return conduitController The conduit Controller set for this contract.
     */
    function information()
        external
        view
        returns (
            string memory version,
            bytes32 domainSeparator,
            address conduitController
        );
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the name of this contract.
     *
     * @return contractName The name of this contract.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory contractName);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import "./TransferHelperStructs.sol";
import { TokenTransferrer } from "../lib/TokenTransferrer.sol";
import { ConduitInterface } from "../interfaces/ConduitInterface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConduitControllerInterface
} from "../interfaces/ConduitControllerInterface.sol";
import { Conduit } from "../conduit/Conduit.sol";
import { ConduitTransfer } from "../conduit/lib/ConduitStructs.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    TransferHelperInterface
} from "../interfaces/TransferHelperInterface.sol";
/**
 * @title TransferHelper
 * @author stuckinaboot, stephankmin
 * @notice TransferHelper is a utility contract for transferring
 *         ERC20/ERC721/ERC1155 items in bulk to a specific recipient.
 */
contract TransferHelper is TransferHelperInterface, TokenTransferrer {
    // Allow for interaction with the conduit controller.
    ConduitControllerInterface internal immutable _CONDUIT_CONTROLLER;
    // Cache the conduit creation hash used by the conduit controller.
    bytes32 internal immutable _CONDUIT_CREATION_CODE_HASH;
    /**
     * @dev Set the supplied conduit controller and retrieve its
     *      conduit creation code hash.
     *
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) {
        // Get the conduit creation code hash from the supplied conduit
        // controller and set it as an immutable.
        ConduitControllerInterface controller = ConduitControllerInterface(
            conduitController
        );
        (_CONDUIT_CREATION_CODE_HASH, ) = controller.getConduitCodeHashes();
        // Set the supplied conduit controller as an immutable.
        _CONDUIT_CONTROLLER = controller;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Transfer multiple items to a single recipient.
     *
     * @param items      The items to transfer.
     * @param recipient  The address the items should be transferred to.
     * @param conduitKey The key of the conduit through which the bulk transfer
     *                   should occur.
     *
     * @return magicValue A value indicating that the transfers were successful.
     */
    function bulkTransfer(
        TransferHelperItem[] calldata items,
        address recipient,
        bytes32 conduitKey
    ) external override returns (bytes4 magicValue) {
        // Retrieve total number of transfers and place on stack.
        uint256 totalTransfers = items.length;
        // If no conduitKey is given, use TokenTransferrer to perform transfers.
        if (conduitKey == bytes32(0)) {
            // Skip overflow checks: all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                // Iterate over each transfer.
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalTransfers; ++i) {
                    // Retrieve the transfer in question.
                    TransferHelperItem calldata item = items[i];
                    // Perform a transfer based on the transfer's item type.
                    // Revert if item being transferred is a native token.
                    if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.NATIVE) {
                        revert InvalidItemType();
                    } else if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC20) {
                        _performERC20Transfer(
                            item.token,
                            msg.sender,
                            recipient,
                            item.amount
                        );
                    } else if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC721) {
                        _performERC721Transfer(
                            item.token,
                            msg.sender,
                            recipient,
                            item.identifier
                        );
                    } else {
                        _performERC1155Transfer(
                            item.token,
                            msg.sender,
                            recipient,
                            item.identifier,
                            item.amount
                        );
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        // Otherwise, a conduitKey was provided.
        else {
            // Derive the conduit address from the deployer, conduit key
            // and creation code hash.
            address conduit = address(
                uint160(
                    uint256(
                        keccak256(
                            abi.encodePacked(
                                bytes1(0xff),
                                address(_CONDUIT_CONTROLLER),
                                conduitKey,
                                _CONDUIT_CREATION_CODE_HASH
                            )
                        )
                    )
                )
            );
            // Declare a new array to populate with each token transfer.
            ConduitTransfer[] memory conduitTransfers = new ConduitTransfer[](
                totalTransfers
            );
            // Skip overflow checks: all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                // Iterate over each transfer.
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalTransfers; ++i) {
                    // Retrieve the transfer in question.
                    TransferHelperItem calldata item = items[i];
                    // Create a ConduitTransfer corresponding to each
                    // TransferHelperItem.
                    conduitTransfers[i] = ConduitTransfer(
                        item.itemType,
                        item.token,
                        msg.sender,
                        recipient,
                        item.identifier,
                        item.amount
                    );
                }
            }
            // Call the conduit and execute bulk transfers.
            ConduitInterface(conduit).execute(conduitTransfers);
        }
        // Return a magic value indicating that the transfers were performed.
        magicValue = this.bulkTransfer.selector;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { ConduitItemType } from "../conduit/lib/ConduitEnums.sol";
struct TransferHelperItem {
    ConduitItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifier;
    uint256 amount;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import "./TokenTransferrerConstants.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    TokenTransferrerErrors
} from "../interfaces/TokenTransferrerErrors.sol";
import { ConduitBatch1155Transfer } from "../conduit/lib/ConduitStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title TokenTransferrer
 * @author 0age
 * @custom:coauthor d1ll0n
 * @custom:coauthor transmissions11
 * @notice TokenTransferrer is a library for performing optimized ERC20, ERC721,
 *         ERC1155, and batch ERC1155 transfers, used by both Seaport as well as
 *         by conduits deployed by the ConduitController. Use great caution when
 *         considering these functions for use in other codebases, as there are
 *         significant side effects and edge cases that need to be thoroughly
 *         understood and carefully addressed.
 */
contract TokenTransferrer is TokenTransferrerErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC20 tokens from a given originator
     *      to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on the
     *      contract performing the transfer.
     *
     * @param token      The ERC20 token to transfer.
     * @param from       The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount to transfer.
     */
    function _performERC20Transfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform an optimized ERC20 token transfer.
        assembly {
            // The free memory pointer memory slot will be used when populating
            // call data for the transfer; read the value and restore it later.
            let memPointer := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            // Write call data into memory, starting with function selector.
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_sig_ptr, ERC20_transferFrom_signature)
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_from_ptr, from)
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_to_ptr, to)
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_amount_ptr, amount)
            // Make call & copy up to 32 bytes of return data to scratch space.
            // Scratch space does not need to be cleared ahead of time, as the
            // subsequent check will ensure that either at least a full word of
            // return data is received (in which case it will be overwritten) or
            // that no data is received (in which case scratch space will be
            // ignored) on a successful call to the given token.
            let callStatus := call(
                gas(),
                token,
                0,
                ERC20_transferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC20_transferFrom_length,
                0,
                OneWord
            )
            // Determine whether transfer was successful using status & result.
            let success := and(
                // Set success to whether the call reverted, if not check it
                // either returned exactly 1 (can't just be non-zero data), or
                // had no return data.
                or(
                    and(eq(mload(0), 1), gt(returndatasize(), 31)),
                    iszero(returndatasize())
                ),
                callStatus
            )
            // Handle cases where either the transfer failed or no data was
            // returned. Group these, as most transfers will succeed with data.
            // Equivalent to `or(iszero(success), iszero(returndatasize()))`
            // but after it's inverted for JUMPI this expression is cheaper.
            if iszero(and(success, iszero(iszero(returndatasize())))) {
                // If the token has no code or the transfer failed: Equivalent
                // to `or(iszero(success), iszero(extcodesize(token)))` but
                // after it's inverted for JUMPI this expression is cheaper.
                if iszero(and(iszero(iszero(extcodesize(token))), success)) {
                    // If the transfer failed:
                    if iszero(success) {
                        // If it was due to a revert:
                        if iszero(callStatus) {
                            // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as
                            // sufficient gas remains to do so:
                            if returndatasize() {
                                // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to
                                // copy returndata while expanding memory where
                                // necessary. Start by computing the word size
                                // of returndata and allocated memory. Round up
                                // to the nearest full word.
                                let returnDataWords := div(
                                    add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                                    OneWord
                                )
                                // Note: use the free memory pointer in place of
                                // msize() to work around a Yul warning that
                                // prevents accessing msize directly when the IR
                                // pipeline is activated.
                                let msizeWords := div(memPointer, OneWord)
                                // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                                let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                                // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                                if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                                    cost := add(
                                        cost,
                                        add(
                                            mul(
                                                sub(
                                                    returnDataWords,
                                                    msizeWords
                                                ),
                                                CostPerWord
                                            ),
                                            div(
                                                sub(
                                                    mul(
                                                        returnDataWords,
                                                        returnDataWords
                                                    ),
                                                    mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                                ),
                                                MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                            )
                                        )
                                    )
                                }
                                // Finally, add a small constant and compare to
                                // gas remaining; bubble up the revert data if
                                // enough gas is still available.
                                if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                                    // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite
                                    // existing memory.
                                    returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                                    // Revert, specifying memory region with
                                    // copied returndata.
                                    revert(0, returndatasize())
                                }
                            }
                            // Otherwise revert with a generic error message.
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                            )
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr,
                                token
                            )
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr,
                                from
                            )
                            mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr, to)
                            mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr, 0)
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr,
                                amount
                            )
                            revert(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length
                            )
                        }
                        // Otherwise revert with a message about the token
                        // returning false or non-compliant return values.
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_sig_ptr,
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_signature
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_token_ptr,
                            token
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_from_ptr,
                            from
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_to_ptr,
                            to
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_amount_ptr,
                            amount
                        )
                        revert(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_sig_ptr,
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_length
                        )
                    }
                    // Otherwise, revert with error about token not having code:
                    mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                    mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                    revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
                }
                // Otherwise, the token just returned no data despite the call
                // having succeeded; no need to optimize for this as it's not
                // technically ERC20 compliant.
            }
            // Restore the original free memory pointer.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, memPointer)
            // Restore the zero slot to zero.
            mstore(ZeroSlot, 0)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer an ERC721 token from a given
     *      originator to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on
     *      the contract performing the transfer. Note that this function does
     *      not check whether the receiver can accept the ERC721 token (i.e. it
     *      does not use `safeTransferFrom`).
     *
     * @param token      The ERC721 token to transfer.
     * @param from       The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier The tokenId to transfer.
     */
    function _performERC721Transfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform an optimized ERC721 token transfer.
        assembly {
            // If the token has no code, revert.
            if iszero(extcodesize(token)) {
                mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
            }
            // The free memory pointer memory slot will be used when populating
            // call data for the transfer; read the value and restore it later.
            let memPointer := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            // Write call data to memory starting with function selector.
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_sig_ptr, ERC721_transferFrom_signature)
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_from_ptr, from)
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_to_ptr, to)
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_id_ptr, identifier)
            // Perform the call, ignoring return data.
            let success := call(
                gas(),
                token,
                0,
                ERC721_transferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC721_transferFrom_length,
                0,
                0
            )
            // If the transfer reverted:
            if iszero(success) {
                // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as sufficient
                // gas remains to do so:
                if returndatasize() {
                    // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to copy
                    // returndata while expanding memory where necessary. Start
                    // by computing word size of returndata & allocated memory.
                    // Round up to the nearest full word.
                    let returnDataWords := div(
                        add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                        OneWord
                    )
                    // Note: use the free memory pointer in place of msize() to
                    // work around a Yul warning that prevents accessing msize
                    // directly when the IR pipeline is activated.
                    let msizeWords := div(memPointer, OneWord)
                    // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                    let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                    // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                    if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                        cost := add(
                            cost,
                            add(
                                mul(
                                    sub(returnDataWords, msizeWords),
                                    CostPerWord
                                ),
                                div(
                                    sub(
                                        mul(returnDataWords, returnDataWords),
                                        mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                    ),
                                    MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                )
                            )
                        )
                    }
                    // Finally, add a small constant and compare to gas
                    // remaining; bubble up the revert data if enough gas is
                    // still available.
                    if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                        // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite existing memory.
                        returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                        // Revert, giving memory region with copied returndata.
                        revert(0, returndatasize())
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise revert with a generic error message.
                mstore(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                )
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr, token)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr, from)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr, to)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr, identifier)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr, 1)
                revert(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length
                )
            }
            // Restore the original free memory pointer.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, memPointer)
            // Restore the zero slot to zero.
            mstore(ZeroSlot, 0)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC1155 tokens from a given
     *      originator to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on
     *      the contract performing the transfer and contract recipients must
     *      implement the ERC1155TokenReceiver interface to indicate that they
     *      are willing to accept the transfer.
     *
     * @param token      The ERC1155 token to transfer.
     * @param from       The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier The id to transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount to transfer.
     */
    function _performERC1155Transfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform an optimized ERC1155 token transfer.
        assembly {
            // If the token has no code, revert.
            if iszero(extcodesize(token)) {
                mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
            }
            // The following memory slots will be used when populating call data
            // for the transfer; read the values and restore them later.
            let memPointer := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            let slot0x80 := mload(Slot0x80)
            let slot0xA0 := mload(Slot0xA0)
            let slot0xC0 := mload(Slot0xC0)
            // Write call data into memory, beginning with function selector.
            mstore(
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_signature
            )
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_from_ptr, from)
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_to_ptr, to)
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_id_ptr, identifier)
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_amount_ptr, amount)
            mstore(
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_offset_ptr,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_offset
            )
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_ptr, 0)
            // Perform the call, ignoring return data.
            let success := call(
                gas(),
                token,
                0,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_length,
                0,
                0
            )
            // If the transfer reverted:
            if iszero(success) {
                // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as sufficient
                // gas remains to do so:
                if returndatasize() {
                    // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to copy
                    // returndata while expanding memory where necessary. Start
                    // by computing word size of returndata & allocated memory.
                    // Round up to the nearest full word.
                    let returnDataWords := div(
                        add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                        OneWord
                    )
                    // Note: use the free memory pointer in place of msize() to
                    // work around a Yul warning that prevents accessing msize
                    // directly when the IR pipeline is activated.
                    let msizeWords := div(memPointer, OneWord)
                    // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                    let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                    // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                    if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                        cost := add(
                            cost,
                            add(
                                mul(
                                    sub(returnDataWords, msizeWords),
                                    CostPerWord
                                ),
                                div(
                                    sub(
                                        mul(returnDataWords, returnDataWords),
                                        mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                    ),
                                    MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                )
                            )
                        )
                    }
                    // Finally, add a small constant and compare to gas
                    // remaining; bubble up the revert data if enough gas is
                    // still available.
                    if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                        // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite existing memory.
                        returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                        // Revert, giving memory region with copied returndata.
                        revert(0, returndatasize())
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise revert with a generic error message.
                mstore(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                )
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr, token)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr, from)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr, to)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr, identifier)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr, amount)
                revert(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length
                )
            }
            mstore(Slot0x80, slot0x80) // Restore slot 0x80.
            mstore(Slot0xA0, slot0xA0) // Restore slot 0xA0.
            mstore(Slot0xC0, slot0xC0) // Restore slot 0xC0.
            // Restore the original free memory pointer.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, memPointer)
            // Restore the zero slot to zero.
            mstore(ZeroSlot, 0)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC1155 tokens from a given
     *      originator to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on
     *      the contract performing the transfer and contract recipients must
     *      implement the ERC1155TokenReceiver interface to indicate that they
     *      are willing to accept the transfer. NOTE: this function is not
     *      memory-safe; it will overwrite existing memory, restore the free
     *      memory pointer to the default value, and overwrite the zero slot.
     *      This function should only be called once memory is no longer
     *      required and when uninitialized arrays are not utilized, and memory
     *      should be considered fully corrupted (aside from the existence of a
     *      default-value free memory pointer) after calling this function.
     *
     * @param batchTransfers The group of 1155 batch transfers to perform.
     */
    function _performERC1155BatchTransfers(
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batchTransfers
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform optimized batch 1155 transfers.
        assembly {
            let len := batchTransfers.length
            // Pointer to first head in the array, which is offset to the struct
            // at each index. This gets incremented after each loop to avoid
            // multiplying by 32 to get the offset for each element.
            let nextElementHeadPtr := batchTransfers.offset
            // Pointer to beginning of the head of the array. This is the
            // reference position each offset references. It's held static to
            // let each loop calculate the data position for an element.
            let arrayHeadPtr := nextElementHeadPtr
            // Write the function selector, which will be reused for each call:
            // safeBatchTransferFrom(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)
            mstore(
                ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset,
                ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_signature
            )
            // Iterate over each batch transfer.
            for {
                let i := 0
            } lt(i, len) {
                i := add(i, 1)
            } {
                // Read the offset to the beginning of the element and add
                // it to pointer to the beginning of the array head to get
                // the absolute position of the element in calldata.
                let elementPtr := add(
                    arrayHeadPtr,
                    calldataload(nextElementHeadPtr)
                )
                // Retrieve the token from calldata.
                let token := calldataload(elementPtr)
                // If the token has no code, revert.
                if iszero(extcodesize(token)) {
                    mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                    mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                    revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
                }
                // Get the total number of supplied ids.
                let idsLength := calldataload(
                    add(elementPtr, ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset)
                )
                // Determine the expected offset for the amounts array.
                let expectedAmountsOffset := add(
                    ConduitBatch1155Transfer_amounts_length_baseOffset,
                    mul(idsLength, OneWord)
                )
                // Validate struct encoding.
                let invalidEncoding := iszero(
                    and(
                        // ids.length == amounts.length
                        eq(
                            idsLength,
                            calldataload(add(elementPtr, expectedAmountsOffset))
                        ),
                        and(
                            // ids_offset == 0xa0
                            eq(
                                calldataload(
                                    add(
                                        elementPtr,
                                        ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_head_offset
                                    )
                                ),
                                ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset
                            ),
                            // amounts_offset == 0xc0 + ids.length*32
                            eq(
                                calldataload(
                                    add(
                                        elementPtr,
                                        ConduitBatchTransfer_amounts_head_offset
                                    )
                                ),
                                expectedAmountsOffset
                            )
                        )
                    )
                )
                // Revert with an error if the encoding is not valid.
                if invalidEncoding {
                    mstore(
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_ptr,
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_selector
                    )
                    revert(
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_ptr,
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_length
                    )
                }
                // Update the offset position for the next loop
                nextElementHeadPtr := add(nextElementHeadPtr, OneWord)
                // Copy the first section of calldata (before dynamic values).
                calldatacopy(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_ptr,
                    add(elementPtr, ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset),
                    ConduitBatch1155Transfer_usable_head_size
                )
                // Determine size of calldata required for ids and amounts. Note
                // that the size includes both lengths as well as the data.
                let idsAndAmountsSize := add(TwoWords, mul(idsLength, TwoWords))
                // Update the offset for the data array in memory.
                mstore(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_data_head_ptr,
                    add(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_offset,
                        idsAndAmountsSize
                    )
                )
                // Set the length of the data array in memory to zero.
                mstore(
                    add(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_data_length_basePtr,
                        idsAndAmountsSize
                    ),
                    0
                )
                // Determine the total calldata size for the call to transfer.
                let transferDataSize := add(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_calldata_baseSize,
                    idsAndAmountsSize
                )
                // Copy second section of calldata (including dynamic values).
                calldatacopy(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_ptr,
                    add(elementPtr, ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset),
                    idsAndAmountsSize
                )
                // Perform the call to transfer 1155 tokens.
                let success := call(
                    gas(),
                    token,
                    0,
                    ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset, // Data portion start.
                    transferDataSize, // Location of the length of callData.
                    0,
                    0
                )
                // If the transfer reverted:
                if iszero(success) {
                    // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as
                    // sufficient gas remains to do so:
                    if returndatasize() {
                        // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to copy
                        // returndata while expanding memory where necessary.
                        // Start by computing word size of returndata and
                        // allocated memory. Round up to the nearest full word.
                        let returnDataWords := div(
                            add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                            OneWord
                        )
                        // Note: use transferDataSize in place of msize() to
                        // work around a Yul warning that prevents accessing
                        // msize directly when the IR pipeline is activated.
                        // The free memory pointer is not used here because
                        // this function does almost all memory management
                        // manually and does not update it, and transferDataSize
                        // should be the largest memory value used (unless a
                        // previous batch was larger).
                        let msizeWords := div(transferDataSize, OneWord)
                        // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                        let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                        // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                        if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                            cost := add(
                                cost,
                                add(
                                    mul(
                                        sub(returnDataWords, msizeWords),
                                        CostPerWord
                                    ),
                                    div(
                                        sub(
                                            mul(
                                                returnDataWords,
                                                returnDataWords
                                            ),
                                            mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                        ),
                                        MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                    )
                                )
                            )
                        }
                        // Finally, add a small constant and compare to gas
                        // remaining; bubble up the revert data if enough gas is
                        // still available.
                        if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                            // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite existing.
                            returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                            // Revert with memory region containing returndata.
                            revert(0, returndatasize())
                        }
                    }
                    // Set the error signature.
                    mstore(
                        0,
                        ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                    )
                    // Write the token.
                    mstore(ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_token_ptr, token)
                    // Increase the offset to ids by 32.
                    mstore(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_head_ptr,
                        ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_ids_offset
                    )
                    // Increase the offset to amounts by 32.
                    mstore(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_head_ptr,
                        add(
                            OneWord,
                            mload(BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_head_ptr)
                        )
                    )
                    // Return modified region. The total size stays the same as
                    // `token` uses the same number of bytes as `data.length`.
                    revert(0, transferDataSize)
                }
            }
            // Reset the free memory pointer to the default value; memory must
            // be assumed to be dirtied and not reused from this point forward.
            // Also note that the zero slot is not reset to zero, meaning empty
            // arrays cannot be safely created or utilized until it is restored.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, DefaultFreeMemoryPointer)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConduitTransfer,
    ConduitBatch1155Transfer
} from "../conduit/lib/ConduitStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title ConduitInterface
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ConduitInterface contains all external function interfaces, events,
 *         and errors for conduit contracts.
 */
interface ConduitInterface {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to execute transfers using a
     *      caller that does not have an open channel.
     */
    error ChannelClosed(address channel);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to update a channel to the
     *      current status of that channel.
     */
    error ChannelStatusAlreadySet(address channel, bool isOpen);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to execute a transfer for an
     *      item that does not have an ERC20/721/1155 item type.
     */
    error InvalidItemType();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to update the status of a
     *      channel from a caller that is not the conduit controller.
     */
    error InvalidController();
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a channel is opened or closed.
     *
     * @param channel The channel that has been updated.
     * @param open    A boolean indicating whether the conduit is open or not.
     */
    event ChannelUpdated(address indexed channel, bool open);
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of ERC20/721/1155 transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function.
     *
     * @param transfers The ERC20/721/1155 transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function execute(ConduitTransfer[] calldata transfers)
        external
        returns (bytes4 magicValue);
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of batch 1155 transfers. Only a caller with an
     *         open channel can call this function.
     *
     * @param batch1155Transfers The 1155 batch transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeBatch1155(
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batch1155Transfers
    ) external returns (bytes4 magicValue);
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of transfers, both single and batch 1155. Only
     *         a caller with an open channel can call this function.
     *
     * @param standardTransfers  The ERC20/721/1155 transfers to perform.
     * @param batch1155Transfers The 1155 batch transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeWithBatch1155(
        ConduitTransfer[] calldata standardTransfers,
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batch1155Transfers
    ) external returns (bytes4 magicValue);
    /**
     * @notice Open or close a given channel. Only callable by the controller.
     *
     * @param channel The channel to open or close.
     * @param isOpen  The status of the channel (either open or closed).
     */
    function updateChannel(address channel, bool isOpen) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title ConduitControllerInterface
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ConduitControllerInterface contains all external function interfaces,
 *         structs, events, and errors for the conduit controller.
 */
interface ConduitControllerInterface {
    /**
     * @dev Track the conduit key, current owner, new potential owner, and open
     *      channels for each deployed conduit.
     */
    struct ConduitProperties {
        bytes32 key;
        address owner;
        address potentialOwner;
        address[] channels;
        mapping(address => uint256) channelIndexesPlusOne;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a new conduit is created.
     *
     * @param conduit    The newly created conduit.
     * @param conduitKey The conduit key used to create the new conduit.
     */
    event NewConduit(address conduit, bytes32 conduitKey);
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever conduit ownership is transferred.
     *
     * @param conduit       The conduit for which ownership has been
     *                      transferred.
     * @param previousOwner The previous owner of the conduit.
     * @param newOwner      The new owner of the conduit.
     */
    event OwnershipTransferred(
        address indexed conduit,
        address indexed previousOwner,
        address indexed newOwner
    );
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a conduit owner registers a new potential
     *      owner for that conduit.
     *
     * @param newPotentialOwner The new potential owner of the conduit.
     */
    event PotentialOwnerUpdated(address indexed newPotentialOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to create a new conduit using a
     *      conduit key where the first twenty bytes of the key do not match the
     *      address of the caller.
     */
    error InvalidCreator();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to create a new conduit when no
     *      initial owner address is supplied.
     */
    error InvalidInitialOwner();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to set a new potential owner
     *      that is already set.
     */
    error NewPotentialOwnerAlreadySet(
        address conduit,
        address newPotentialOwner
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to cancel ownership transfer
     *      when no new potential owner is currently set.
     */
    error NoPotentialOwnerCurrentlySet(address conduit);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to interact with a conduit that
     *      does not yet exist.
     */
    error NoConduit();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to create a conduit that
     *      already exists.
     */
    error ConduitAlreadyExists(address conduit);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to update channels or transfer
     *      ownership of a conduit when the caller is not the owner of the
     *      conduit in question.
     */
    error CallerIsNotOwner(address conduit);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to register a new potential
     *      owner and supplying the null address.
     */
    error NewPotentialOwnerIsZeroAddress(address conduit);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to claim ownership of a conduit
     *      with a caller that is not the current potential owner for the
     *      conduit in question.
     */
    error CallerIsNotNewPotentialOwner(address conduit);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to retrieve a channel using an
     *      index that is out of range.
     */
    error ChannelOutOfRange(address conduit);
    /**
     * @notice Deploy a new conduit using a supplied conduit key and assigning
     *         an initial owner for the deployed conduit. Note that the first
     *         twenty bytes of the supplied conduit key must match the caller
     *         and that a new conduit cannot be created if one has already been
     *         deployed using the same conduit key.
     *
     * @param conduitKey   The conduit key used to deploy the conduit. Note that
     *                     the first twenty bytes of the conduit key must match
     *                     the caller of this contract.
     * @param initialOwner The initial owner to set for the new conduit.
     *
     * @return conduit The address of the newly deployed conduit.
     */
    function createConduit(bytes32 conduitKey, address initialOwner)
        external
        returns (address conduit);
    /**
     * @notice Open or close a channel on a given conduit, thereby allowing the
     *         specified account to execute transfers against that conduit.
     *         Extreme care must be taken when updating channels, as malicious
     *         or vulnerable channels can transfer any ERC20, ERC721 and ERC1155
     *         tokens where the token holder has granted the conduit approval.
     *         Only the owner of the conduit in question may call this function.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to open or close the channel.
     * @param channel The channel to open or close on the conduit.
     * @param isOpen  A boolean indicating whether to open or close the channel.
     */
    function updateChannel(
        address conduit,
        address channel,
        bool isOpen
    ) external;
    /**
     * @notice Initiate conduit ownership transfer by assigning a new potential
     *         owner for the given conduit. Once set, the new potential owner
     *         may call `acceptOwnership` to claim ownership of the conduit.
     *         Only the owner of the conduit in question may call this function.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to initiate ownership transfer.
     * @param newPotentialOwner The new potential owner of the conduit.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address conduit, address newPotentialOwner)
        external;
    /**
     * @notice Clear the currently set potential owner, if any, from a conduit.
     *         Only the owner of the conduit in question may call this function.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to cancel ownership transfer.
     */
    function cancelOwnershipTransfer(address conduit) external;
    /**
     * @notice Accept ownership of a supplied conduit. Only accounts that the
     *         current owner has set as the new potential owner may call this
     *         function.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to accept ownership.
     */
    function acceptOwnership(address conduit) external;
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the current owner of a deployed conduit.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to retrieve the associated owner.
     *
     * @return owner The owner of the supplied conduit.
     */
    function ownerOf(address conduit) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the conduit key for a deployed conduit via reverse
     *         lookup.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to retrieve the associated conduit
     *                key.
     *
     * @return conduitKey The conduit key used to deploy the supplied conduit.
     */
    function getKey(address conduit) external view returns (bytes32 conduitKey);
    /**
     * @notice Derive the conduit associated with a given conduit key and
     *         determine whether that conduit exists (i.e. whether it has been
     *         deployed).
     *
     * @param conduitKey The conduit key used to derive the conduit.
     *
     * @return conduit The derived address of the conduit.
     * @return exists  A boolean indicating whether the derived conduit has been
     *                 deployed or not.
     */
    function getConduit(bytes32 conduitKey)
        external
        view
        returns (address conduit, bool exists);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the potential owner, if any, for a given conduit. The
     *         current owner may set a new potential owner via
     *         `transferOwnership` and that owner may then accept ownership of
     *         the conduit in question via `acceptOwnership`.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to retrieve the potential owner.
     *
     * @return potentialOwner The potential owner, if any, for the conduit.
     */
    function getPotentialOwner(address conduit)
        external
        view
        returns (address potentialOwner);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the status (either open or closed) of a given channel on
     *         a conduit.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to retrieve the channel status.
     * @param channel The channel for which to retrieve the status.
     *
     * @return isOpen The status of the channel on the given conduit.
     */
    function getChannelStatus(address conduit, address channel)
        external
        view
        returns (bool isOpen);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the total number of open channels for a given conduit.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to retrieve the total channel count.
     *
     * @return totalChannels The total number of open channels for the conduit.
     */
    function getTotalChannels(address conduit)
        external
        view
        returns (uint256 totalChannels);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve an open channel at a specific index for a given conduit.
     *         Note that the index of a channel can change as a result of other
     *         channels being closed on the conduit.
     *
     * @param conduit      The conduit for which to retrieve the open channel.
     * @param channelIndex The index of the channel in question.
     *
     * @return channel The open channel, if any, at the specified channel index.
     */
    function getChannel(address conduit, uint256 channelIndex)
        external
        view
        returns (address channel);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve all open channels for a given conduit. Note that calling
     *         this function for a conduit with many channels will revert with
     *         an out-of-gas error.
     *
     * @param conduit The conduit for which to retrieve open channels.
     *
     * @return channels An array of open channels on the given conduit.
     */
    function getChannels(address conduit)
        external
        view
        returns (address[] memory channels);
    /**
     * @dev Retrieve the conduit creation code and runtime code hashes.
     */
    function getConduitCodeHashes()
        external
        view
        returns (bytes32 creationCodeHash, bytes32 runtimeCodeHash);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { ConduitInterface } from "../interfaces/ConduitInterface.sol";
import { ConduitItemType } from "./lib/ConduitEnums.sol";
import { TokenTransferrer } from "../lib/TokenTransferrer.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConduitTransfer,
    ConduitBatch1155Transfer
} from "./lib/ConduitStructs.sol";
import "./lib/ConduitConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title Conduit
 * @author 0age
 * @notice This contract serves as an originator for "proxied" transfers. Each
 *         conduit is deployed and controlled by a "conduit controller" that can
 *         add and remove "channels" or contracts that can instruct the conduit
 *         to transfer approved ERC20/721/1155 tokens. *IMPORTANT NOTE: each
 *         conduit has an owner that can arbitrarily add or remove channels, and
 *         a malicious or negligent owner can add a channel that allows for any
 *         approved ERC20/721/1155 tokens to be taken immediately — be extremely
 *         cautious with what conduits you give token approvals to!*
 */
contract Conduit is ConduitInterface, TokenTransferrer {
    // Set deployer as an immutable controller that can update channel statuses.
    address private immutable _controller;
    // Track the status of each channel.
    mapping(address => bool) private _channels;
    /**
     * @notice Ensure that the caller is currently registered as an open channel
     *         on the conduit.
     */
    modifier onlyOpenChannel() {
        // Utilize assembly to access channel storage mapping directly.
        assembly {
            // Write the caller to scratch space.
            mstore(ChannelKey_channel_ptr, caller())
            // Write the storage slot for _channels to scratch space.
            mstore(ChannelKey_slot_ptr, _channels.slot)
            // Derive the position in storage of _channels[msg.sender]
            // and check if the stored value is zero.
            if iszero(
                sload(keccak256(ChannelKey_channel_ptr, ChannelKey_length))
            ) {
                // The caller is not an open channel; revert with
                // ChannelClosed(caller). First, set error signature in memory.
                mstore(ChannelClosed_error_ptr, ChannelClosed_error_signature)
                // Next, set the caller as the argument.
                mstore(ChannelClosed_channel_ptr, caller())
                // Finally, revert, returning full custom error with argument.
                revert(ChannelClosed_error_ptr, ChannelClosed_error_length)
            }
        }
        // Continue with function execution.
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @notice In the constructor, set the deployer as the controller.
     */
    constructor() {
        // Set the deployer as the controller.
        _controller = msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of ERC20/721/1155 transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function. Note that channels
     *         are expected to implement reentrancy protection if desired, and
     *         that cross-channel reentrancy may be possible if the conduit has
     *         multiple open channels at once. Also note that channels are
     *         expected to implement checks against transferring any zero-amount
     *         items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param transfers The ERC20/721/1155 transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function execute(ConduitTransfer[] calldata transfers)
        external
        override
        onlyOpenChannel
        returns (bytes4 magicValue)
    {
        // Retrieve the total number of transfers and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalStandardTransfers = transfers.length;
        // Iterate over each transfer.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalStandardTransfers; ) {
            // Retrieve the transfer in question and perform the transfer.
            _transfer(transfers[i]);
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Return a magic value indicating that the transfers were performed.
        magicValue = this.execute.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of batch 1155 item transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function. Note that channels
     *         are expected to implement reentrancy protection if desired, and
     *         that cross-channel reentrancy may be possible if the conduit has
     *         multiple open channels at once. Also note that channels are
     *         expected to implement checks against transferring any zero-amount
     *         items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param batchTransfers The 1155 batch item transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the item transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeBatch1155(
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batchTransfers
    ) external override onlyOpenChannel returns (bytes4 magicValue) {
        // Perform 1155 batch transfers. Note that memory should be considered
        // entirely corrupted from this point forward.
        _performERC1155BatchTransfers(batchTransfers);
        // Return a magic value indicating that the transfers were performed.
        magicValue = this.executeBatch1155.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of transfers, both single ERC20/721/1155 item
     *         transfers as well as batch 1155 item transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function. Note that channels
     *         are expected to implement reentrancy protection if desired, and
     *         that cross-channel reentrancy may be possible if the conduit has
     *         multiple open channels at once. Also note that channels are
     *         expected to implement checks against transferring any zero-amount
     *         items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param standardTransfers The ERC20/721/1155 item transfers to perform.
     * @param batchTransfers    The 1155 batch item transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the item transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeWithBatch1155(
        ConduitTransfer[] calldata standardTransfers,
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batchTransfers
    ) external override onlyOpenChannel returns (bytes4 magicValue) {
        // Retrieve the total number of transfers and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalStandardTransfers = standardTransfers.length;
        // Iterate over each standard transfer.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalStandardTransfers; ) {
            // Retrieve the transfer in question and perform the transfer.
            _transfer(standardTransfers[i]);
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Perform 1155 batch transfers. Note that memory should be considered
        // entirely corrupted from this point forward aside from the free memory
        // pointer having the default value.
        _performERC1155BatchTransfers(batchTransfers);
        // Return a magic value indicating that the transfers were performed.
        magicValue = this.executeWithBatch1155.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Open or close a given channel. Only callable by the controller.
     *
     * @param channel The channel to open or close.
     * @param isOpen  The status of the channel (either open or closed).
     */
    function updateChannel(address channel, bool isOpen) external override {
        // Ensure that the caller is the controller of this contract.
        if (msg.sender != _controller) {
            revert InvalidController();
        }
        // Ensure that the channel does not already have the indicated status.
        if (_channels[channel] == isOpen) {
            revert ChannelStatusAlreadySet(channel, isOpen);
        }
        // Update the status of the channel.
        _channels[channel] = isOpen;
        // Emit a corresponding event.
        emit ChannelUpdated(channel, isOpen);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer a given ERC20/721/1155 item. Note that
     *      channels are expected to implement checks against transferring any
     *      zero-amount items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param item The ERC20/721/1155 item to transfer.
     */
    function _transfer(ConduitTransfer calldata item) internal {
        // Determine the transfer method based on the respective item type.
        if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC20) {
            // Transfer ERC20 token. Note that item.identifier is ignored and
            // therefore ERC20 transfer items are potentially malleable — this
            // check should be performed by the calling channel if a constraint
            // on item malleability is desired.
            _performERC20Transfer(item.token, item.from, item.to, item.amount);
        } else if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC721) {
            // Ensure that exactly one 721 item is being transferred.
            if (item.amount != 1) {
                revert InvalidERC721TransferAmount();
            }
            // Transfer ERC721 token.
            _performERC721Transfer(
                item.token,
                item.from,
                item.to,
                item.identifier
            );
        } else if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC1155) {
            // Transfer ERC1155 token.
            _performERC1155Transfer(
                item.token,
                item.from,
                item.to,
                item.identifier,
                item.amount
            );
        } else {
            // Throw with an error.
            revert InvalidItemType();
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { ConduitItemType } from "./ConduitEnums.sol";
struct ConduitTransfer {
    ConduitItemType itemType;
    address token;
    address from;
    address to;
    uint256 identifier;
    uint256 amount;
}
struct ConduitBatch1155Transfer {
    address token;
    address from;
    address to;
    uint256[] ids;
    uint256[] amounts;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { TransferHelperItem } from "../helpers/TransferHelperStructs.sol";
interface TransferHelperInterface {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to execute transfers with a
     *      NATIVE itemType.
     */
    error InvalidItemType();
    /**
     * @notice Transfer multiple items to a single recipient.
     *
     * @param items The items to transfer.
     * @param recipient  The address the items should be transferred to.
     * @param conduitKey  The key of the conduit performing the bulk transfer.
     */
    function bulkTransfer(
        TransferHelperItem[] calldata items,
        address recipient,
        bytes32 conduitKey
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
enum ConduitItemType {
    NATIVE, // unused
    ERC20,
    ERC721,
    ERC1155
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/*
 * -------------------------- Disambiguation & Other Notes ---------------------
 *    - The term "head" is used as it is in the documentation for ABI encoding,
 *      but only in reference to dynamic types, i.e. it always refers to the
 *      offset or pointer to the body of a dynamic type. In calldata, the head
 *      is always an offset (relative to the parent object), while in memory,
 *      the head is always the pointer to the body. More information found here:
 *      https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/v0.8.14/abi-spec.html#argument-encoding
 *        - Note that the length of an array is separate from and precedes the
 *          head of the array.
 *
 *    - The term "body" is used in place of the term "head" used in the ABI
 *      documentation. It refers to the start of the data for a dynamic type,
 *      e.g. the first word of a struct or the first word of the first element
 *      in an array.
 *
 *    - The term "pointer" is used to describe the absolute position of a value
 *      and never an offset relative to another value.
 *        - The suffix "_ptr" refers to a memory pointer.
 *        - The suffix "_cdPtr" refers to a calldata pointer.
 *
 *    - The term "offset" is used to describe the position of a value relative
 *      to some parent value. For example, OrderParameters_conduit_offset is the
 *      offset to the "conduit" value in the OrderParameters struct relative to
 *      the start of the body.
 *        - Note: Offsets are used to derive pointers.
 *
 *    - Some structs have pointers defined for all of their fields in this file.
 *      Lines which are commented out are fields that are not used in the
 *      codebase but have been left in for readability.
 */
uint256 constant AlmostOneWord = 0x1f;
uint256 constant OneWord = 0x20;
uint256 constant TwoWords = 0x40;
uint256 constant ThreeWords = 0x60;
uint256 constant FreeMemoryPointerSlot = 0x40;
uint256 constant ZeroSlot = 0x60;
uint256 constant DefaultFreeMemoryPointer = 0x80;
uint256 constant Slot0x80 = 0x80;
uint256 constant Slot0xA0 = 0xa0;
uint256 constant Slot0xC0 = 0xc0;
// abi.encodeWithSignature("transferFrom(address,address,uint256)")
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_signature = (
    0x23b872dd00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_from_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_to_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_amount_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_length = 0x64; // 4 + 32 * 3 == 100
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "safeTransferFrom(address,address,uint256,uint256,bytes)"
// )
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_signature = (
    0xf242432a00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_from_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_to_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_id_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_amount_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_offset_ptr = 0x84;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_ptr = 0xa4;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_length = 0xc4; // 4 + 32 * 6 == 196
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_offset = 0xa0;
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "safeBatchTransferFrom(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)"
// )
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_signature = (
    0x2eb2c2d600000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
bytes4 constant ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_selector = bytes4(
    bytes32(ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_signature)
);
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_signature = ERC20_transferFrom_signature;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_from_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_to_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_id_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_length = 0x64; // 4 + 32 * 3 == 100
// abi.encodeWithSignature("NoContract(address)")
uint256 constant NoContract_error_signature = (
    0x5f15d67200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant NoContract_error_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant NoContract_error_token_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant NoContract_error_length = 0x24; // 4 + 32 == 36
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "TokenTransferGenericFailure(address,address,address,uint256,uint256)"
// )
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature = (
    0xf486bc8700000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr = 0x84;
// 4 + 32 * 5 == 164
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length = 0xa4;
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer(address,address,address,uint256)"
// )
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_signature = (
    0x9889192300000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_token_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_from_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_to_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_amount_ptr = 0x64;
// 4 + 32 * 4 == 132
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_length = 0x84;
uint256 constant ExtraGasBuffer = 0x20;
uint256 constant CostPerWord = 3;
uint256 constant MemoryExpansionCoefficient = 0x200;
// Values are offset by 32 bytes in order to write the token to the beginning
// in the event of a revert
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_head_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_head_ptr = 0x84;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_data_head_ptr = 0xa4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_data_length_basePtr = 0xc4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_calldata_baseSize = 0xc4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_ptr = 0xc4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_offset = 0xa0;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_length_baseOffset = 0xc0;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_data_length_baseOffset = 0xe0;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_usable_head_size = 0x80;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_head_offset = 0x60;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_amounts_head_offset = 0x80;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset = 0xa0;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_amounts_length_baseOffset = 0xc0;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_calldata_baseSize = 0xc0;
// Note: abbreviated version of above constant to adhere to line length limit.
uint256 constant ConduitBatchTransfer_amounts_head_offset = 0x80;
uint256 constant Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_ptr = 0x00;
uint256 constant Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_length = 0x04;
uint256 constant Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_selector = (
    0xeba2084c00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_error_signature = (
    0xafc445e200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_token_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_ids_offset = 0xc0;
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title TokenTransferrerErrors
 */
interface TokenTransferrerErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an ERC721 transfer with amount other than
     *      one is attempted.
     */
    error InvalidERC721TransferAmount();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fulfill an order where an
     *      item has an amount of zero.
     */
    error MissingItemAmount();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fulfill an order where an
     *      item has unused parameters. This includes both the token and the
     *      identifier parameters for native transfers as well as the identifier
     *      parameter for ERC20 transfers. Note that the conduit does not
     *      perform this check, leaving it up to the calling channel to enforce
     *      when desired.
     */
    error UnusedItemParameters();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an ERC20, ERC721, or ERC1155 token
     *      transfer reverts.
     *
     * @param token      The token for which the transfer was attempted.
     * @param from       The source of the attempted transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the attempted transfer.
     * @param identifier The identifier for the attempted transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount for the attempted transfer.
     */
    error TokenTransferGenericFailure(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a batch ERC1155 token transfer reverts.
     *
     * @param token       The token for which the transfer was attempted.
     * @param from        The source of the attempted transfer.
     * @param to          The recipient of the attempted transfer.
     * @param identifiers The identifiers for the attempted transfer.
     * @param amounts     The amounts for the attempted transfer.
     */
    error ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] identifiers,
        uint256[] amounts
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an ERC20 token transfer returns a falsey
     *      value.
     *
     * @param token      The token for which the ERC20 transfer was attempted.
     * @param from       The source of the attempted ERC20 transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the attempted ERC20 transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount for the attempted ERC20 transfer.
     */
    error BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an account being called as an assumed
     *      contract does not have code and returns no data.
     *
     * @param account The account that should contain code.
     */
    error NoContract(address account);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to execute an 1155 batch
     *      transfer using calldata not produced by default ABI encoding or with
     *      different lengths for ids and amounts arrays.
     */
    error Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding();
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// error ChannelClosed(address channel)
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_error_signature = (
    0x93daadf200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_error_ptr = 0x00;
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_channel_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_error_length = 0x24;
// For the mapping:
// mapping(address => bool) channels
// The position in storage for a particular account is:
// keccak256(abi.encode(account, channels.slot))
uint256 constant ChannelKey_channel_ptr = 0x00;
uint256 constant ChannelKey_slot_ptr = 0x20;
uint256 constant ChannelKey_length = 0x40;
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { ConduitInterface } from "../interfaces/ConduitInterface.sol";
import { ConduitItemType } from "../conduit/lib/ConduitEnums.sol";
import { ItemType } from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
import { ReceivedItem } from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { Verifiers } from "./Verifiers.sol";
import { TokenTransferrer } from "./TokenTransferrer.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title Executor
 * @author 0age
 * @notice Executor contains functions related to processing executions (i.e.
 *         transferring items, either directly or via conduits).
 */
contract Executor is Verifiers, TokenTransferrer {
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) Verifiers(conduitController) {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer a given item, either directly or via
     *      a corresponding conduit.
     *
     * @param item        The item to transfer, including an amount and a
     *                    recipient.
     * @param from        The account supplying the item.
     * @param conduitKey  A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                    if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                    signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                    approvals set on this contract.
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     */
    function _transfer(
        ReceivedItem memory item,
        address from,
        bytes32 conduitKey,
        bytes memory accumulator
    ) internal {
        // If the item type indicates Ether or a native token...
        if (item.itemType == ItemType.NATIVE) {
            // Ensure neither the token nor the identifier parameters are set.
            if ((uint160(item.token) | item.identifier) != 0) {
                revert UnusedItemParameters();
            }
            // transfer the native tokens to the recipient.
            _transferEth(item.recipient, item.amount);
        } else if (item.itemType == ItemType.ERC20) {
            // Ensure that no identifier is supplied.
            if (item.identifier != 0) {
                revert UnusedItemParameters();
            }
            // Transfer ERC20 tokens from the source to the recipient.
            _transferERC20(
                item.token,
                from,
                item.recipient,
                item.amount,
                conduitKey,
                accumulator
            );
        } else if (item.itemType == ItemType.ERC721) {
            // Transfer ERC721 token from the source to the recipient.
            _transferERC721(
                item.token,
                from,
                item.recipient,
                item.identifier,
                item.amount,
                conduitKey,
                accumulator
            );
        } else {
            // Transfer ERC1155 token from the source to the recipient.
            _transferERC1155(
                item.token,
                from,
                item.recipient,
                item.identifier,
                item.amount,
                conduitKey,
                accumulator
            );
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer an individual ERC721 or ERC1155 item
     *      from a given originator to a given recipient. The accumulator will
     *      be bypassed, meaning that this function should be utilized in cases
     *      where multiple item transfers can be accumulated into a single
     *      conduit call. Sufficient approvals must be set, either on the
     *      respective conduit or on this contract itself.
     *
     * @param itemType   The type of item to transfer, either ERC721 or ERC1155.
     * @param token      The token to transfer.
     * @param from       The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier The tokenId to transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount to transfer.
     * @param conduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                   if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                   signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                   approvals set on this contract.
     */
    function _transferIndividual721Or1155Item(
        ItemType itemType,
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes32 conduitKey
    ) internal {
        // Determine if the transfer is to be performed via a conduit.
        if (conduitKey != bytes32(0)) {
            // Use free memory pointer as calldata offset for the conduit call.
            uint256 callDataOffset;
            // Utilize assembly to place each argument in free memory.
            assembly {
                // Retrieve the free memory pointer and use it as the offset.
                callDataOffset := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
                // Write ConduitInterface.execute.selector to memory.
                mstore(callDataOffset, Conduit_execute_signature)
                // Write the offset to the ConduitTransfer array in memory.
                mstore(
                    add(
                        callDataOffset,
                        Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_offset_ptr
                    ),
                    Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_ptr
                )
                // Write the length of the ConduitTransfer array to memory.
                mstore(
                    add(
                        callDataOffset,
                        Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_length_ptr
                    ),
                    Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_length
                )
                // Write the item type to memory.
                mstore(
                    add(callDataOffset, Conduit_execute_transferItemType_ptr),
                    itemType
                )
                // Write the token to memory.
                mstore(
                    add(callDataOffset, Conduit_execute_transferToken_ptr),
                    token
                )
                // Write the transfer source to memory.
                mstore(
                    add(callDataOffset, Conduit_execute_transferFrom_ptr),
                    from
                )
                // Write the transfer recipient to memory.
                mstore(add(callDataOffset, Conduit_execute_transferTo_ptr), to)
                // Write the token identifier to memory.
                mstore(
                    add(callDataOffset, Conduit_execute_transferIdentifier_ptr),
                    identifier
                )
                // Write the transfer amount to memory.
                mstore(
                    add(callDataOffset, Conduit_execute_transferAmount_ptr),
                    amount
                )
            }
            // Perform the call to the conduit.
            _callConduitUsingOffsets(
                conduitKey,
                callDataOffset,
                OneConduitExecute_size
            );
        } else {
            // Otherwise, determine whether it is an ERC721 or ERC1155 item.
            if (itemType == ItemType.ERC721) {
                // Ensure that exactly one 721 item is being transferred.
                if (amount != 1) {
                    revert InvalidERC721TransferAmount();
                }
                // Perform transfer via the token contract directly.
                _performERC721Transfer(token, from, to, identifier);
            } else {
                // Perform transfer via the token contract directly.
                _performERC1155Transfer(token, from, to, identifier, amount);
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer Ether or other native tokens to a
     *      given recipient.
     *
     * @param to     The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param amount The amount to transfer.
     */
    function _transferEth(address payable to, uint256 amount) internal {
        // Ensure that the supplied amount is non-zero.
        _assertNonZeroAmount(amount);
        // Declare a variable indicating whether the call was successful or not.
        bool success;
        assembly {
            // Transfer the ETH and store if it succeeded or not.
            success := call(gas(), to, amount, 0, 0, 0, 0)
        }
        // If the call fails...
        if (!success) {
            // Revert and pass the revert reason along if one was returned.
            _revertWithReasonIfOneIsReturned();
            // Otherwise, revert with a generic error message.
            revert EtherTransferGenericFailure(to, amount);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC20 tokens from a given originator
     *      to a given recipient using a given conduit if applicable. Sufficient
     *      approvals must be set on this contract or on a respective conduit.
     *
     * @param token       The ERC20 token to transfer.
     * @param from        The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to          The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param amount      The amount to transfer.
     * @param conduitKey  A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                    if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                    signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                    approvals set on this contract.
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     */
    function _transferERC20(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes32 conduitKey,
        bytes memory accumulator
    ) internal {
        // Ensure that the supplied amount is non-zero.
        _assertNonZeroAmount(amount);
        // Trigger accumulated transfers if the conduits differ.
        _triggerIfArmedAndNotAccumulatable(accumulator, conduitKey);
        // If no conduit has been specified...
        if (conduitKey == bytes32(0)) {
            // Perform the token transfer directly.
            _performERC20Transfer(token, from, to, amount);
        } else {
            // Insert the call to the conduit into the accumulator.
            _insert(
                conduitKey,
                accumulator,
                ConduitItemType.ERC20,
                token,
                from,
                to,
                uint256(0),
                amount
            );
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer a single ERC721 token from a given
     *      originator to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set,
     *      either on the respective conduit or on this contract itself.
     *
     * @param token       The ERC721 token to transfer.
     * @param from        The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to          The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier  The tokenId to transfer (must be 1 for ERC721).
     * @param amount      The amount to transfer.
     * @param conduitKey  A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                    if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                    signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                    approvals set on this contract.
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     */
    function _transferERC721(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes32 conduitKey,
        bytes memory accumulator
    ) internal {
        // Trigger accumulated transfers if the conduits differ.
        _triggerIfArmedAndNotAccumulatable(accumulator, conduitKey);
        // If no conduit has been specified...
        if (conduitKey == bytes32(0)) {
            // Ensure that exactly one 721 item is being transferred.
            if (amount != 1) {
                revert InvalidERC721TransferAmount();
            }
            // Perform transfer via the token contract directly.
            _performERC721Transfer(token, from, to, identifier);
        } else {
            // Insert the call to the conduit into the accumulator.
            _insert(
                conduitKey,
                accumulator,
                ConduitItemType.ERC721,
                token,
                from,
                to,
                identifier,
                amount
            );
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC1155 tokens from a given originator
     *      to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set, either on
     *      the respective conduit or on this contract itself.
     *
     * @param token       The ERC1155 token to transfer.
     * @param from        The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to          The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier  The id to transfer.
     * @param amount      The amount to transfer.
     * @param conduitKey  A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                    if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                    signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                    approvals set on this contract.
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     */
    function _transferERC1155(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes32 conduitKey,
        bytes memory accumulator
    ) internal {
        // Ensure that the supplied amount is non-zero.
        _assertNonZeroAmount(amount);
        // Trigger accumulated transfers if the conduits differ.
        _triggerIfArmedAndNotAccumulatable(accumulator, conduitKey);
        // If no conduit has been specified...
        if (conduitKey == bytes32(0)) {
            // Perform transfer via the token contract directly.
            _performERC1155Transfer(token, from, to, identifier, amount);
        } else {
            // Insert the call to the conduit into the accumulator.
            _insert(
                conduitKey,
                accumulator,
                ConduitItemType.ERC1155,
                token,
                from,
                to,
                identifier,
                amount
            );
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to trigger a call to the conduit currently held by
     *      the accumulator if the accumulator contains item transfers (i.e. it
     *      is "armed") and the supplied conduit key does not match the key held
     *      by the accumulator.
     *
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     * @param conduitKey  A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                    if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                    signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                    approvals set on this contract.
     */
    function _triggerIfArmedAndNotAccumulatable(
        bytes memory accumulator,
        bytes32 conduitKey
    ) internal {
        // Retrieve the current conduit key from the accumulator.
        bytes32 accumulatorConduitKey = _getAccumulatorConduitKey(accumulator);
        // Perform conduit call if the set key does not match the supplied key.
        if (accumulatorConduitKey != conduitKey) {
            _triggerIfArmed(accumulator);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to trigger a call to the conduit currently held by
     *      the accumulator if the accumulator contains item transfers (i.e. it
     *      is "armed").
     *
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     */
    function _triggerIfArmed(bytes memory accumulator) internal {
        // Exit if the accumulator is not "armed".
        if (accumulator.length != AccumulatorArmed) {
            return;
        }
        // Retrieve the current conduit key from the accumulator.
        bytes32 accumulatorConduitKey = _getAccumulatorConduitKey(accumulator);
        // Perform conduit call.
        _trigger(accumulatorConduitKey, accumulator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to trigger a call to the conduit corresponding to
     *      a given conduit key, supplying all accumulated item transfers. The
     *      accumulator will be "disarmed" and reset in the process.
     *
     * @param conduitKey  A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                    if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                    signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                    approvals set on this contract.
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     */
    function _trigger(bytes32 conduitKey, bytes memory accumulator) internal {
        // Declare variables for offset in memory & size of calldata to conduit.
        uint256 callDataOffset;
        uint256 callDataSize;
        // Call the conduit with all the accumulated transfers.
        assembly {
            // Call begins at third word; the first is length or "armed" status,
            // and the second is the current conduit key.
            callDataOffset := add(accumulator, TwoWords)
            // 68 + items * 192
            callDataSize := add(
                Accumulator_array_offset_ptr,
                mul(
                    mload(add(accumulator, Accumulator_array_length_ptr)),
                    Conduit_transferItem_size
                )
            )
        }
        // Call conduit derived from conduit key & supply accumulated transfers.
        _callConduitUsingOffsets(conduitKey, callDataOffset, callDataSize);
        // Reset accumulator length to signal that it is now "disarmed".
        assembly {
            mstore(accumulator, AccumulatorDisarmed)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to perform a call to the conduit corresponding to
     *      a given conduit key based on the offset and size of the calldata in
     *      question in memory.
     *
     * @param conduitKey     A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding
     *                       conduit, if any, to source token approvals from.
     *                       The zero hash signifies that no conduit should be
     *                       used, with direct approvals set on this contract.
     * @param callDataOffset The memory pointer where calldata is contained.
     * @param callDataSize   The size of calldata in memory.
     */
    function _callConduitUsingOffsets(
        bytes32 conduitKey,
        uint256 callDataOffset,
        uint256 callDataSize
    ) internal {
        // Derive the address of the conduit using the conduit key.
        address conduit = _deriveConduit(conduitKey);
        bool success;
        bytes4 result;
        // call the conduit.
        assembly {
            // Ensure first word of scratch space is empty.
            mstore(0, 0)
            // Perform call, placing first word of return data in scratch space.
            success := call(
                gas(),
                conduit,
                0,
                callDataOffset,
                callDataSize,
                0,
                OneWord
            )
            // Take value from scratch space and place it on the stack.
            result := mload(0)
        }
        // If the call failed...
        if (!success) {
            // Pass along whatever revert reason was given by the conduit.
            _revertWithReasonIfOneIsReturned();
            // Otherwise, revert with a generic error.
            revert InvalidCallToConduit(conduit);
        }
        // Ensure result was extracted and matches EIP-1271 magic value.
        if (result != ConduitInterface.execute.selector) {
            revert InvalidConduit(conduitKey, conduit);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to retrieve the current conduit key set for
     *      the accumulator.
     *
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     *
     * @return accumulatorConduitKey The conduit key currently set for the
     *                               accumulator.
     */
    function _getAccumulatorConduitKey(bytes memory accumulator)
        internal
        pure
        returns (bytes32 accumulatorConduitKey)
    {
        // Retrieve the current conduit key from the accumulator.
        assembly {
            accumulatorConduitKey := mload(
                add(accumulator, Accumulator_conduitKey_ptr)
            )
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to place an item transfer into an accumulator
     *      that collects a series of transfers to execute against a given
     *      conduit in a single call.
     *
     * @param conduitKey  A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                    if any, to source token approvals from. The zero hash
     *                    signifies that no conduit should be used, with direct
     *                    approvals set on this contract.
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     * @param itemType    The type of the item to transfer.
     * @param token       The token to transfer.
     * @param from        The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to          The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier  The tokenId to transfer.
     * @param amount      The amount to transfer.
     */
    function _insert(
        bytes32 conduitKey,
        bytes memory accumulator,
        ConduitItemType itemType,
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal pure {
        uint256 elements;
        // "Arm" and prime accumulator if it's not already armed. The sentinel
        // value is held in the length of the accumulator array.
        if (accumulator.length == AccumulatorDisarmed) {
            elements = 1;
            bytes4 selector = ConduitInterface.execute.selector;
            assembly {
                mstore(accumulator, AccumulatorArmed) // "arm" the accumulator.
                mstore(add(accumulator, Accumulator_conduitKey_ptr), conduitKey)
                mstore(add(accumulator, Accumulator_selector_ptr), selector)
                mstore(
                    add(accumulator, Accumulator_array_offset_ptr),
                    Accumulator_array_offset
                )
                mstore(add(accumulator, Accumulator_array_length_ptr), elements)
            }
        } else {
            // Otherwise, increase the number of elements by one.
            assembly {
                elements := add(
                    mload(add(accumulator, Accumulator_array_length_ptr)),
                    1
                )
                mstore(add(accumulator, Accumulator_array_length_ptr), elements)
            }
        }
        // Insert the item.
        assembly {
            let itemPointer := sub(
                add(accumulator, mul(elements, Conduit_transferItem_size)),
                Accumulator_itemSizeOffsetDifference
            )
            mstore(itemPointer, itemType)
            mstore(add(itemPointer, Conduit_transferItem_token_ptr), token)
            mstore(add(itemPointer, Conduit_transferItem_from_ptr), from)
            mstore(add(itemPointer, Conduit_transferItem_to_ptr), to)
            mstore(
                add(itemPointer, Conduit_transferItem_identifier_ptr),
                identifier
            )
            mstore(add(itemPointer, Conduit_transferItem_amount_ptr), amount)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
enum OrderType {
    // 0: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    FULL_OPEN,
    // 1: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 2: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 3: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    PARTIAL_RESTRICTED
}
// prettier-ignore
enum BasicOrderType {
    // 0: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_FULL_OPEN,
    // 1: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 2: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 3: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 4: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_FULL_OPEN,
    // 5: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 6: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 7: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 8: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_FULL_OPEN,
    // 9: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 10: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 11: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 12: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_FULL_OPEN,
    // 13: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 14: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 15: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 16: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_FULL_OPEN,
    // 17: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 18: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 19: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 20: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_FULL_OPEN,
    // 21: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 22: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 23: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED
}
// prettier-ignore
enum BasicOrderRouteType {
    // 0: provide Ether (or other native token) to receive offered ERC721 item.
    ETH_TO_ERC721,
    // 1: provide Ether (or other native token) to receive offered ERC1155 item.
    ETH_TO_ERC1155,
    // 2: provide ERC20 item to receive offered ERC721 item.
    ERC20_TO_ERC721,
    // 3: provide ERC20 item to receive offered ERC1155 item.
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155,
    // 4: provide ERC721 item to receive offered ERC20 item.
    ERC721_TO_ERC20,
    // 5: provide ERC1155 item to receive offered ERC20 item.
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20
}
// prettier-ignore
enum ItemType {
    // 0: ETH on mainnet, MATIC on polygon, etc.
    NATIVE,
    // 1: ERC20 items (ERC777 and ERC20 analogues could also technically work)
    ERC20,
    // 2: ERC721 items
    ERC721,
    // 3: ERC1155 items
    ERC1155,
    // 4: ERC721 items where a number of tokenIds are supported
    ERC721_WITH_CRITERIA,
    // 5: ERC1155 items where a number of ids are supported
    ERC1155_WITH_CRITERIA
}
// prettier-ignore
enum Side {
    // 0: Items that can be spent
    OFFER,
    // 1: Items that must be received
    CONSIDERATION
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OrderType,
    BasicOrderType,
    ItemType,
    Side
} from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
/**
 * @dev An order contains eleven components: an offerer, a zone (or account that
 *      can cancel the order or restrict who can fulfill the order depending on
 *      the type), the order type (specifying partial fill support as well as
 *      restricted order status), the start and end time, a hash that will be
 *      provided to the zone when validating restricted orders, a salt, a key
 *      corresponding to a given conduit, a counter, and an arbitrary number of
 *      offer items that can be spent along with consideration items that must
 *      be received by their respective recipient.
 */
struct OrderComponents {
    address offerer;
    address zone;
    OfferItem[] offer;
    ConsiderationItem[] consideration;
    OrderType orderType;
    uint256 startTime;
    uint256 endTime;
    bytes32 zoneHash;
    uint256 salt;
    bytes32 conduitKey;
    uint256 counter;
}
/**
 * @dev An offer item has five components: an item type (ETH or other native
 *      tokens, ERC20, ERC721, and ERC1155, as well as criteria-based ERC721 and
 *      ERC1155), a token address, a dual-purpose "identifierOrCriteria"
 *      component that will either represent a tokenId or a merkle root
 *      depending on the item type, and a start and end amount that support
 *      increasing or decreasing amounts over the duration of the respective
 *      order.
 */
struct OfferItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifierOrCriteria;
    uint256 startAmount;
    uint256 endAmount;
}
/**
 * @dev A consideration item has the same five components as an offer item and
 *      an additional sixth component designating the required recipient of the
 *      item.
 */
struct ConsiderationItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifierOrCriteria;
    uint256 startAmount;
    uint256 endAmount;
    address payable recipient;
}
/**
 * @dev A spent item is translated from a utilized offer item and has four
 *      components: an item type (ETH or other native tokens, ERC20, ERC721, and
 *      ERC1155), a token address, a tokenId, and an amount.
 */
struct SpentItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifier;
    uint256 amount;
}
/**
 * @dev A received item is translated from a utilized consideration item and has
 *      the same four components as a spent item, as well as an additional fifth
 *      component designating the required recipient of the item.
 */
struct ReceivedItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifier;
    uint256 amount;
    address payable recipient;
}
/**
 * @dev For basic orders involving ETH / native / ERC20 <=> ERC721 / ERC1155
 *      matching, a group of six functions may be called that only requires a
 *      subset of the usual order arguments. Note the use of a "basicOrderType"
 *      enum; this represents both the usual order type as well as the "route"
 *      of the basic order (a simple derivation function for the basic order
 *      type is `basicOrderType = orderType + (4 * basicOrderRoute)`.)
 */
struct BasicOrderParameters {
    // calldata offset
    address considerationToken; // 0x24
    uint256 considerationIdentifier; // 0x44
    uint256 considerationAmount; // 0x64
    address payable offerer; // 0x84
    address zone; // 0xa4
    address offerToken; // 0xc4
    uint256 offerIdentifier; // 0xe4
    uint256 offerAmount; // 0x104
    BasicOrderType basicOrderType; // 0x124
    uint256 startTime; // 0x144
    uint256 endTime; // 0x164
    bytes32 zoneHash; // 0x184
    uint256 salt; // 0x1a4
    bytes32 offererConduitKey; // 0x1c4
    bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey; // 0x1e4
    uint256 totalOriginalAdditionalRecipients; // 0x204
    AdditionalRecipient[] additionalRecipients; // 0x224
    bytes signature; // 0x244
    // Total length, excluding dynamic array data: 0x264 (580)
}
/**
 * @dev Basic orders can supply any number of additional recipients, with the
 *      implied assumption that they are supplied from the offered ETH (or other
 *      native token) or ERC20 token for the order.
 */
struct AdditionalRecipient {
    uint256 amount;
    address payable recipient;
}
/**
 * @dev The full set of order components, with the exception of the counter,
 *      must be supplied when fulfilling more sophisticated orders or groups of
 *      orders. The total number of original consideration items must also be
 *      supplied, as the caller may specify additional consideration items.
 */
struct OrderParameters {
    address offerer; // 0x00
    address zone; // 0x20
    OfferItem[] offer; // 0x40
    ConsiderationItem[] consideration; // 0x60
    OrderType orderType; // 0x80
    uint256 startTime; // 0xa0
    uint256 endTime; // 0xc0
    bytes32 zoneHash; // 0xe0
    uint256 salt; // 0x100
    bytes32 conduitKey; // 0x120
    uint256 totalOriginalConsiderationItems; // 0x140
    // offer.length                          // 0x160
}
/**
 * @dev Orders require a signature in addition to the other order parameters.
 */
struct Order {
    OrderParameters parameters;
    bytes signature;
}
/**
 * @dev Advanced orders include a numerator (i.e. a fraction to attempt to fill)
 *      and a denominator (the total size of the order) in addition to the
 *      signature and other order parameters. It also supports an optional field
 *      for supplying extra data; this data will be included in a staticcall to
 *      `isValidOrderIncludingExtraData` on the zone for the order if the order
 *      type is restricted and the offerer or zone are not the caller.
 */
struct AdvancedOrder {
    OrderParameters parameters;
    uint120 numerator;
    uint120 denominator;
    bytes signature;
    bytes extraData;
}
/**
 * @dev Orders can be validated (either explicitly via `validate`, or as a
 *      consequence of a full or partial fill), specifically cancelled (they can
 *      also be cancelled in bulk via incrementing a per-zone counter), and
 *      partially or fully filled (with the fraction filled represented by a
 *      numerator and denominator).
 */
struct OrderStatus {
    bool isValidated;
    bool isCancelled;
    uint120 numerator;
    uint120 denominator;
}
/**
 * @dev A criteria resolver specifies an order, side (offer vs. consideration),
 *      and item index. It then provides a chosen identifier (i.e. tokenId)
 *      alongside a merkle proof demonstrating the identifier meets the required
 *      criteria.
 */
struct CriteriaResolver {
    uint256 orderIndex;
    Side side;
    uint256 index;
    uint256 identifier;
    bytes32[] criteriaProof;
}
/**
 * @dev A fulfillment is applied to a group of orders. It decrements a series of
 *      offer and consideration items, then generates a single execution
 *      element. A given fulfillment can be applied to as many offer and
 *      consideration items as desired, but must contain at least one offer and
 *      at least one consideration that match. The fulfillment must also remain
 *      consistent on all key parameters across all offer items (same offerer,
 *      token, type, tokenId, and conduit preference) as well as across all
 *      consideration items (token, type, tokenId, and recipient).
 */
struct Fulfillment {
    FulfillmentComponent[] offerComponents;
    FulfillmentComponent[] considerationComponents;
}
/**
 * @dev Each fulfillment component contains one index referencing a specific
 *      order and another referencing a specific offer or consideration item.
 */
struct FulfillmentComponent {
    uint256 orderIndex;
    uint256 itemIndex;
}
/**
 * @dev An execution is triggered once all consideration items have been zeroed
 *      out. It sends the item in question from the offerer to the item's
 *      recipient, optionally sourcing approvals from either this contract
 *      directly or from the offerer's chosen conduit if one is specified. An
 *      execution is not provided as an argument, but rather is derived via
 *      orders, criteria resolvers, and fulfillments (where the total number of
 *      executions will be less than or equal to the total number of indicated
 *      fulfillments) and returned as part of `matchOrders`.
 */
struct Execution {
    ReceivedItem item;
    address offerer;
    bytes32 conduitKey;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { OrderStatus } from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { Assertions } from "./Assertions.sol";
import { SignatureVerification } from "./SignatureVerification.sol";
/**
 * @title Verifiers
 * @author 0age
 * @notice Verifiers contains functions for performing verifications.
 */
contract Verifiers is Assertions, SignatureVerification {
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) Assertions(conduitController) {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to ensure that the current time falls within
     *      an order's valid timespan.
     *
     * @param startTime       The time at which the order becomes active.
     * @param endTime         The time at which the order becomes inactive.
     * @param revertOnInvalid A boolean indicating whether to revert if the
     *                        order is not active.
     *
     * @return valid A boolean indicating whether the order is active.
     */
    function _verifyTime(
        uint256 startTime,
        uint256 endTime,
        bool revertOnInvalid
    ) internal view returns (bool valid) {
        // Revert if order's timespan hasn't started yet or has already ended.
        if (startTime > block.timestamp || endTime <= block.timestamp) {
            // Only revert if revertOnInvalid has been supplied as true.
            if (revertOnInvalid) {
                revert InvalidTime();
            }
            // Return false as the order is invalid.
            return false;
        }
        // Return true as the order time is valid.
        valid = true;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to verify the signature of an order. An
     *      ERC-1271 fallback will be attempted if either the signature length
     *      is not 32 or 33 bytes or if the recovered signer does not match the
     *      supplied offerer. Note that in cases where a 32 or 33 byte signature
     *      is supplied, only standard ECDSA signatures that recover to a
     *      non-zero address are supported.
     *
     * @param offerer   The offerer for the order.
     * @param orderHash The order hash.
     * @param signature A signature from the offerer indicating that the order
     *                  has been approved.
     */
    function _verifySignature(
        address offerer,
        bytes32 orderHash,
        bytes memory signature
    ) internal view {
        // Skip signature verification if the offerer is the caller.
        if (offerer == msg.sender) {
            return;
        }
        // Derive EIP-712 digest using the domain separator and the order hash.
        bytes32 digest = _deriveEIP712Digest(_domainSeparator(), orderHash);
        // Ensure that the signature for the digest is valid for the offerer.
        _assertValidSignature(offerer, digest, signature);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to validate that a given order is fillable
     *      and not cancelled based on the order status.
     *
     * @param orderHash       The order hash.
     * @param orderStatus     The status of the order, including whether it has
     *                        been cancelled and the fraction filled.
     * @param onlyAllowUnused A boolean flag indicating whether partial fills
     *                        are supported by the calling function.
     * @param revertOnInvalid A boolean indicating whether to revert if the
     *                        order has been cancelled or filled beyond the
     *                        allowable amount.
     *
     * @return valid A boolean indicating whether the order is valid.
     */
    function _verifyOrderStatus(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        OrderStatus storage orderStatus,
        bool onlyAllowUnused,
        bool revertOnInvalid
    ) internal view returns (bool valid) {
        // Ensure that the order has not been cancelled.
        if (orderStatus.isCancelled) {
            // Only revert if revertOnInvalid has been supplied as true.
            if (revertOnInvalid) {
                revert OrderIsCancelled(orderHash);
            }
            // Return false as the order status is invalid.
            return false;
        }
        // Read order status numerator from storage and place on stack.
        uint256 orderStatusNumerator = orderStatus.numerator;
        // If the order is not entirely unused...
        if (orderStatusNumerator != 0) {
            // ensure the order has not been partially filled when not allowed.
            if (onlyAllowUnused) {
                // Always revert on partial fills when onlyAllowUnused is true.
                revert OrderPartiallyFilled(orderHash);
            }
            // Otherwise, ensure that order has not been entirely filled.
            else if (orderStatusNumerator >= orderStatus.denominator) {
                // Only revert if revertOnInvalid has been supplied as true.
                if (revertOnInvalid) {
                    revert OrderAlreadyFilled(orderHash);
                }
                // Return false as the order status is invalid.
                return false;
            }
        }
        // Return true as the order status is valid.
        valid = true;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/*
 * -------------------------- Disambiguation & Other Notes ---------------------
 *    - The term "head" is used as it is in the documentation for ABI encoding,
 *      but only in reference to dynamic types, i.e. it always refers to the
 *      offset or pointer to the body of a dynamic type. In calldata, the head
 *      is always an offset (relative to the parent object), while in memory,
 *      the head is always the pointer to the body. More information found here:
 *      https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/v0.8.14/abi-spec.html#argument-encoding
 *        - Note that the length of an array is separate from and precedes the
 *          head of the array.
 *
 *    - The term "body" is used in place of the term "head" used in the ABI
 *      documentation. It refers to the start of the data for a dynamic type,
 *      e.g. the first word of a struct or the first word of the first element
 *      in an array.
 *
 *    - The term "pointer" is used to describe the absolute position of a value
 *      and never an offset relative to another value.
 *        - The suffix "_ptr" refers to a memory pointer.
 *        - The suffix "_cdPtr" refers to a calldata pointer.
 *
 *    - The term "offset" is used to describe the position of a value relative
 *      to some parent value. For example, OrderParameters_conduit_offset is the
 *      offset to the "conduit" value in the OrderParameters struct relative to
 *      the start of the body.
 *        - Note: Offsets are used to derive pointers.
 *
 *    - Some structs have pointers defined for all of their fields in this file.
 *      Lines which are commented out are fields that are not used in the
 *      codebase but have been left in for readability.
 */
// Declare constants for name, version, and reentrancy sentinel values.
// Name is right padded, so it touches the length which is left padded. This
// enables writing both values at once. Length goes at byte 95 in memory, and
// name fills bytes 96-109, so both values can be written left-padded to 77.
uint256 constant NameLengthPtr = 77;
uint256 constant NameWithLength = 0x0d436F6E73696465726174696F6E;
uint256 constant Version = 0x312e31;
uint256 constant Version_length = 3;
uint256 constant Version_shift = 0xe8;
uint256 constant _NOT_ENTERED = 1;
uint256 constant _ENTERED = 2;
// Common Offsets
// Offsets for identically positioned fields shared by:
// OfferItem, ConsiderationItem, SpentItem, ReceivedItem
uint256 constant Common_token_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant Common_identifier_offset = 0x40;
uint256 constant Common_amount_offset = 0x60;
uint256 constant ReceivedItem_size = 0xa0;
uint256 constant ReceivedItem_amount_offset = 0x60;
uint256 constant ReceivedItem_recipient_offset = 0x80;
uint256 constant ReceivedItem_CommonParams_size = 0x60;
uint256 constant ConsiderationItem_recipient_offset = 0xa0;
// Store the same constant in an abbreviated format for a line length fix.
uint256 constant ConsiderItem_recipient_offset = 0xa0;
uint256 constant Execution_offerer_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant Execution_conduit_offset = 0x40;
uint256 constant InvalidFulfillmentComponentData_error_signature = (
    0x7fda727900000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant InvalidFulfillmentComponentData_error_len = 0x04;
uint256 constant Panic_error_signature = (
    0x4e487b7100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant Panic_error_offset = 0x04;
uint256 constant Panic_error_length = 0x24;
uint256 constant Panic_arithmetic = 0x11;
uint256 constant MissingItemAmount_error_signature = (
    0x91b3e51400000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant MissingItemAmount_error_len = 0x04;
uint256 constant OrderParameters_offer_head_offset = 0x40;
uint256 constant OrderParameters_consideration_head_offset = 0x60;
uint256 constant OrderParameters_conduit_offset = 0x120;
uint256 constant OrderParameters_counter_offset = 0x140;
uint256 constant Fulfillment_itemIndex_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant AdvancedOrder_numerator_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant AlmostOneWord = 0x1f;
uint256 constant OneWord = 0x20;
uint256 constant TwoWords = 0x40;
uint256 constant ThreeWords = 0x60;
uint256 constant FourWords = 0x80;
uint256 constant FiveWords = 0xa0;
uint256 constant FreeMemoryPointerSlot = 0x40;
uint256 constant ZeroSlot = 0x60;
uint256 constant DefaultFreeMemoryPointer = 0x80;
uint256 constant Slot0x80 = 0x80;
uint256 constant Slot0xA0 = 0xa0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_endAmount_cdPtr = 0x104;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_common_params_size = 0xa0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationHashesArray_ptr = 0x160;
uint256 constant EIP712_Order_size = 0x180;
uint256 constant EIP712_OfferItem_size = 0xc0;
uint256 constant EIP712_ConsiderationItem_size = 0xe0;
uint256 constant AdditionalRecipients_size = 0x40;
uint256 constant EIP712_DomainSeparator_offset = 0x02;
uint256 constant EIP712_OrderHash_offset = 0x22;
uint256 constant EIP712_DigestPayload_size = 0x42;
uint256 constant receivedItemsHash_ptr = 0x60;
/*
 *  Memory layout in _prepareBasicFulfillmentFromCalldata of
 *  data for OrderFulfilled
 *
 *   event OrderFulfilled(
 *     bytes32 orderHash,
 *     address indexed offerer,
 *     address indexed zone,
 *     address fulfiller,
 *     SpentItem[] offer,
 *       > (itemType, token, id, amount)
 *     ReceivedItem[] consideration
 *       > (itemType, token, id, amount, recipient)
 *   )
 *
 *  - 0x00: orderHash
 *  - 0x20: fulfiller
 *  - 0x40: offer offset (0x80)
 *  - 0x60: consideration offset (0x120)
 *  - 0x80: offer.length (1)
 *  - 0xa0: offerItemType
 *  - 0xc0: offerToken
 *  - 0xe0: offerIdentifier
 *  - 0x100: offerAmount
 *  - 0x120: consideration.length (1 + additionalRecipients.length)
 *  - 0x140: considerationItemType
 *  - 0x160: considerationToken
 *  - 0x180: considerationIdentifier
 *  - 0x1a0: considerationAmount
 *  - 0x1c0: considerationRecipient
 *  - ...
 */
// Minimum length of the OrderFulfilled event data.
// Must be added to the size of the ReceivedItem array for additionalRecipients
// (0xa0 * additionalRecipients.length) to calculate full size of the buffer.
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_baseSize = 0x1e0;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_selector = (
    0x9d9af8e38d66c62e2c12f0225249fd9d721c54b83f48d9352c97c6cacdcb6f31
);
// Minimum offset in memory to OrderFulfilled event data.
// Must be added to the size of the EIP712 hash array for additionalRecipients
// (32 * additionalRecipients.length) to calculate the pointer to event data.
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_baseOffset = 0x180;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_consideration_length_baseOffset = 0x2a0;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_offer_length_baseOffset = 0x200;
// uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_orderHash_offset = 0x00;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_fulfiller_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_offer_head_offset = 0x40;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_offer_body_offset = 0x80;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_consideration_head_offset = 0x60;
uint256 constant OrderFulfilled_consideration_body_offset = 0x120;
// BasicOrderParameters
uint256 constant BasicOrder_parameters_cdPtr = 0x04;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationToken_cdPtr = 0x24;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationIdentifier_cdPtr = 0x44;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationAmount_cdPtr = 0x64;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerer_cdPtr = 0x84;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_zone_cdPtr = 0xa4;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerToken_cdPtr = 0xc4;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerIdentifier_cdPtr = 0xe4;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerAmount_cdPtr = 0x104;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_basicOrderType_cdPtr = 0x124;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_startTime_cdPtr = 0x144;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_endTime_cdPtr = 0x164;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_zoneHash_cdPtr = 0x184;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_salt_cdPtr = 0x1a4;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offererConduit_cdPtr = 0x1c4;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_fulfillerConduit_cdPtr = 0x1e4;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_totalOriginalAdditionalRecipients_cdPtr = 0x204;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_head_cdPtr = 0x224;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_signature_cdPtr = 0x244;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr = 0x264;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_data_cdPtr = 0x284;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_parameters_ptr = 0x20;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_basicOrderType_range = 0x18; // 24 values
/*
 *  Memory layout in _prepareBasicFulfillmentFromCalldata of
 *  EIP712 data for ConsiderationItem
 *   - 0x80: ConsiderationItem EIP-712 typehash (constant)
 *   - 0xa0: itemType
 *   - 0xc0: token
 *   - 0xe0: identifier
 *   - 0x100: startAmount
 *   - 0x120: endAmount
 *   - 0x140: recipient
 */
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationItem_typeHash_ptr = 0x80; // memoryPtr
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationItem_itemType_ptr = 0xa0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationItem_token_ptr = 0xc0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationItem_identifier_ptr = 0xe0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationItem_startAmount_ptr = 0x100;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationItem_endAmount_ptr = 0x120;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_considerationItem_recipient_ptr = 0x140;
/*
 *  Memory layout in _prepareBasicFulfillmentFromCalldata of
 *  EIP712 data for OfferItem
 *   - 0x80:  OfferItem EIP-712 typehash (constant)
 *   - 0xa0:  itemType
 *   - 0xc0:  token
 *   - 0xe0:  identifier (reused for offeredItemsHash)
 *   - 0x100: startAmount
 *   - 0x120: endAmount
 */
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerItem_typeHash_ptr = DefaultFreeMemoryPointer;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerItem_itemType_ptr = 0xa0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerItem_token_ptr = 0xc0;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerItem_identifier_ptr = 0xe0;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerItem_startAmount_ptr = 0x100;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_offerItem_endAmount_ptr = 0x120;
/*
 *  Memory layout in _prepareBasicFulfillmentFromCalldata of
 *  EIP712 data for Order
 *   - 0x80:   Order EIP-712 typehash (constant)
 *   - 0xa0:   orderParameters.offerer
 *   - 0xc0:   orderParameters.zone
 *   - 0xe0:   keccak256(abi.encodePacked(offerHashes))
 *   - 0x100:  keccak256(abi.encodePacked(considerationHashes))
 *   - 0x120:  orderType
 *   - 0x140:  startTime
 *   - 0x160:  endTime
 *   - 0x180:  zoneHash
 *   - 0x1a0:  salt
 *   - 0x1c0:  conduit
 *   - 0x1e0:  _counters[orderParameters.offerer] (from storage)
 */
uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_typeHash_ptr = 0x80;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_offerer_ptr = 0xa0;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_zone_ptr = 0xc0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_offerHashes_ptr = 0xe0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_considerationHashes_ptr = 0x100;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_orderType_ptr = 0x120;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_startTime_ptr = 0x140;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_endTime_ptr = 0x160;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_zoneHash_ptr = 0x180;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_salt_ptr = 0x1a0;
// uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_conduitKey_ptr = 0x1c0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_order_counter_ptr = 0x1e0;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_head_ptr = 0x240;
uint256 constant BasicOrder_signature_ptr = 0x260;
// Signature-related
bytes32 constant EIP2098_allButHighestBitMask = (
    0x7fffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
);
bytes32 constant ECDSA_twentySeventhAndTwentyEighthBytesSet = (
    0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000101000000
);
uint256 constant ECDSA_MaxLength = 65;
uint256 constant ECDSA_signature_s_offset = 0x40;
uint256 constant ECDSA_signature_v_offset = 0x60;
bytes32 constant EIP1271_isValidSignature_selector = (
    0x1626ba7e00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant EIP1271_isValidSignature_signatureHead_negativeOffset = 0x20;
uint256 constant EIP1271_isValidSignature_digest_negativeOffset = 0x40;
uint256 constant EIP1271_isValidSignature_selector_negativeOffset = 0x44;
uint256 constant EIP1271_isValidSignature_calldata_baseLength = 0x64;
uint256 constant EIP1271_isValidSignature_signature_head_offset = 0x40;
// abi.encodeWithSignature("NoContract(address)")
uint256 constant NoContract_error_signature = (
    0x5f15d67200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant NoContract_error_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant NoContract_error_token_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant NoContract_error_length = 0x24; // 4 + 32 == 36
uint256 constant EIP_712_PREFIX = (
    0x1901000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ExtraGasBuffer = 0x20;
uint256 constant CostPerWord = 3;
uint256 constant MemoryExpansionCoefficient = 0x200; // 512
uint256 constant Create2AddressDerivation_ptr = 0x0b;
uint256 constant Create2AddressDerivation_length = 0x55;
uint256 constant MaskOverByteTwelve = (
    0x0000000000000000000000ff0000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant MaskOverLastTwentyBytes = (
    0x000000000000000000000000ffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
);
uint256 constant MaskOverFirstFourBytes = (
    0xffffffff00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_signature = (
    0x4ce34aa200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant MaxUint8 = 0xff;
uint256 constant MaxUint120 = 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_ptr = 0x20;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_length = 0x01;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_offset_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_ConduitTransfer_length_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_transferItemType_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_transferToken_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_transferFrom_ptr = 0x84;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_transferTo_ptr = 0xa4;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_transferIdentifier_ptr = 0xc4;
uint256 constant Conduit_execute_transferAmount_ptr = 0xe4;
uint256 constant OneConduitExecute_size = 0x104;
// Sentinel value to indicate that the conduit accumulator is not armed.
uint256 constant AccumulatorDisarmed = 0x20;
uint256 constant AccumulatorArmed = 0x40;
uint256 constant Accumulator_conduitKey_ptr = 0x20;
uint256 constant Accumulator_selector_ptr = 0x40;
uint256 constant Accumulator_array_offset_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant Accumulator_array_length_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant Accumulator_itemSizeOffsetDifference = 0x3c;
uint256 constant Accumulator_array_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant Conduit_transferItem_size = 0xc0;
uint256 constant Conduit_transferItem_token_ptr = 0x20;
uint256 constant Conduit_transferItem_from_ptr = 0x40;
uint256 constant Conduit_transferItem_to_ptr = 0x60;
uint256 constant Conduit_transferItem_identifier_ptr = 0x80;
uint256 constant Conduit_transferItem_amount_ptr = 0xa0;
// Declare constant for errors related to amount derivation.
// error InexactFraction() @ AmountDerivationErrors.sol
uint256 constant InexactFraction_error_signature = (
    0xc63cf08900000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant InexactFraction_error_len = 0x04;
// Declare constant for errors related to signature verification.
uint256 constant Ecrecover_precompile = 1;
uint256 constant Ecrecover_args_size = 0x80;
uint256 constant Signature_lower_v = 27;
// error BadSignatureV(uint8) @ SignatureVerificationErrors.sol
uint256 constant BadSignatureV_error_signature = (
    0x1f003d0a00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant BadSignatureV_error_offset = 0x04;
uint256 constant BadSignatureV_error_length = 0x24;
// error InvalidSigner() @ SignatureVerificationErrors.sol
uint256 constant InvalidSigner_error_signature = (
    0x815e1d6400000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant InvalidSigner_error_length = 0x04;
// error InvalidSignature() @ SignatureVerificationErrors.sol
uint256 constant InvalidSignature_error_signature = (
    0x8baa579f00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant InvalidSignature_error_length = 0x04;
// error BadContractSignature() @ SignatureVerificationErrors.sol
uint256 constant BadContractSignature_error_signature = (
    0x4f7fb80d00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant BadContractSignature_error_length = 0x04;
uint256 constant NumBitsAfterSelector = 0xe0;
// 69 is the lowest modulus for which the remainder
// of every selector other than the two match functions
// is greater than those of the match functions.
uint256 constant NonMatchSelector_MagicModulus = 69;
// Of the two match function selectors, the highest
// remainder modulo 69 is 29.
uint256 constant NonMatchSelector_MagicRemainder = 0x1d;
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { OrderParameters } from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { GettersAndDerivers } from "./GettersAndDerivers.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    TokenTransferrerErrors
} from "../interfaces/TokenTransferrerErrors.sol";
import { CounterManager } from "./CounterManager.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title Assertions
 * @author 0age
 * @notice Assertions contains logic for making various assertions that do not
 *         fit neatly within a dedicated semantic scope.
 */
contract Assertions is
    GettersAndDerivers,
    CounterManager,
    TokenTransferrerErrors
{
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController)
        GettersAndDerivers(conduitController)
    {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to ensure that the supplied consideration
     *      array length on a given set of order parameters is not less than the
     *      original consideration array length for that order and to retrieve
     *      the current counter for a given order's offerer and zone and use it
     *      to derive the order hash.
     *
     * @param orderParameters The parameters of the order to hash.
     *
     * @return The hash.
     */
    function _assertConsiderationLengthAndGetOrderHash(
        OrderParameters memory orderParameters
    ) internal view returns (bytes32) {
        // Ensure supplied consideration array length is not less than original.
        _assertConsiderationLengthIsNotLessThanOriginalConsiderationLength(
            orderParameters.consideration.length,
            orderParameters.totalOriginalConsiderationItems
        );
        // Derive and return order hash using current counter for the offerer.
        return
            _deriveOrderHash(
                orderParameters,
                _getCounter(orderParameters.offerer)
            );
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to ensure that the supplied consideration
     *      array length for an order to be fulfilled is not less than the
     *      original consideration array length for that order.
     *
     * @param suppliedConsiderationItemTotal The number of consideration items
     *                                       supplied when fulfilling the order.
     * @param originalConsiderationItemTotal The number of consideration items
     *                                       supplied on initial order creation.
     */
    function _assertConsiderationLengthIsNotLessThanOriginalConsiderationLength(
        uint256 suppliedConsiderationItemTotal,
        uint256 originalConsiderationItemTotal
    ) internal pure {
        // Ensure supplied consideration array length is not less than original.
        if (suppliedConsiderationItemTotal < originalConsiderationItemTotal) {
            revert MissingOriginalConsiderationItems();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to ensure that a given item amount is not
     *      zero.
     *
     * @param amount The amount to check.
     */
    function _assertNonZeroAmount(uint256 amount) internal pure {
        // Revert if the supplied amount is equal to zero.
        if (amount == 0) {
            revert MissingItemAmount();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to validate calldata offsets for dynamic
     *      types in BasicOrderParameters and other parameters. This ensures
     *      that functions using the calldata object normally will be using the
     *      same data as the assembly functions and that values that are bound
     *      to a given range are within that range. Note that no parameters are
     *      supplied as all basic order functions use the same calldata
     *      encoding.
     */
    function _assertValidBasicOrderParameters() internal pure {
        // Declare a boolean designating basic order parameter offset validity.
        bool validOffsets;
        // Utilize assembly in order to read offset data directly from calldata.
        assembly {
            /*
             * Checks:
             * 1. Order parameters struct offset == 0x20
             * 2. Additional recipients arr offset == 0x240
             * 3. Signature offset == 0x260 + (recipients.length * 0x40)
             * 4. BasicOrderType between 0 and 23 (i.e. < 24)
             */
            validOffsets := and(
                // Order parameters at calldata 0x04 must have offset of 0x20.
                eq(
                    calldataload(BasicOrder_parameters_cdPtr),
                    BasicOrder_parameters_ptr
                ),
                // Additional recipients at cd 0x224 must have offset of 0x240.
                eq(
                    calldataload(BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_head_cdPtr),
                    BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_head_ptr
                )
            )
            validOffsets := and(
                validOffsets,
                eq(
                    // Load signature offset from calldata 0x244.
                    calldataload(BasicOrder_signature_cdPtr),
                    // Derive expected offset as start of recipients + len * 64.
                    add(
                        BasicOrder_signature_ptr,
                        mul(
                            // Additional recipients length at calldata 0x264.
                            calldataload(
                                BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr
                            ),
                            // Each additional recipient has a length of 0x40.
                            AdditionalRecipients_size
                        )
                    )
                )
            )
            validOffsets := and(
                validOffsets,
                lt(
                    // BasicOrderType parameter at calldata offset 0x124.
                    calldataload(BasicOrder_basicOrderType_cdPtr),
                    // Value should be less than 24.
                    BasicOrder_basicOrderType_range
                )
            )
        }
        // Revert with an error if basic order parameter offsets are invalid.
        if (!validOffsets) {
            revert InvalidBasicOrderParameterEncoding();
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { EIP1271Interface } from "../interfaces/EIP1271Interface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    SignatureVerificationErrors
} from "../interfaces/SignatureVerificationErrors.sol";
import { LowLevelHelpers } from "./LowLevelHelpers.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title SignatureVerification
 * @author 0age
 * @notice SignatureVerification contains logic for verifying signatures.
 */
contract SignatureVerification is SignatureVerificationErrors, LowLevelHelpers {
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to verify the signature of an order. An
     *      ERC-1271 fallback will be attempted if either the signature length
     *      is not 64 or 65 bytes or if the recovered signer does not match the
     *      supplied signer.
     *
     * @param signer    The signer for the order.
     * @param digest    The digest to verify the signature against.
     * @param signature A signature from the signer indicating that the order
     *                  has been approved.
     */
    function _assertValidSignature(
        address signer,
        bytes32 digest,
        bytes memory signature
    ) internal view {
        // Declare value for ecrecover equality or 1271 call success status.
        bool success;
        // Utilize assembly to perform optimized signature verification check.
        assembly {
            // Ensure that first word of scratch space is empty.
            mstore(0, 0)
            // Declare value for v signature parameter.
            let v
            // Get the length of the signature.
            let signatureLength := mload(signature)
            // Get the pointer to the value preceding the signature length.
            // This will be used for temporary memory overrides - either the
            // signature head for isValidSignature or the digest for ecrecover.
            let wordBeforeSignaturePtr := sub(signature, OneWord)
            // Cache the current value behind the signature to restore it later.
            let cachedWordBeforeSignature := mload(wordBeforeSignaturePtr)
            // Declare lenDiff + recoveredSigner scope to manage stack pressure.
            {
                // Take the difference between the max ECDSA signature length
                // and the actual signature length. Overflow desired for any
                // values > 65. If the diff is not 0 or 1, it is not a valid
                // ECDSA signature - move on to EIP1271 check.
                let lenDiff := sub(ECDSA_MaxLength, signatureLength)
                // Declare variable for recovered signer.
                let recoveredSigner
                // If diff is 0 or 1, it may be an ECDSA signature.
                // Try to recover signer.
                if iszero(gt(lenDiff, 1)) {
                    // Read the signature `s` value.
                    let originalSignatureS := mload(
                        add(signature, ECDSA_signature_s_offset)
                    )
                    // Read the first byte of the word after `s`. If the
                    // signature is 65 bytes, this will be the real `v` value.
                    // If not, it will need to be modified - doing it this way
                    // saves an extra condition.
                    v := byte(
                        0,
                        mload(add(signature, ECDSA_signature_v_offset))
                    )
                    // If lenDiff is 1, parse 64-byte signature as ECDSA.
                    if lenDiff {
                        // Extract yParity from highest bit of vs and add 27 to
                        // get v.
                        v := add(
                            shr(MaxUint8, originalSignatureS),
                            Signature_lower_v
                        )
                        // Extract canonical s from vs, all but the highest bit.
                        // Temporarily overwrite the original `s` value in the
                        // signature.
                        mstore(
                            add(signature, ECDSA_signature_s_offset),
                            and(
                                originalSignatureS,
                                EIP2098_allButHighestBitMask
                            )
                        )
                    }
                    // Temporarily overwrite the signature length with `v` to
                    // conform to the expected input for ecrecover.
                    mstore(signature, v)
                    // Temporarily overwrite the word before the length with
                    // `digest` to conform to the expected input for ecrecover.
                    mstore(wordBeforeSignaturePtr, digest)
                    // Attempt to recover the signer for the given signature. Do
                    // not check the call status as ecrecover will return a null
                    // address if the signature is invalid.
                    pop(
                        staticcall(
                            gas(),
                            Ecrecover_precompile, // Call ecrecover precompile.
                            wordBeforeSignaturePtr, // Use data memory location.
                            Ecrecover_args_size, // Size of digest, v, r, and s.
                            0, // Write result to scratch space.
                            OneWord // Provide size of returned result.
                        )
                    )
                    // Restore cached word before signature.
                    mstore(wordBeforeSignaturePtr, cachedWordBeforeSignature)
                    // Restore cached signature length.
                    mstore(signature, signatureLength)
                    // Restore cached signature `s` value.
                    mstore(
                        add(signature, ECDSA_signature_s_offset),
                        originalSignatureS
                    )
                    // Read the recovered signer from the buffer given as return
                    // space for ecrecover.
                    recoveredSigner := mload(0)
                }
                // Set success to true if the signature provided was a valid
                // ECDSA signature and the signer is not the null address. Use
                // gt instead of direct as success is used outside of assembly.
                success := and(eq(signer, recoveredSigner), gt(signer, 0))
            }
            // If the signature was not verified with ecrecover, try EIP1271.
            if iszero(success) {
                // Temporarily overwrite the word before the signature length
                // and use it as the head of the signature input to
                // `isValidSignature`, which has a value of 64.
                mstore(
                    wordBeforeSignaturePtr,
                    EIP1271_isValidSignature_signature_head_offset
                )
                // Get pointer to use for the selector of `isValidSignature`.
                let selectorPtr := sub(
                    signature,
                    EIP1271_isValidSignature_selector_negativeOffset
                )
                // Cache the value currently stored at the selector pointer.
                let cachedWordOverwrittenBySelector := mload(selectorPtr)
                // Get pointer to use for `digest` input to `isValidSignature`.
                let digestPtr := sub(
                    signature,
                    EIP1271_isValidSignature_digest_negativeOffset
                )
                // Cache the value currently stored at the digest pointer.
                let cachedWordOverwrittenByDigest := mload(digestPtr)
                // Write the selector first, since it overlaps the digest.
                mstore(selectorPtr, EIP1271_isValidSignature_selector)
                // Next, write the digest.
                mstore(digestPtr, digest)
                // Call signer with `isValidSignature` to validate signature.
                success := staticcall(
                    gas(),
                    signer,
                    selectorPtr,
                    add(
                        signatureLength,
                        EIP1271_isValidSignature_calldata_baseLength
                    ),
                    0,
                    OneWord
                )
                // Determine if the signature is valid on successful calls.
                if success {
                    // If first word of scratch space does not contain EIP-1271
                    // signature selector, revert.
                    if iszero(eq(mload(0), EIP1271_isValidSignature_selector)) {
                        // Revert with bad 1271 signature if signer has code.
                        if extcodesize(signer) {
                            // Bad contract signature.
                            mstore(0, BadContractSignature_error_signature)
                            revert(0, BadContractSignature_error_length)
                        }
                        // Check if signature length was invalid.
                        if gt(sub(ECDSA_MaxLength, signatureLength), 1) {
                            // Revert with generic invalid signature error.
                            mstore(0, InvalidSignature_error_signature)
                            revert(0, InvalidSignature_error_length)
                        }
                        // Check if v was invalid.
                        if iszero(
                            byte(v, ECDSA_twentySeventhAndTwentyEighthBytesSet)
                        ) {
                            // Revert with invalid v value.
                            mstore(0, BadSignatureV_error_signature)
                            mstore(BadSignatureV_error_offset, v)
                            revert(0, BadSignatureV_error_length)
                        }
                        // Revert with generic invalid signer error message.
                        mstore(0, InvalidSigner_error_signature)
                        revert(0, InvalidSigner_error_length)
                    }
                }
                // Restore the cached values overwritten by selector, digest and
                // signature head.
                mstore(wordBeforeSignaturePtr, cachedWordBeforeSignature)
                mstore(selectorPtr, cachedWordOverwrittenBySelector)
                mstore(digestPtr, cachedWordOverwrittenByDigest)
            }
        }
        // If the call failed...
        if (!success) {
            // Revert and pass reason along if one was returned.
            _revertWithReasonIfOneIsReturned();
            // Otherwise, revert with error indicating bad contract signature.
            assembly {
                mstore(0, BadContractSignature_error_signature)
                revert(0, BadContractSignature_error_length)
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { OrderParameters } from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { ConsiderationBase } from "./ConsiderationBase.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title GettersAndDerivers
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ConsiderationInternal contains pure and internal view functions
 *         related to getting or deriving various values.
 */
contract GettersAndDerivers is ConsiderationBase {
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController)
        ConsiderationBase(conduitController)
    {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to derive the order hash for a given order.
     *      Note that only the original consideration items are included in the
     *      order hash, as additional consideration items may be supplied by the
     *      caller.
     *
     * @param orderParameters The parameters of the order to hash.
     * @param counter           The counter of the order to hash.
     *
     * @return orderHash The hash.
     */
    function _deriveOrderHash(
        OrderParameters memory orderParameters,
        uint256 counter
    ) internal view returns (bytes32 orderHash) {
        // Get length of original consideration array and place it on the stack.
        uint256 originalConsiderationLength = (
            orderParameters.totalOriginalConsiderationItems
        );
        /*
         * Memory layout for an array of structs (dynamic or not) is similar
         * to ABI encoding of dynamic types, with a head segment followed by
         * a data segment. The main difference is that the head of an element
         * is a memory pointer rather than an offset.
         */
        // Declare a variable for the derived hash of the offer array.
        bytes32 offerHash;
        // Read offer item EIP-712 typehash from runtime code & place on stack.
        bytes32 typeHash = _OFFER_ITEM_TYPEHASH;
        // Utilize assembly so that memory regions can be reused across hashes.
        assembly {
            // Retrieve the free memory pointer and place on the stack.
            let hashArrPtr := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            // Get the pointer to the offers array.
            let offerArrPtr := mload(
                add(orderParameters, OrderParameters_offer_head_offset)
            )
            // Load the length.
            let offerLength := mload(offerArrPtr)
            // Set the pointer to the first offer's head.
            offerArrPtr := add(offerArrPtr, OneWord)
            // Iterate over the offer items.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let i := 0 } lt(i, offerLength) {
                i := add(i, 1)
            } {
                // Read the pointer to the offer data and subtract one word
                // to get typeHash pointer.
                let ptr := sub(mload(offerArrPtr), OneWord)
                // Read the current value before the offer data.
                let value := mload(ptr)
                // Write the type hash to the previous word.
                mstore(ptr, typeHash)
                // Take the EIP712 hash and store it in the hash array.
                mstore(hashArrPtr, keccak256(ptr, EIP712_OfferItem_size))
                // Restore the previous word.
                mstore(ptr, value)
                // Increment the array pointers by one word.
                offerArrPtr := add(offerArrPtr, OneWord)
                hashArrPtr := add(hashArrPtr, OneWord)
            }
            // Derive the offer hash using the hashes of each item.
            offerHash := keccak256(
                mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot),
                mul(offerLength, OneWord)
            )
        }
        // Declare a variable for the derived hash of the consideration array.
        bytes32 considerationHash;
        // Read consideration item typehash from runtime code & place on stack.
        typeHash = _CONSIDERATION_ITEM_TYPEHASH;
        // Utilize assembly so that memory regions can be reused across hashes.
        assembly {
            // Retrieve the free memory pointer and place on the stack.
            let hashArrPtr := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            // Get the pointer to the consideration array.
            let considerationArrPtr := add(
                mload(
                    add(
                        orderParameters,
                        OrderParameters_consideration_head_offset
                    )
                ),
                OneWord
            )
            // Iterate over the consideration items (not including tips).
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let i := 0 } lt(i, originalConsiderationLength) {
                i := add(i, 1)
            } {
                // Read the pointer to the consideration data and subtract one
                // word to get typeHash pointer.
                let ptr := sub(mload(considerationArrPtr), OneWord)
                // Read the current value before the consideration data.
                let value := mload(ptr)
                // Write the type hash to the previous word.
                mstore(ptr, typeHash)
                // Take the EIP712 hash and store it in the hash array.
                mstore(
                    hashArrPtr,
                    keccak256(ptr, EIP712_ConsiderationItem_size)
                )
                // Restore the previous word.
                mstore(ptr, value)
                // Increment the array pointers by one word.
                considerationArrPtr := add(considerationArrPtr, OneWord)
                hashArrPtr := add(hashArrPtr, OneWord)
            }
            // Derive the consideration hash using the hashes of each item.
            considerationHash := keccak256(
                mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot),
                mul(originalConsiderationLength, OneWord)
            )
        }
        // Read order item EIP-712 typehash from runtime code & place on stack.
        typeHash = _ORDER_TYPEHASH;
        // Utilize assembly to access derived hashes & other arguments directly.
        assembly {
            // Retrieve pointer to the region located just behind parameters.
            let typeHashPtr := sub(orderParameters, OneWord)
            // Store the value at that pointer location to restore later.
            let previousValue := mload(typeHashPtr)
            // Store the order item EIP-712 typehash at the typehash location.
            mstore(typeHashPtr, typeHash)
            // Retrieve the pointer for the offer array head.
            let offerHeadPtr := add(
                orderParameters,
                OrderParameters_offer_head_offset
            )
            // Retrieve the data pointer referenced by the offer head.
            let offerDataPtr := mload(offerHeadPtr)
            // Store the offer hash at the retrieved memory location.
            mstore(offerHeadPtr, offerHash)
            // Retrieve the pointer for the consideration array head.
            let considerationHeadPtr := add(
                orderParameters,
                OrderParameters_consideration_head_offset
            )
            // Retrieve the data pointer referenced by the consideration head.
            let considerationDataPtr := mload(considerationHeadPtr)
            // Store the consideration hash at the retrieved memory location.
            mstore(considerationHeadPtr, considerationHash)
            // Retrieve the pointer for the counter.
            let counterPtr := add(
                orderParameters,
                OrderParameters_counter_offset
            )
            // Store the counter at the retrieved memory location.
            mstore(counterPtr, counter)
            // Derive the order hash using the full range of order parameters.
            orderHash := keccak256(typeHashPtr, EIP712_Order_size)
            // Restore the value previously held at typehash pointer location.
            mstore(typeHashPtr, previousValue)
            // Restore offer data pointer at the offer head pointer location.
            mstore(offerHeadPtr, offerDataPtr)
            // Restore consideration data pointer at the consideration head ptr.
            mstore(considerationHeadPtr, considerationDataPtr)
            // Restore consideration item length at the counter pointer.
            mstore(counterPtr, originalConsiderationLength)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to derive the address of a given conduit
     *      using a corresponding conduit key.
     *
     * @param conduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what corresponding conduit,
     *                   if any, to source token approvals from. This value is
     *                   the "salt" parameter supplied by the deployer (i.e. the
     *                   conduit controller) when deploying the given conduit.
     *
     * @return conduit The address of the conduit associated with the given
     *                 conduit key.
     */
    function _deriveConduit(bytes32 conduitKey)
        internal
        view
        returns (address conduit)
    {
        // Read conduit controller address from runtime and place on the stack.
        address conduitController = address(_CONDUIT_CONTROLLER);
        // Read conduit creation code hash from runtime and place on the stack.
        bytes32 conduitCreationCodeHash = _CONDUIT_CREATION_CODE_HASH;
        // Leverage scratch space to perform an efficient hash.
        assembly {
            // Retrieve the free memory pointer; it will be replaced afterwards.
            let freeMemoryPointer := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            // Place the control character and the conduit controller in scratch
            // space; note that eleven bytes at the beginning are left unused.
            mstore(0, or(MaskOverByteTwelve, conduitController))
            // Place the conduit key in the next region of scratch space.
            mstore(OneWord, conduitKey)
            // Place conduit creation code hash in free memory pointer location.
            mstore(TwoWords, conduitCreationCodeHash)
            // Derive conduit by hashing and applying a mask over last 20 bytes.
            conduit := and(
                // Hash the relevant region.
                keccak256(
                    // The region starts at memory pointer 11.
                    Create2AddressDerivation_ptr,
                    // The region is 85 bytes long (1 + 20 + 32 + 32).
                    Create2AddressDerivation_length
                ),
                // The address equals the last twenty bytes of the hash.
                MaskOverLastTwentyBytes
            )
            // Restore the free memory pointer.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, freeMemoryPointer)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to get the EIP-712 domain separator. If the
     *      chainId matches the chainId set on deployment, the cached domain
     *      separator will be returned; otherwise, it will be derived from
     *      scratch.
     *
     * @return The domain separator.
     */
    function _domainSeparator() internal view returns (bytes32) {
        // prettier-ignore
        return block.chainid == _CHAIN_ID
            ? _DOMAIN_SEPARATOR
            : _deriveDomainSeparator();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to retrieve configuration information for
     *      this contract.
     *
     * @return version           The contract version.
     * @return domainSeparator   The domain separator for this contract.
     * @return conduitController The conduit Controller set for this contract.
     */
    function _information()
        internal
        view
        returns (
            string memory version,
            bytes32 domainSeparator,
            address conduitController
        )
    {
        // Derive the domain separator.
        domainSeparator = _domainSeparator();
        // Declare variable as immutables cannot be accessed within assembly.
        conduitController = address(_CONDUIT_CONTROLLER);
        // Allocate a string with the intended length.
        version = new string(Version_length);
        // Set the version as data on the newly allocated string.
        assembly {
            mstore(add(version, OneWord), shl(Version_shift, Version))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to efficiently derive an digest to sign for
     *      an order in accordance with EIP-712.
     *
     * @param domainSeparator The domain separator.
     * @param orderHash       The order hash.
     *
     * @return value The hash.
     */
    function _deriveEIP712Digest(bytes32 domainSeparator, bytes32 orderHash)
        internal
        pure
        returns (bytes32 value)
    {
        // Leverage scratch space to perform an efficient hash.
        assembly {
            // Place the EIP-712 prefix at the start of scratch space.
            mstore(0, EIP_712_PREFIX)
            // Place the domain separator in the next region of scratch space.
            mstore(EIP712_DomainSeparator_offset, domainSeparator)
            // Place the order hash in scratch space, spilling into the first
            // two bytes of the free memory pointer — this should never be set
            // as memory cannot be expanded to that size, and will be zeroed out
            // after the hash is performed.
            mstore(EIP712_OrderHash_offset, orderHash)
            // Hash the relevant region (65 bytes).
            value := keccak256(0, EIP712_DigestPayload_size)
            // Clear out the dirtied bits in the memory pointer.
            mstore(EIP712_OrderHash_offset, 0)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConsiderationEventsAndErrors
} from "../interfaces/ConsiderationEventsAndErrors.sol";
import { ReentrancyGuard } from "./ReentrancyGuard.sol";
/**
 * @title CounterManager
 * @author 0age
 * @notice CounterManager contains a storage mapping and related functionality
 *         for retrieving and incrementing a per-offerer counter.
 */
contract CounterManager is ConsiderationEventsAndErrors, ReentrancyGuard {
    // Only orders signed using an offerer's current counter are fulfillable.
    mapping(address => uint256) private _counters;
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to cancel all orders from a given offerer with a
     *      given zone in bulk by incrementing a counter. Note that only the
     *      offerer may increment the counter.
     *
     * @return newCounter The new counter.
     */
    function _incrementCounter() internal returns (uint256 newCounter) {
        // Ensure that the reentrancy guard is not currently set.
        _assertNonReentrant();
        // Skip overflow check as counter cannot be incremented that far.
        unchecked {
            // Increment current counter for the supplied offerer.
            newCounter = ++_counters[msg.sender];
        }
        // Emit an event containing the new counter.
        emit CounterIncremented(newCounter, msg.sender);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to retrieve the current counter for a given
     *      offerer.
     *
     * @param offerer The offerer in question.
     *
     * @return currentCounter The current counter.
     */
    function _getCounter(address offerer)
        internal
        view
        returns (uint256 currentCounter)
    {
        // Return the counter for the supplied offerer.
        currentCounter = _counters[offerer];
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConduitControllerInterface
} from "../interfaces/ConduitControllerInterface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConsiderationEventsAndErrors
} from "../interfaces/ConsiderationEventsAndErrors.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title ConsiderationBase
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ConsiderationBase contains immutable constants and constructor logic.
 */
contract ConsiderationBase is ConsiderationEventsAndErrors {
    // Precompute hashes, original chainId, and domain separator on deployment.
    bytes32 internal immutable _NAME_HASH;
    bytes32 internal immutable _VERSION_HASH;
    bytes32 internal immutable _EIP_712_DOMAIN_TYPEHASH;
    bytes32 internal immutable _OFFER_ITEM_TYPEHASH;
    bytes32 internal immutable _CONSIDERATION_ITEM_TYPEHASH;
    bytes32 internal immutable _ORDER_TYPEHASH;
    uint256 internal immutable _CHAIN_ID;
    bytes32 internal immutable _DOMAIN_SEPARATOR;
    // Allow for interaction with the conduit controller.
    ConduitControllerInterface internal immutable _CONDUIT_CONTROLLER;
    // Cache the conduit creation code hash used by the conduit controller.
    bytes32 internal immutable _CONDUIT_CREATION_CODE_HASH;
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) {
        // Derive name and version hashes alongside required EIP-712 typehashes.
        (
            _NAME_HASH,
            _VERSION_HASH,
            _EIP_712_DOMAIN_TYPEHASH,
            _OFFER_ITEM_TYPEHASH,
            _CONSIDERATION_ITEM_TYPEHASH,
            _ORDER_TYPEHASH
        ) = _deriveTypehashes();
        // Store the current chainId and derive the current domain separator.
        _CHAIN_ID = block.chainid;
        _DOMAIN_SEPARATOR = _deriveDomainSeparator();
        // Set the supplied conduit controller.
        _CONDUIT_CONTROLLER = ConduitControllerInterface(conduitController);
        // Retrieve the conduit creation code hash from the supplied controller.
        (_CONDUIT_CREATION_CODE_HASH, ) = (
            _CONDUIT_CONTROLLER.getConduitCodeHashes()
        );
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to derive the EIP-712 domain separator.
     *
     * @return The derived domain separator.
     */
    function _deriveDomainSeparator() internal view returns (bytes32) {
        // prettier-ignore
        return keccak256(
            abi.encode(
                _EIP_712_DOMAIN_TYPEHASH,
                _NAME_HASH,
                _VERSION_HASH,
                block.chainid,
                address(this)
            )
        );
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to retrieve the default name of this
     *      contract and return.
     *
     * @return The name of this contract.
     */
    function _name() internal pure virtual returns (string memory) {
        // Return the name of the contract.
        assembly {
            // First element is the offset for the returned string. Offset the
            // value in memory by one word so that the free memory pointer will
            // be overwritten by the next write.
            mstore(OneWord, OneWord)
            // Name is right padded, so it touches the length which is left
            // padded. This enables writing both values at once. The free memory
            // pointer will be overwritten in the process.
            mstore(NameLengthPtr, NameWithLength)
            // Standard ABI encoding pads returned data to the nearest word. Use
            // the already empty zero slot memory region for this purpose and
            // return the final name string, offset by the original single word.
            return(OneWord, ThreeWords)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to retrieve the default name of this contract
     *      as a string that can be used internally.
     *
     * @return The name of this contract.
     */
    function _nameString() internal pure virtual returns (string memory) {
        // Return the name of the contract.
        return "Consideration";
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to derive required EIP-712 typehashes and
     *      other hashes during contract creation.
     *
     * @return nameHash                  The hash of the name of the contract.
     * @return versionHash               The hash of the version string of the
     *                                   contract.
     * @return eip712DomainTypehash      The primary EIP-712 domain typehash.
     * @return offerItemTypehash         The EIP-712 typehash for OfferItem
     *                                   types.
     * @return considerationItemTypehash The EIP-712 typehash for
     *                                   ConsiderationItem types.
     * @return orderTypehash             The EIP-712 typehash for Order types.
     */
    function _deriveTypehashes()
        internal
        pure
        returns (
            bytes32 nameHash,
            bytes32 versionHash,
            bytes32 eip712DomainTypehash,
            bytes32 offerItemTypehash,
            bytes32 considerationItemTypehash,
            bytes32 orderTypehash
        )
    {
        // Derive hash of the name of the contract.
        nameHash = keccak256(bytes(_nameString()));
        // Derive hash of the version string of the contract.
        versionHash = keccak256(bytes("1.1"));
        // Construct the OfferItem type string.
        // prettier-ignore
        bytes memory offerItemTypeString = abi.encodePacked(
            "OfferItem(",
                "uint8 itemType,",
                "address token,",
                "uint256 identifierOrCriteria,",
                "uint256 startAmount,",
                "uint256 endAmount",
            ")"
        );
        // Construct the ConsiderationItem type string.
        // prettier-ignore
        bytes memory considerationItemTypeString = abi.encodePacked(
            "ConsiderationItem(",
                "uint8 itemType,",
                "address token,",
                "uint256 identifierOrCriteria,",
                "uint256 startAmount,",
                "uint256 endAmount,",
                "address recipient",
            ")"
        );
        // Construct the OrderComponents type string, not including the above.
        // prettier-ignore
        bytes memory orderComponentsPartialTypeString = abi.encodePacked(
            "OrderComponents(",
                "address offerer,",
                "address zone,",
                "OfferItem[] offer,",
                "ConsiderationItem[] consideration,",
                "uint8 orderType,",
                "uint256 startTime,",
                "uint256 endTime,",
                "bytes32 zoneHash,",
                "uint256 salt,",
                "bytes32 conduitKey,",
                "uint256 counter",
            ")"
        );
        // Construct the primary EIP-712 domain type string.
        // prettier-ignore
        eip712DomainTypehash = keccak256(
            abi.encodePacked(
                "EIP712Domain(",
                    "string name,",
                    "string version,",
                    "uint256 chainId,",
                    "address verifyingContract",
                ")"
            )
        );
        // Derive the OfferItem type hash using the corresponding type string.
        offerItemTypehash = keccak256(offerItemTypeString);
        // Derive ConsiderationItem type hash using corresponding type string.
        considerationItemTypehash = keccak256(considerationItemTypeString);
        // Derive OrderItem type hash via combination of relevant type strings.
        orderTypehash = keccak256(
            abi.encodePacked(
                orderComponentsPartialTypeString,
                considerationItemTypeString,
                offerItemTypeString
            )
        );
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { SpentItem, ReceivedItem } from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title ConsiderationEventsAndErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ConsiderationEventsAndErrors contains all events and errors.
 */
interface ConsiderationEventsAndErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever an order is successfully fulfilled.
     *
     * @param orderHash     The hash of the fulfilled order.
     * @param offerer       The offerer of the fulfilled order.
     * @param zone          The zone of the fulfilled order.
     * @param recipient     The recipient of each spent item on the fulfilled
     *                      order, or the null address if there is no specific
     *                      fulfiller (i.e. the order is part of a group of
     *                      orders). Defaults to the caller unless explicitly
     *                      specified otherwise by the fulfiller.
     * @param offer         The offer items spent as part of the order.
     * @param consideration The consideration items received as part of the
     *                      order along with the recipients of each item.
     */
    event OrderFulfilled(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address indexed offerer,
        address indexed zone,
        address recipient,
        SpentItem[] offer,
        ReceivedItem[] consideration
    );
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever an order is successfully cancelled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The hash of the cancelled order.
     * @param offerer   The offerer of the cancelled order.
     * @param zone      The zone of the cancelled order.
     */
    event OrderCancelled(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address indexed offerer,
        address indexed zone
    );
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever an order is explicitly validated. Note that
     *      this event will not be emitted on partial fills even though they do
     *      validate the order as part of partial fulfillment.
     *
     * @param orderHash The hash of the validated order.
     * @param offerer   The offerer of the validated order.
     * @param zone      The zone of the validated order.
     */
    event OrderValidated(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address indexed offerer,
        address indexed zone
    );
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a counter for a given offerer is incremented.
     *
     * @param newCounter The new counter for the offerer.
     * @param offerer  The offerer in question.
     */
    event CounterIncremented(uint256 newCounter, address indexed offerer);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill an order that has
     *      already been fully filled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash on which a fill was attempted.
     */
    error OrderAlreadyFilled(bytes32 orderHash);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill an order outside the
     *      specified start time and end time.
     */
    error InvalidTime();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill an order referencing an
     *      invalid conduit (i.e. one that has not been deployed).
     */
    error InvalidConduit(bytes32 conduitKey, address conduit);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an order is supplied for fulfillment with
     *      a consideration array that is shorter than the original array.
     */
    error MissingOriginalConsiderationItems();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a call to a conduit fails with revert data
     *      that is too expensive to return.
     */
    error InvalidCallToConduit(address conduit);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error if a consideration amount has not been fully
     *      zeroed out after applying all fulfillments.
     *
     * @param orderIndex         The index of the order with the consideration
     *                           item with a shortfall.
     * @param considerationIndex The index of the consideration item on the
     *                           order.
     * @param shortfallAmount    The unfulfilled consideration amount.
     */
    error ConsiderationNotMet(
        uint256 orderIndex,
        uint256 considerationIndex,
        uint256 shortfallAmount
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when insufficient ether is supplied as part of
     *      msg.value when fulfilling orders.
     */
    error InsufficientEtherSupplied();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an ether transfer reverts.
     */
    error EtherTransferGenericFailure(address account, uint256 amount);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a partial fill is attempted on an order
     *      that does not specify partial fill support in its order type.
     */
    error PartialFillsNotEnabledForOrder();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill an order that has been
     *      cancelled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The hash of the cancelled order.
     */
    error OrderIsCancelled(bytes32 orderHash);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill a basic order that has
     *      been partially filled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The hash of the partially used order.
     */
    error OrderPartiallyFilled(bytes32 orderHash);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to cancel an order as a caller
     *      other than the indicated offerer or zone.
     */
    error InvalidCanceller();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when supplying a fraction with a value of zero
     *      for the numerator or denominator, or one where the numerator exceeds
     *      the denominator.
     */
    error BadFraction();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a caller attempts to supply callvalue to a
     *      non-payable basic order route or does not supply any callvalue to a
     *      payable basic order route.
     */
    error InvalidMsgValue(uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill a basic order using
     *      calldata not produced by default ABI encoding.
     */
    error InvalidBasicOrderParameterEncoding();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fulfill any number of
     *      available orders when none are fulfillable.
     */
    error NoSpecifiedOrdersAvailable();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fulfill an order with an
     *      offer for ETH outside of matching orders.
     */
    error InvalidNativeOfferItem();
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { ReentrancyErrors } from "../interfaces/ReentrancyErrors.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title ReentrancyGuard
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ReentrancyGuard contains a storage variable and related functionality
 *         for protecting against reentrancy.
 */
contract ReentrancyGuard is ReentrancyErrors {
    // Prevent reentrant calls on protected functions.
    uint256 private _reentrancyGuard;
    /**
     * @dev Initialize the reentrancy guard during deployment.
     */
    constructor() {
        // Initialize the reentrancy guard in a cleared state.
        _reentrancyGuard = _NOT_ENTERED;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to ensure that the sentinel value for the
     *      reentrancy guard is not currently set and, if not, to set the
     *      sentinel value for the reentrancy guard.
     */
    function _setReentrancyGuard() internal {
        // Ensure that the reentrancy guard is not already set.
        _assertNonReentrant();
        // Set the reentrancy guard.
        _reentrancyGuard = _ENTERED;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to unset the reentrancy guard sentinel value.
     */
    function _clearReentrancyGuard() internal {
        // Clear the reentrancy guard.
        _reentrancyGuard = _NOT_ENTERED;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to ensure that the sentinel value for the
            reentrancy guard is not currently set.
     */
    function _assertNonReentrant() internal view {
        // Ensure that the reentrancy guard is not currently set.
        if (_reentrancyGuard != _NOT_ENTERED) {
            revert NoReentrantCalls();
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title ReentrancyErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ReentrancyErrors contains errors related to reentrancy.
 */
interface ReentrancyErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a caller attempts to reenter a protected
     *      function.
     */
    error NoReentrantCalls();
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
interface EIP1271Interface {
    function isValidSignature(bytes32 digest, bytes calldata signature)
        external
        view
        returns (bytes4);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title SignatureVerificationErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice SignatureVerificationErrors contains all errors related to signature
 *         verification.
 */
interface SignatureVerificationErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a signature that does not contain a v
     *      value of 27 or 28 has been supplied.
     *
     * @param v The invalid v value.
     */
    error BadSignatureV(uint8 v);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when the signer recovered by the supplied
     *      signature does not match the offerer or an allowed EIP-1271 signer
     *      as specified by the offerer in the event they are a contract.
     */
    error InvalidSigner();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a signer cannot be recovered from the
     *      supplied signature.
     */
    error InvalidSignature();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an EIP-1271 call to an account fails.
     */
    error BadContractSignature();
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title LowLevelHelpers
 * @author 0age
 * @notice LowLevelHelpers contains logic for performing various low-level
 *         operations.
 */
contract LowLevelHelpers {
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to staticcall an arbitrary target with given
     *      calldata. Note that no data is written to memory and no contract
     *      size check is performed.
     *
     * @param target   The account to staticcall.
     * @param callData The calldata to supply when staticcalling the target.
     *
     * @return success The status of the staticcall to the target.
     */
    function _staticcall(address target, bytes memory callData)
        internal
        view
        returns (bool success)
    {
        assembly {
            // Perform the staticcall.
            success := staticcall(
                gas(),
                target,
                add(callData, OneWord),
                mload(callData),
                0,
                0
            )
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to revert and pass along the revert reason if
     *      data was returned by the last call and that the size of that data
     *      does not exceed the currently allocated memory size.
     */
    function _revertWithReasonIfOneIsReturned() internal view {
        assembly {
            // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as sufficient gas
            // remains to do so:
            if returndatasize() {
                // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to copy returndata
                // while expanding memory where necessary. Start by computing
                // the word size of returndata and allocated memory.
                let returnDataWords := div(
                    add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                    OneWord
                )
                // Note: use the free memory pointer in place of msize() to work
                // around a Yul warning that prevents accessing msize directly
                // when the IR pipeline is activated.
                let msizeWords := div(mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot), OneWord)
                // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                    cost := add(
                        cost,
                        add(
                            mul(sub(returnDataWords, msizeWords), CostPerWord),
                            div(
                                sub(
                                    mul(returnDataWords, returnDataWords),
                                    mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                ),
                                MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                            )
                        )
                    )
                }
                // Finally, add a small constant and compare to gas remaining;
                // bubble up the revert data if enough gas is still available.
                if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                    // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite existing memory.
                    returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                    // Revert, specifying memory region with copied returndata.
                    revert(0, returndatasize())
                }
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to determine if the first word of returndata
     *      matches an expected magic value.
     *
     * @param expected The expected magic value.
     *
     * @return A boolean indicating whether the expected value matches the one
     *         located in the first word of returndata.
     */
    function _doesNotMatchMagic(bytes4 expected) internal pure returns (bool) {
        // Declare a variable for the value held by the return data buffer.
        bytes4 result;
        // Utilize assembly in order to read directly from returndata buffer.
        assembly {
            // Only put result on stack if return data is exactly one word.
            if eq(returndatasize(), OneWord) {
                // Copy the word directly from return data into scratch space.
                returndatacopy(0, 0, OneWord)
                // Take value from scratch space and place it on the stack.
                result := mload(0)
            }
        }
        // Return a boolean indicating whether expected and located value match.
        return result != expected;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { ItemType, Side } from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OfferItem,
    ConsiderationItem,
    ReceivedItem,
    OrderParameters,
    AdvancedOrder,
    Execution,
    FulfillmentComponent
} from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    FulfillmentApplicationErrors
} from "../interfaces/FulfillmentApplicationErrors.sol";
/**
 * @title FulfillmentApplier
 * @author 0age
 * @notice FulfillmentApplier contains logic related to applying fulfillments,
 *         both as part of order matching (where offer items are matched to
 *         consideration items) as well as fulfilling available orders (where
 *         order items and consideration items are independently aggregated).
 */
contract FulfillmentApplier is FulfillmentApplicationErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to match offer items to consideration items
     *      on a group of orders via a supplied fulfillment.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders          The orders to match.
     * @param offerComponents         An array designating offer components to
     *                                match to consideration components.
     * @param considerationComponents An array designating consideration
     *                                components to match to offer components.
     *                                Note that each consideration amount must
     *                                be zero in order for the match operation
     *                                to be valid.
     *
     * @return execution The transfer performed as a result of the fulfillment.
     */
    function _applyFulfillment(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        FulfillmentComponent[] calldata offerComponents,
        FulfillmentComponent[] calldata considerationComponents
    ) internal pure returns (Execution memory execution) {
        // Ensure 1+ of both offer and consideration components are supplied.
        if (
            offerComponents.length == 0 || considerationComponents.length == 0
        ) {
            revert OfferAndConsiderationRequiredOnFulfillment();
        }
        // Declare a new Execution struct.
        Execution memory considerationExecution;
        // Validate & aggregate consideration items to new Execution object.
        _aggregateValidFulfillmentConsiderationItems(
            advancedOrders,
            considerationComponents,
            considerationExecution
        );
        // Retrieve the consideration item from the execution struct.
        ReceivedItem memory considerationItem = considerationExecution.item;
        // Recipient does not need to be specified because it will always be set
        // to that of the consideration.
        // Validate & aggregate offer items to Execution object.
        _aggregateValidFulfillmentOfferItems(
            advancedOrders,
            offerComponents,
            execution
        );
        // Ensure offer and consideration share types, tokens and identifiers.
        if (
            execution.item.itemType != considerationItem.itemType ||
            execution.item.token != considerationItem.token ||
            execution.item.identifier != considerationItem.identifier
        ) {
            revert MismatchedFulfillmentOfferAndConsiderationComponents();
        }
        // If total consideration amount exceeds the offer amount...
        if (considerationItem.amount > execution.item.amount) {
            // Retrieve the first consideration component from the fulfillment.
            FulfillmentComponent memory targetComponent = (
                considerationComponents[0]
            );
            // Skip underflow check as the conditional being true implies that
            // considerationItem.amount > execution.item.amount.
            unchecked {
                // Add excess consideration item amount to original order array.
                advancedOrders[targetComponent.orderIndex]
                    .parameters
                    .consideration[targetComponent.itemIndex]
                    .startAmount = (considerationItem.amount -
                    execution.item.amount);
            }
            // Reduce total consideration amount to equal the offer amount.
            considerationItem.amount = execution.item.amount;
        } else {
            // Retrieve the first offer component from the fulfillment.
            FulfillmentComponent memory targetComponent = offerComponents[0];
            // Skip underflow check as the conditional being false implies that
            // execution.item.amount >= considerationItem.amount.
            unchecked {
                // Add excess offer item amount to the original array of orders.
                advancedOrders[targetComponent.orderIndex]
                    .parameters
                    .offer[targetComponent.itemIndex]
                    .startAmount = (execution.item.amount -
                    considerationItem.amount);
            }
            // Reduce total offer amount to equal the consideration amount.
            execution.item.amount = considerationItem.amount;
        }
        // Reuse consideration recipient.
        execution.item.recipient = considerationItem.recipient;
        // Return the final execution that will be triggered for relevant items.
        return execution; // Execution(considerationItem, offerer, conduitKey);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to aggregate offer or consideration items
     *      from a group of orders into a single execution via a supplied array
     *      of fulfillment components. Items that are not available to aggregate
     *      will not be included in the aggregated execution.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders        The orders to aggregate.
     * @param side                  The side (i.e. offer or consideration).
     * @param fulfillmentComponents An array designating item components to
     *                              aggregate if part of an available order.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey   A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                              any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                              approvals from. The zero hash signifies that
     *                              no conduit should be used, with approvals
     *                              set directly on this contract.
     * @param recipient             The intended recipient for all received
     *                              items.
     *
     * @return execution The transfer performed as a result of the fulfillment.
     */
    function _aggregateAvailable(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        Side side,
        FulfillmentComponent[] memory fulfillmentComponents,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    ) internal view returns (Execution memory execution) {
        // Skip overflow / underflow checks; conditions checked or unreachable.
        unchecked {
            // Retrieve fulfillment components array length and place on stack.
            // Ensure at least one fulfillment component has been supplied.
            if (fulfillmentComponents.length == 0) {
                revert MissingFulfillmentComponentOnAggregation(side);
            }
            // If the fulfillment components are offer components...
            if (side == Side.OFFER) {
                // Set the supplied recipient on the execution item.
                execution.item.recipient = payable(recipient);
                // Return execution for aggregated items provided by offerer.
                _aggregateValidFulfillmentOfferItems(
                    advancedOrders,
                    fulfillmentComponents,
                    execution
                );
            } else {
                // Otherwise, fulfillment components are consideration
                // components. Return execution for aggregated items provided by
                // the fulfiller.
                _aggregateValidFulfillmentConsiderationItems(
                    advancedOrders,
                    fulfillmentComponents,
                    execution
                );
                // Set the caller as the offerer on the execution.
                execution.offerer = msg.sender;
                // Set fulfiller conduit key as the conduit key on execution.
                execution.conduitKey = fulfillerConduitKey;
            }
            // Set the offerer and recipient to null address if execution
            // amount is zero. This will cause the execution item to be skipped.
            if (execution.item.amount == 0) {
                execution.offerer = address(0);
                execution.item.recipient = payable(0);
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to aggregate a group of offer items using
     *      supplied directives on which component items are candidates for
     *      aggregation, skipping items on orders that are not available.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders  The orders to aggregate offer items from.
     * @param offerComponents An array of FulfillmentComponent structs
     *                        indicating the order index and item index of each
     *                        candidate offer item for aggregation.
     * @param execution       The execution to apply the aggregation to.
     */
    function _aggregateValidFulfillmentOfferItems(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        FulfillmentComponent[] memory offerComponents,
        Execution memory execution
    ) internal pure {
        assembly {
            // Declare function for reverts on invalid fulfillment data.
            function throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData() {
                // Store the InvalidFulfillmentComponentData error signature.
                mstore(0, InvalidFulfillmentComponentData_error_signature)
                // Return, supplying InvalidFulfillmentComponentData signature.
                revert(0, InvalidFulfillmentComponentData_error_len)
            }
            // Declare function for reverts due to arithmetic overflows.
            function throwOverflow() {
                // Store the Panic error signature.
                mstore(0, Panic_error_signature)
                // Store the arithmetic (0x11) panic code as initial argument.
                mstore(Panic_error_offset, Panic_arithmetic)
                // Return, supplying Panic signature and arithmetic code.
                revert(0, Panic_error_length)
            }
            // Get position in offerComponents head.
            let fulfillmentHeadPtr := add(offerComponents, OneWord)
            // Retrieve the order index using the fulfillment pointer.
            let orderIndex := mload(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr))
            // Ensure that the order index is not out of range.
            if iszero(lt(orderIndex, mload(advancedOrders))) {
                throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
            }
            // Read advancedOrders[orderIndex] pointer from its array head.
            let orderPtr := mload(
                // Calculate head position of advancedOrders[orderIndex].
                add(add(advancedOrders, OneWord), mul(orderIndex, OneWord))
            )
            // Read the pointer to OrderParameters from the AdvancedOrder.
            let paramsPtr := mload(orderPtr)
            // Load the offer array pointer.
            let offerArrPtr := mload(
                add(paramsPtr, OrderParameters_offer_head_offset)
            )
            // Retrieve item index using an offset of the fulfillment pointer.
            let itemIndex := mload(
                add(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr), Fulfillment_itemIndex_offset)
            )
            // Only continue if the fulfillment is not invalid.
            if iszero(lt(itemIndex, mload(offerArrPtr))) {
                throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
            }
            // Retrieve consideration item pointer using the item index.
            let offerItemPtr := mload(
                add(
                    // Get pointer to beginning of receivedItem.
                    add(offerArrPtr, OneWord),
                    // Calculate offset to pointer for desired order.
                    mul(itemIndex, OneWord)
                )
            )
            // Declare a variable for the final aggregated item amount.
            let amount := 0
            // Create variable to track errors encountered with amount.
            let errorBuffer := 0
            // Only add offer amount to execution amount on a nonzero numerator.
            if mload(add(orderPtr, AdvancedOrder_numerator_offset)) {
                // Retrieve amount pointer using consideration item pointer.
                let amountPtr := add(offerItemPtr, Common_amount_offset)
                // Set the amount.
                amount := mload(amountPtr)
                // Zero out amount on item to indicate it is credited.
                mstore(amountPtr, 0)
                // Buffer indicating whether issues were found.
                errorBuffer := iszero(amount)
            }
            // Retrieve the received item pointer.
            let receivedItemPtr := mload(execution)
            // Set the item type on the received item.
            mstore(receivedItemPtr, mload(offerItemPtr))
            // Set the token on the received item.
            mstore(
                add(receivedItemPtr, Common_token_offset),
                mload(add(offerItemPtr, Common_token_offset))
            )
            // Set the identifier on the received item.
            mstore(
                add(receivedItemPtr, Common_identifier_offset),
                mload(add(offerItemPtr, Common_identifier_offset))
            )
            // Set the offerer on returned execution using order pointer.
            mstore(add(execution, Execution_offerer_offset), mload(paramsPtr))
            // Set conduitKey on returned execution via offset of order pointer.
            mstore(
                add(execution, Execution_conduit_offset),
                mload(add(paramsPtr, OrderParameters_conduit_offset))
            )
            // Calculate the hash of (itemType, token, identifier).
            let dataHash := keccak256(
                receivedItemPtr,
                ReceivedItem_CommonParams_size
            )
            // Get position one word past last element in head of array.
            let endPtr := add(
                offerComponents,
                mul(mload(offerComponents), OneWord)
            )
            // Iterate over remaining offer components.
            // prettier-ignore
            for {} lt(fulfillmentHeadPtr,  endPtr) {} {
                // Increment the pointer to the fulfillment head by one word.
                fulfillmentHeadPtr := add(fulfillmentHeadPtr, OneWord)
                // Get the order index using the fulfillment pointer.
                orderIndex := mload(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr))
                // Ensure the order index is in range.
                if iszero(lt(orderIndex, mload(advancedOrders))) {
                  throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
                }
                // Get pointer to AdvancedOrder element.
                orderPtr := mload(
                    add(
                        add(advancedOrders, OneWord),
                        mul(orderIndex, OneWord)
                    )
                )
                // Only continue if numerator is not zero.
                if iszero(mload(
                    add(orderPtr, AdvancedOrder_numerator_offset)
                )) {
                  continue
                }
                // Read the pointer to OrderParameters from the AdvancedOrder.
                paramsPtr := mload(orderPtr)
                // Load offer array pointer.
                offerArrPtr := mload(
                    add(
                        paramsPtr,
                        OrderParameters_offer_head_offset
                    )
                )
                // Get the item index using the fulfillment pointer.
                itemIndex := mload(add(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr), OneWord))
                // Throw if itemIndex is out of the range of array.
                if iszero(
                    lt(itemIndex, mload(offerArrPtr))
                ) {
                    throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
                }
                // Retrieve offer item pointer using index.
                offerItemPtr := mload(
                    add(
                        // Get pointer to beginning of receivedItem.
                        add(offerArrPtr, OneWord),
                        // Use offset to pointer for desired order.
                        mul(itemIndex, OneWord)
                    )
                )
                // Retrieve amount pointer using offer item pointer.
                let amountPtr := add(
                      offerItemPtr,
                      Common_amount_offset
                )
                // Add offer amount to execution amount.
                let newAmount := add(amount, mload(amountPtr))
                // Update error buffer: 1 = zero amount, 2 = overflow, 3 = both.
                errorBuffer := or(
                  errorBuffer,
                  or(
                    shl(1, lt(newAmount, amount)),
                    iszero(mload(amountPtr))
                  )
                )
                // Update the amount to the new, summed amount.
                amount := newAmount
                // Zero out amount on original item to indicate it is credited.
                mstore(amountPtr, 0)
                // Ensure the indicated item matches original item.
                if iszero(
                    and(
                        and(
                          // The offerer must match on both items.
                          eq(
                              mload(paramsPtr),
                              mload(
                                  add(execution, Execution_offerer_offset)
                              )
                          ),
                          // The conduit key must match on both items.
                          eq(
                              mload(
                                  add(
                                      paramsPtr,
                                      OrderParameters_conduit_offset
                                  )
                              ),
                              mload(
                                  add(
                                      execution,
                                      Execution_conduit_offset
                                  )
                              )
                          )
                        ),
                        // The itemType, token, and identifier must match.
                        eq(
                            dataHash,
                            keccak256(
                                offerItemPtr,
                                ReceivedItem_CommonParams_size
                            )
                        )
                    )
                ) {
                    // Throw if any of the requirements are not met.
                    throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
                }
            }
            // Write final amount to execution.
            mstore(add(mload(execution), Common_amount_offset), amount)
            // Determine whether the error buffer contains a nonzero error code.
            if errorBuffer {
                // If errorBuffer is 1, an item had an amount of zero.
                if eq(errorBuffer, 1) {
                    // Store the MissingItemAmount error signature.
                    mstore(0, MissingItemAmount_error_signature)
                    // Return, supplying MissingItemAmount signature.
                    revert(0, MissingItemAmount_error_len)
                }
                // If errorBuffer is not 1 or 0, the sum overflowed.
                // Panic!
                throwOverflow()
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to aggregate a group of consideration items
     *      using supplied directives on which component items are candidates
     *      for aggregation, skipping items on orders that are not available.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders          The orders to aggregate consideration
     *                                items from.
     * @param considerationComponents An array of FulfillmentComponent structs
     *                                indicating the order index and item index
     *                                of each candidate consideration item for
     *                                aggregation.
     * @param execution       The execution to apply the aggregation to.
     */
    function _aggregateValidFulfillmentConsiderationItems(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        FulfillmentComponent[] memory considerationComponents,
        Execution memory execution
    ) internal pure {
        // Utilize assembly in order to efficiently aggregate the items.
        assembly {
            // Declare function for reverts on invalid fulfillment data.
            function throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData() {
                // Store the InvalidFulfillmentComponentData error signature.
                mstore(0, InvalidFulfillmentComponentData_error_signature)
                // Return, supplying InvalidFulfillmentComponentData signature.
                revert(0, InvalidFulfillmentComponentData_error_len)
            }
            // Declare function for reverts due to arithmetic overflows.
            function throwOverflow() {
                // Store the Panic error signature.
                mstore(0, Panic_error_signature)
                // Store the arithmetic (0x11) panic code as initial argument.
                mstore(Panic_error_offset, Panic_arithmetic)
                // Return, supplying Panic signature and arithmetic code.
                revert(0, Panic_error_length)
            }
            // Get position in considerationComponents head.
            let fulfillmentHeadPtr := add(considerationComponents, OneWord)
            // Retrieve the order index using the fulfillment pointer.
            let orderIndex := mload(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr))
            // Ensure that the order index is not out of range.
            if iszero(lt(orderIndex, mload(advancedOrders))) {
                throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
            }
            // Read advancedOrders[orderIndex] pointer from its array head.
            let orderPtr := mload(
                // Calculate head position of advancedOrders[orderIndex].
                add(add(advancedOrders, OneWord), mul(orderIndex, OneWord))
            )
            // Load consideration array pointer.
            let considerationArrPtr := mload(
                add(
                    // Read pointer to OrderParameters from the AdvancedOrder.
                    mload(orderPtr),
                    OrderParameters_consideration_head_offset
                )
            )
            // Retrieve item index using an offset of the fulfillment pointer.
            let itemIndex := mload(
                add(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr), Fulfillment_itemIndex_offset)
            )
            // Ensure that the order index is not out of range.
            if iszero(lt(itemIndex, mload(considerationArrPtr))) {
                throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
            }
            // Retrieve consideration item pointer using the item index.
            let considerationItemPtr := mload(
                add(
                    // Get pointer to beginning of receivedItem.
                    add(considerationArrPtr, OneWord),
                    // Calculate offset to pointer for desired order.
                    mul(itemIndex, OneWord)
                )
            )
            // Declare a variable for the final aggregated item amount.
            let amount := 0
            // Create variable to track errors encountered with amount.
            let errorBuffer := 0
            // Only add consideration amount to execution amount if numerator is
            // greater than zero.
            if mload(add(orderPtr, AdvancedOrder_numerator_offset)) {
                // Retrieve amount pointer using consideration item pointer.
                let amountPtr := add(considerationItemPtr, Common_amount_offset)
                // Set the amount.
                amount := mload(amountPtr)
                // Set error bit if amount is zero.
                errorBuffer := iszero(amount)
                // Zero out amount on item to indicate it is credited.
                mstore(amountPtr, 0)
            }
            // Retrieve ReceivedItem pointer from Execution.
            let receivedItem := mload(execution)
            // Set the item type on the received item.
            mstore(receivedItem, mload(considerationItemPtr))
            // Set the token on the received item.
            mstore(
                add(receivedItem, Common_token_offset),
                mload(add(considerationItemPtr, Common_token_offset))
            )
            // Set the identifier on the received item.
            mstore(
                add(receivedItem, Common_identifier_offset),
                mload(add(considerationItemPtr, Common_identifier_offset))
            )
            // Set the recipient on the received item.
            mstore(
                add(receivedItem, ReceivedItem_recipient_offset),
                mload(
                    add(
                        considerationItemPtr,
                        ConsiderationItem_recipient_offset
                    )
                )
            )
            // Calculate the hash of (itemType, token, identifier).
            let dataHash := keccak256(
                receivedItem,
                ReceivedItem_CommonParams_size
            )
            // Get position one word past last element in head of array.
            let endPtr := add(
                considerationComponents,
                mul(mload(considerationComponents), OneWord)
            )
            // Iterate over remaining offer components.
            // prettier-ignore
            for {} lt(fulfillmentHeadPtr,  endPtr) {} {
                // Increment position in considerationComponents head.
                fulfillmentHeadPtr := add(fulfillmentHeadPtr, OneWord)
                // Get the order index using the fulfillment pointer.
                orderIndex := mload(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr))
                // Ensure the order index is in range.
                if iszero(lt(orderIndex, mload(advancedOrders))) {
                  throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
                }
                // Get pointer to AdvancedOrder element.
                orderPtr := mload(
                    add(
                        add(advancedOrders, OneWord),
                        mul(orderIndex, OneWord)
                    )
                )
                // Only continue if numerator is not zero.
                if iszero(
                    mload(add(orderPtr, AdvancedOrder_numerator_offset))
                ) {
                  continue
                }
                // Load consideration array pointer from OrderParameters.
                considerationArrPtr := mload(
                    add(
                        // Get pointer to OrderParameters from AdvancedOrder.
                        mload(orderPtr),
                        OrderParameters_consideration_head_offset
                    )
                )
                // Get the item index using the fulfillment pointer.
                itemIndex := mload(add(mload(fulfillmentHeadPtr), OneWord))
                // Check if itemIndex is within the range of array.
                if iszero(lt(itemIndex, mload(considerationArrPtr))) {
                    throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
                }
                // Retrieve consideration item pointer using index.
                considerationItemPtr := mload(
                    add(
                        // Get pointer to beginning of receivedItem.
                        add(considerationArrPtr, OneWord),
                        // Use offset to pointer for desired order.
                        mul(itemIndex, OneWord)
                    )
                )
                // Retrieve amount pointer using consideration item pointer.
                let amountPtr := add(
                      considerationItemPtr,
                      Common_amount_offset
                )
                // Add offer amount to execution amount.
                let newAmount := add(amount, mload(amountPtr))
                // Update error buffer: 1 = zero amount, 2 = overflow, 3 = both.
                errorBuffer := or(
                  errorBuffer,
                  or(
                    shl(1, lt(newAmount, amount)),
                    iszero(mload(amountPtr))
                  )
                )
                // Update the amount to the new, summed amount.
                amount := newAmount
                // Zero out amount on original item to indicate it is credited.
                mstore(amountPtr, 0)
                // Ensure the indicated item matches original item.
                if iszero(
                    and(
                        // Item recipients must match.
                        eq(
                            mload(
                                add(
                                    considerationItemPtr,
                                    ConsiderItem_recipient_offset
                                )
                            ),
                            mload(
                                add(
                                    receivedItem,
                                    ReceivedItem_recipient_offset
                                )
                            )
                        ),
                        // The itemType, token, identifier must match.
                        eq(
                          dataHash,
                          keccak256(
                            considerationItemPtr,
                            ReceivedItem_CommonParams_size
                          )
                        )
                    )
                ) {
                    // Throw if any of the requirements are not met.
                    throwInvalidFulfillmentComponentData()
                }
            }
            // Write final amount to execution.
            mstore(add(receivedItem, Common_amount_offset), amount)
            // Determine whether the error buffer contains a nonzero error code.
            if errorBuffer {
                // If errorBuffer is 1, an item had an amount of zero.
                if eq(errorBuffer, 1) {
                    // Store the MissingItemAmount error signature.
                    mstore(0, MissingItemAmount_error_signature)
                    // Return, supplying MissingItemAmount signature.
                    revert(0, MissingItemAmount_error_len)
                }
                // If errorBuffer is not 1 or 0, the sum overflowed.
                // Panic!
                throwOverflow()
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { Side } from "../lib/ConsiderationEnums.sol";
/**
 * @title FulfillmentApplicationErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice FulfillmentApplicationErrors contains errors related to fulfillment
 *         application and aggregation.
 */
interface FulfillmentApplicationErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a fulfillment is provided that does not
     *      declare at least one component as part of a call to fulfill
     *      available orders.
     */
    error MissingFulfillmentComponentOnAggregation(Side side);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a fulfillment is provided that does not
     *      declare at least one offer component and at least one consideration
     *      component.
     */
    error OfferAndConsiderationRequiredOnFulfillment();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when the initial offer item named by a
     *      fulfillment component does not match the type, token, identifier,
     *      or conduit preference of the initial consideration item.
     */
    error MismatchedFulfillmentOfferAndConsiderationComponents();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an order or item index are out of range
     *      or a fulfillment component does not match the type, token,
     *      identifier, or conduit preference of the initial consideration item.
     */
    error InvalidFulfillmentComponentData();
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { ItemType, Side } from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OfferItem,
    ConsiderationItem,
    OrderParameters,
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    CriteriaResolutionErrors
} from "../interfaces/CriteriaResolutionErrors.sol";
/**
 * @title CriteriaResolution
 * @author 0age
 * @notice CriteriaResolution contains a collection of pure functions related to
 *         resolving criteria-based items.
 */
contract CriteriaResolution is CriteriaResolutionErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to apply criteria resolvers containing
     *      specific token identifiers and associated proofs to order items.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders     The orders to apply criteria resolvers to.
     * @param criteriaResolvers  An array where each element contains a
     *                           reference to a specific order as well as that
     *                           order's offer or consideration, a token
     *                           identifier, and a proof that the supplied token
     *                           identifier is contained in the order's merkle
     *                           root. Note that a root of zero indicates that
     *                           any transferable token identifier is valid and
     *                           that no proof needs to be supplied.
     */
    function _applyCriteriaResolvers(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] memory criteriaResolvers
    ) internal pure {
        // Skip overflow checks as all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Retrieve length of criteria resolvers array and place on stack.
            uint256 totalCriteriaResolvers = criteriaResolvers.length;
            // Retrieve length of orders array and place on stack.
            uint256 totalAdvancedOrders = advancedOrders.length;
            // Iterate over each criteria resolver.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalCriteriaResolvers; ++i) {
                // Retrieve the criteria resolver.
                CriteriaResolver memory criteriaResolver = (
                    criteriaResolvers[i]
                );
                // Read the order index from memory and place it on the stack.
                uint256 orderIndex = criteriaResolver.orderIndex;
                // Ensure that the order index is in range.
                if (orderIndex >= totalAdvancedOrders) {
                    revert OrderCriteriaResolverOutOfRange();
                }
                // Skip criteria resolution for order if not fulfilled.
                if (advancedOrders[orderIndex].numerator == 0) {
                    continue;
                }
                // Retrieve the parameters for the order.
                OrderParameters memory orderParameters = (
                    advancedOrders[orderIndex].parameters
                );
                // Read component index from memory and place it on the stack.
                uint256 componentIndex = criteriaResolver.index;
                // Declare values for item's type and criteria.
                ItemType itemType;
                uint256 identifierOrCriteria;
                // If the criteria resolver refers to an offer item...
                if (criteriaResolver.side == Side.OFFER) {
                    // Retrieve the offer.
                    OfferItem[] memory offer = orderParameters.offer;
                    // Ensure that the component index is in range.
                    if (componentIndex >= offer.length) {
                        revert OfferCriteriaResolverOutOfRange();
                    }
                    // Retrieve relevant item using the component index.
                    OfferItem memory offerItem = offer[componentIndex];
                    // Read item type and criteria from memory & place on stack.
                    itemType = offerItem.itemType;
                    identifierOrCriteria = offerItem.identifierOrCriteria;
                    // Optimistically update item type to remove criteria usage.
                    // Use assembly to operate on ItemType enum as a number.
                    ItemType newItemType;
                    assembly {
                        // Item type 4 becomes 2 and item type 5 becomes 3.
                        newItemType := sub(3, eq(itemType, 4))
                    }
                    offerItem.itemType = newItemType;
                    // Optimistically update identifier w/ supplied identifier.
                    offerItem.identifierOrCriteria = criteriaResolver
                        .identifier;
                } else {
                    // Otherwise, the resolver refers to a consideration item.
                    ConsiderationItem[] memory consideration = (
                        orderParameters.consideration
                    );
                    // Ensure that the component index is in range.
                    if (componentIndex >= consideration.length) {
                        revert ConsiderationCriteriaResolverOutOfRange();
                    }
                    // Retrieve relevant item using order and component index.
                    ConsiderationItem memory considerationItem = (
                        consideration[componentIndex]
                    );
                    // Read item type and criteria from memory & place on stack.
                    itemType = considerationItem.itemType;
                    identifierOrCriteria = (
                        considerationItem.identifierOrCriteria
                    );
                    // Optimistically update item type to remove criteria usage.
                    // Use assembly to operate on ItemType enum as a number.
                    ItemType newItemType;
                    assembly {
                        // Item type 4 becomes 2 and item type 5 becomes 3.
                        newItemType := sub(3, eq(itemType, 4))
                    }
                    considerationItem.itemType = newItemType;
                    // Optimistically update identifier w/ supplied identifier.
                    considerationItem.identifierOrCriteria = (
                        criteriaResolver.identifier
                    );
                }
                // Ensure the specified item type indicates criteria usage.
                if (!_isItemWithCriteria(itemType)) {
                    revert CriteriaNotEnabledForItem();
                }
                // If criteria is not 0 (i.e. a collection-wide offer)...
                if (identifierOrCriteria != uint256(0)) {
                    // Verify identifier inclusion in criteria root using proof.
                    _verifyProof(
                        criteriaResolver.identifier,
                        identifierOrCriteria,
                        criteriaResolver.criteriaProof
                    );
                }
            }
            // Iterate over each advanced order.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalAdvancedOrders; ++i) {
                // Retrieve the advanced order.
                AdvancedOrder memory advancedOrder = advancedOrders[i];
                // Skip criteria resolution for order if not fulfilled.
                if (advancedOrder.numerator == 0) {
                    continue;
                }
                // Retrieve the parameters for the order.
                OrderParameters memory orderParameters = (
                    advancedOrder.parameters
                );
                // Read consideration length from memory and place on stack.
                uint256 totalItems = orderParameters.consideration.length;
                // Iterate over each consideration item on the order.
                for (uint256 j = 0; j < totalItems; ++j) {
                    // Ensure item type no longer indicates criteria usage.
                    if (
                        _isItemWithCriteria(
                            orderParameters.consideration[j].itemType
                        )
                    ) {
                        revert UnresolvedConsiderationCriteria();
                    }
                }
                // Read offer length from memory and place on stack.
                totalItems = orderParameters.offer.length;
                // Iterate over each offer item on the order.
                for (uint256 j = 0; j < totalItems; ++j) {
                    // Ensure item type no longer indicates criteria usage.
                    if (
                        _isItemWithCriteria(orderParameters.offer[j].itemType)
                    ) {
                        revert UnresolvedOfferCriteria();
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to check whether a given item type represents
     *      a criteria-based ERC721 or ERC1155 item (e.g. an item that can be
     *      resolved to one of a number of different identifiers at the time of
     *      order fulfillment).
     *
     * @param itemType The item type in question.
     *
     * @return withCriteria A boolean indicating that the item type in question
     *                      represents a criteria-based item.
     */
    function _isItemWithCriteria(ItemType itemType)
        internal
        pure
        returns (bool withCriteria)
    {
        // ERC721WithCriteria is ItemType 4. ERC1155WithCriteria is ItemType 5.
        assembly {
            withCriteria := gt(itemType, 3)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to ensure that a given element is contained
     *      in a merkle root via a supplied proof.
     *
     * @param leaf  The element for which to prove inclusion.
     * @param root  The merkle root that inclusion will be proved against.
     * @param proof The merkle proof.
     */
    function _verifyProof(
        uint256 leaf,
        uint256 root,
        bytes32[] memory proof
    ) internal pure {
        // Declare a variable that will be used to determine proof validity.
        bool isValid;
        // Utilize assembly to efficiently verify the proof against the root.
        assembly {
            // Store the leaf at the beginning of scratch space.
            mstore(0, leaf)
            // Derive the hash of the leaf to use as the initial proof element.
            let computedHash := keccak256(0, OneWord)
            // Based on: https://github.com/Rari-Capital/solmate/blob/v7/src/utils/MerkleProof.sol
            // Get memory start location of the first element in proof array.
            let data := add(proof, OneWord)
            // Iterate over each proof element to compute the root hash.
            for {
                // Left shift by 5 is equivalent to multiplying by 0x20.
                let end := add(data, shl(5, mload(proof)))
            } lt(data, end) {
                // Increment by one word at a time.
                data := add(data, OneWord)
            } {
                // Get the proof element.
                let loadedData := mload(data)
                // Sort proof elements and place them in scratch space.
                // Slot of `computedHash` in scratch space.
                // If the condition is true: 0x20, otherwise: 0x00.
                let scratch := shl(5, gt(computedHash, loadedData))
                // Store elements to hash contiguously in scratch space. Scratch
                // space is 64 bytes (0x00 - 0x3f) & both elements are 32 bytes.
                mstore(scratch, computedHash)
                mstore(xor(scratch, OneWord), loadedData)
                // Derive the updated hash.
                computedHash := keccak256(0, TwoWords)
            }
            // Compare the final hash to the supplied root.
            isValid := eq(computedHash, root)
        }
        // Revert if computed hash does not equal supplied root.
        if (!isValid) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title CriteriaResolutionErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice CriteriaResolutionErrors contains all errors related to criteria
 *         resolution.
 */
interface CriteriaResolutionErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when providing a criteria resolver that refers
     *      to an order that has not been supplied.
     */
    error OrderCriteriaResolverOutOfRange();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error if an offer item still has unresolved criteria
     *      after applying all criteria resolvers.
     */
    error UnresolvedOfferCriteria();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error if a consideration item still has unresolved
     *      criteria after applying all criteria resolvers.
     */
    error UnresolvedConsiderationCriteria();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when providing a criteria resolver that refers
     *      to an order with an offer item that has not been supplied.
     */
    error OfferCriteriaResolverOutOfRange();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when providing a criteria resolver that refers
     *      to an order with a consideration item that has not been supplied.
     */
    error ConsiderationCriteriaResolverOutOfRange();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when providing a criteria resolver that refers
     *      to an order with an item that does not expect a criteria to be
     *      resolved.
     */
    error CriteriaNotEnabledForItem();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when providing a criteria resolver that
     *      contains an invalid proof with respect to the given item and
     *      chosen identifier.
     */
    error InvalidProof();
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { ZoneInterface } from "../interfaces/ZoneInterface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
contract TestZone is ZoneInterface {
    function isValidOrder(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        address offerer,
        bytes32 zoneHash
    ) external pure override returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue) {
        orderHash;
        caller;
        offerer;
        if (zoneHash == bytes32(uint256(1))) {
            revert("Revert on zone hash 1");
        } else if (zoneHash == bytes32(uint256(2))) {
            assembly {
                revert(0, 0)
            }
        }
        validOrderMagicValue = zoneHash != bytes32(uint256(3))
            ? ZoneInterface.isValidOrder.selector
            : bytes4(0xffffffff);
    }
    function isValidOrderIncludingExtraData(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        AdvancedOrder calldata order,
        bytes32[] calldata priorOrderHashes,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers
    ) external pure override returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue) {
        orderHash;
        caller;
        order;
        priorOrderHashes;
        criteriaResolvers;
        if (order.extraData.length == 4) {
            revert("Revert on extraData length 4");
        } else if (order.extraData.length == 5) {
            assembly {
                revert(0, 0)
            }
        }
        validOrderMagicValue = order.parameters.zoneHash != bytes32(uint256(3))
            ? ZoneInterface.isValidOrder.selector
            : bytes4(0xffffffff);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
interface ZoneInterface {
    // Called by Consideration whenever extraData is not provided by the caller.
    function isValidOrder(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        address offerer,
        bytes32 zoneHash
    ) external view returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue);
    // Called by Consideration whenever any extraData is provided by the caller.
    function isValidOrderIncludingExtraData(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        AdvancedOrder calldata order,
        bytes32[] calldata priorOrderHashes,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers
    ) external view returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { ZoneInterface } from "../interfaces/ZoneInterface.sol";
import { OrderType } from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import { AdvancedOrder, CriteriaResolver } from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ZoneInteractionErrors
} from "../interfaces/ZoneInteractionErrors.sol";
import { LowLevelHelpers } from "./LowLevelHelpers.sol";
/**
 * @title ZoneInteraction
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ZoneInteraction contains logic related to interacting with zones.
 */
contract ZoneInteraction is ZoneInteractionErrors, LowLevelHelpers {
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to determine if an order has a restricted
     *      order type and, if so, to ensure that either the offerer or the zone
     *      are the fulfiller or that a staticcall to `isValidOrder` on the zone
     *      returns a magic value indicating that the order is currently valid.
     *
     * @param orderHash The hash of the order.
     * @param zoneHash  The hash to provide upon calling the zone.
     * @param orderType The type of the order.
     * @param offerer   The offerer in question.
     * @param zone      The zone in question.
     */
    function _assertRestrictedBasicOrderValidity(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        bytes32 zoneHash,
        OrderType orderType,
        address offerer,
        address zone
    ) internal view {
        // Order type 2-3 require zone or offerer be caller or zone to approve.
        if (
            uint256(orderType) > 1 &&
            msg.sender != zone &&
            msg.sender != offerer
        ) {
            // Perform minimal staticcall to the zone.
            _callIsValidOrder(zone, orderHash, offerer, zoneHash);
        }
    }
    function _callIsValidOrder(
        address zone,
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address offerer,
        bytes32 zoneHash
    ) internal view {
        // Perform minimal staticcall to the zone.
        bool success = _staticcall(
            zone,
            abi.encodeWithSelector(
                ZoneInterface.isValidOrder.selector,
                orderHash,
                msg.sender,
                offerer,
                zoneHash
            )
        );
        // Ensure call was successful and returned the correct magic value.
        _assertIsValidOrderStaticcallSuccess(success, orderHash);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to determine whether an order is a restricted
     *      order and, if so, to ensure that it was either submitted by the
     *      offerer or the zone for the order, or that the zone returns the
     *      expected magic value upon performing a staticcall to `isValidOrder`
     *      or `isValidOrderIncludingExtraData` depending on whether the order
     *      fulfillment specifies extra data or criteria resolvers.
     *
     * @param advancedOrder     The advanced order in question.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific offer or consideration, a token
     *                          identifier, and a proof that the supplied token
     *                          identifier is contained in the order's merkle
     *                          root. Note that a criteria of zero indicates
     *                          that any (transferable) token identifier is
     *                          valid and that no proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param priorOrderHashes  The order hashes of each order supplied prior to
     *                          the current order as part of a "match" variety
     *                          of order fulfillment (e.g. this array will be
     *                          empty for single or "fulfill available").
     * @param orderHash         The hash of the order.
     * @param zoneHash          The hash to provide upon calling the zone.
     * @param orderType         The type of the order.
     * @param offerer           The offerer in question.
     * @param zone              The zone in question.
     */
    function _assertRestrictedAdvancedOrderValidity(
        AdvancedOrder memory advancedOrder,
        CriteriaResolver[] memory criteriaResolvers,
        bytes32[] memory priorOrderHashes,
        bytes32 orderHash,
        bytes32 zoneHash,
        OrderType orderType,
        address offerer,
        address zone
    ) internal view {
        // Order type 2-3 require zone or offerer be caller or zone to approve.
        if (
            uint256(orderType) > 1 &&
            msg.sender != zone &&
            msg.sender != offerer
        ) {
            // If no extraData or criteria resolvers are supplied...
            if (
                advancedOrder.extraData.length == 0 &&
                criteriaResolvers.length == 0
            ) {
                // Perform minimal staticcall to the zone.
                _callIsValidOrder(zone, orderHash, offerer, zoneHash);
            } else {
                // Otherwise, extra data or criteria resolvers were supplied; in
                // that event, perform a more verbose staticcall to the zone.
                bool success = _staticcall(
                    zone,
                    abi.encodeWithSelector(
                        ZoneInterface.isValidOrderIncludingExtraData.selector,
                        orderHash,
                        msg.sender,
                        advancedOrder,
                        priorOrderHashes,
                        criteriaResolvers
                    )
                );
                // Ensure call was successful and returned correct magic value.
                _assertIsValidOrderStaticcallSuccess(success, orderHash);
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to ensure that a staticcall to `isValidOrder`
     *      or `isValidOrderIncludingExtraData` as part of validating a
     *      restricted order that was not submitted by the named offerer or zone
     *      was successful and returned the required magic value.
     *
     * @param success   A boolean indicating the status of the staticcall.
     * @param orderHash The order hash of the order in question.
     */
    function _assertIsValidOrderStaticcallSuccess(
        bool success,
        bytes32 orderHash
    ) internal view {
        // If the call failed...
        if (!success) {
            // Revert and pass reason along if one was returned.
            _revertWithReasonIfOneIsReturned();
            // Otherwise, revert with a generic error message.
            revert InvalidRestrictedOrder(orderHash);
        }
        // Ensure result was extracted and matches isValidOrder magic value.
        if (_doesNotMatchMagic(ZoneInterface.isValidOrder.selector)) {
            revert InvalidRestrictedOrder(orderHash);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title ZoneInteractionErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ZoneInteractionErrors contains errors related to zone interaction.
 */
interface ZoneInteractionErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill an order that specifies
     *      a restricted submitter as its order type when not submitted by
     *      either the offerer or the order's zone or approved as valid by the
     *      zone in question via a staticcall to `isValidOrder`.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash for the invalid restricted order.
     */
    error InvalidRestrictedOrder(bytes32 orderHash);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { ConduitInterface } from "../interfaces/ConduitInterface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OrderType,
    ItemType,
    BasicOrderRouteType
} from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    AdditionalRecipient,
    BasicOrderParameters,
    OfferItem,
    ConsiderationItem,
    SpentItem,
    ReceivedItem
} from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { OrderValidator } from "./OrderValidator.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title BasicOrderFulfiller
 * @author 0age
 * @notice BasicOrderFulfiller contains functionality for fulfilling "basic"
 *         orders with minimal overhead. See documentation for details on what
 *         qualifies as a basic order.
 */
contract BasicOrderFulfiller is OrderValidator {
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) OrderValidator(conduitController) {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to fulfill an order offering an ERC20, ERC721, or
     *      ERC1155 item by supplying Ether (or other native tokens), ERC20
     *      tokens, an ERC721 item, or an ERC1155 item as consideration. Six
     *      permutations are supported: Native token to ERC721, Native token to
     *      ERC1155, ERC20 to ERC721, ERC20 to ERC1155, ERC721 to ERC20, and
     *      ERC1155 to ERC20 (with native tokens supplied as msg.value). For an
     *      order to be eligible for fulfillment via this method, it must
     *      contain a single offer item (though that item may have a greater
     *      amount if the item is not an ERC721). An arbitrary number of
     *      "additional recipients" may also be supplied which will each receive
     *      native tokens or ERC20 items from the fulfiller as consideration.
     *      Refer to the documentation for a more comprehensive summary of how
     *      to utilize this method and what orders are compatible with it.
     *
     * @param parameters Additional information on the fulfilled order. Note
     *                   that the offerer and the fulfiller must first approve
     *                   this contract (or their chosen conduit if indicated)
     *                   before any tokens can be transferred. Also note that
     *                   contract recipients of ERC1155 consideration items must
     *                   implement `onERC1155Received` in order to receive those
     *                   items.
     *
     * @return A boolean indicating whether the order has been fulfilled.
     */
    function _validateAndFulfillBasicOrder(
        BasicOrderParameters calldata parameters
    ) internal returns (bool) {
        // Declare enums for order type & route to extract from basicOrderType.
        BasicOrderRouteType route;
        OrderType orderType;
        // Declare additional recipient item type to derive from the route type.
        ItemType additionalRecipientsItemType;
        // Utilize assembly to extract the order type and the basic order route.
        assembly {
            // Read basicOrderType from calldata.
            let basicOrderType := calldataload(BasicOrder_basicOrderType_cdPtr)
            // Mask all but 2 least-significant bits to derive the order type.
            orderType := and(basicOrderType, 3)
            // Divide basicOrderType by four to derive the route.
            route := shr(2, basicOrderType)
            // If route > 1 additionalRecipient items are ERC20 (1) else Eth (0)
            additionalRecipientsItemType := gt(route, 1)
        }
        {
            // Declare temporary variable for enforcing payable status.
            bool correctPayableStatus;
            // Utilize assembly to compare the route to the callvalue.
            assembly {
                // route 0 and 1 are payable, otherwise route is not payable.
                correctPayableStatus := eq(
                    additionalRecipientsItemType,
                    iszero(callvalue())
                )
            }
            // Revert if msg.value has not been supplied as part of payable
            // routes or has been supplied as part of non-payable routes.
            if (!correctPayableStatus) {
                revert InvalidMsgValue(msg.value);
            }
        }
        // Declare more arguments that will be derived from route and calldata.
        address additionalRecipientsToken;
        ItemType offeredItemType;
        bool offerTypeIsAdditionalRecipientsType;
        // Declare scope for received item type to manage stack pressure.
        {
            ItemType receivedItemType;
            // Utilize assembly to retrieve function arguments and cast types.
            assembly {
                // Check if offered item type == additional recipient item type.
                offerTypeIsAdditionalRecipientsType := gt(route, 3)
                // If route > 3 additionalRecipientsToken is at 0xc4 else 0x24.
                additionalRecipientsToken := calldataload(
                    add(
                        BasicOrder_considerationToken_cdPtr,
                        mul(
                            offerTypeIsAdditionalRecipientsType,
                            BasicOrder_common_params_size
                        )
                    )
                )
                // If route > 2, receivedItemType is route - 2. If route is 2,
                // the receivedItemType is ERC20 (1). Otherwise, it is Eth (0).
                receivedItemType := add(
                    mul(sub(route, 2), gt(route, 2)),
                    eq(route, 2)
                )
                // If route > 3, offeredItemType is ERC20 (1). Route is 2 or 3,
                // offeredItemType = route. Route is 0 or 1, it is route + 2.
                offeredItemType := sub(
                    add(route, mul(iszero(additionalRecipientsItemType), 2)),
                    mul(
                        offerTypeIsAdditionalRecipientsType,
                        add(receivedItemType, 1)
                    )
                )
            }
            // Derive & validate order using parameters and update order status.
            _prepareBasicFulfillmentFromCalldata(
                parameters,
                orderType,
                receivedItemType,
                additionalRecipientsItemType,
                additionalRecipientsToken,
                offeredItemType
            );
        }
        // Declare conduitKey argument used by transfer functions.
        bytes32 conduitKey;
        // Utilize assembly to derive conduit (if relevant) based on route.
        assembly {
            // use offerer conduit for routes 0-3, fulfiller conduit otherwise.
            conduitKey := calldataload(
                add(
                    BasicOrder_offererConduit_cdPtr,
                    mul(offerTypeIsAdditionalRecipientsType, OneWord)
                )
            )
        }
        // Transfer tokens based on the route.
        if (additionalRecipientsItemType == ItemType.NATIVE) {
            // Ensure neither the token nor the identifier parameters are set.
            if (
                (uint160(parameters.considerationToken) |
                    parameters.considerationIdentifier) != 0
            ) {
                revert UnusedItemParameters();
            }
            // Transfer the ERC721 or ERC1155 item, bypassing the accumulator.
            _transferIndividual721Or1155Item(
                offeredItemType,
                parameters.offerToken,
                parameters.offerer,
                msg.sender,
                parameters.offerIdentifier,
                parameters.offerAmount,
                conduitKey
            );
            // Transfer native to recipients, return excess to caller & wrap up.
            _transferEthAndFinalize(
                parameters.considerationAmount,
                parameters.offerer,
                parameters.additionalRecipients
            );
        } else {
            // Initialize an accumulator array. From this point forward, no new
            // memory regions can be safely allocated until the accumulator is
            // no longer being utilized, as the accumulator operates in an
            // open-ended fashion from this memory pointer; existing memory may
            // still be accessed and modified, however.
            bytes memory accumulator = new bytes(AccumulatorDisarmed);
            // Choose transfer method for ERC721 or ERC1155 item based on route.
            if (route == BasicOrderRouteType.ERC20_TO_ERC721) {
                // Transfer ERC721 to caller using offerer's conduit preference.
                _transferERC721(
                    parameters.offerToken,
                    parameters.offerer,
                    msg.sender,
                    parameters.offerIdentifier,
                    parameters.offerAmount,
                    conduitKey,
                    accumulator
                );
            } else if (route == BasicOrderRouteType.ERC20_TO_ERC1155) {
                // Transfer ERC1155 to caller with offerer's conduit preference.
                _transferERC1155(
                    parameters.offerToken,
                    parameters.offerer,
                    msg.sender,
                    parameters.offerIdentifier,
                    parameters.offerAmount,
                    conduitKey,
                    accumulator
                );
            } else if (route == BasicOrderRouteType.ERC721_TO_ERC20) {
                // Transfer ERC721 to offerer using caller's conduit preference.
                _transferERC721(
                    parameters.considerationToken,
                    msg.sender,
                    parameters.offerer,
                    parameters.considerationIdentifier,
                    parameters.considerationAmount,
                    conduitKey,
                    accumulator
                );
            } else {
                // route == BasicOrderRouteType.ERC1155_TO_ERC20
                // Transfer ERC1155 to offerer with caller's conduit preference.
                _transferERC1155(
                    parameters.considerationToken,
                    msg.sender,
                    parameters.offerer,
                    parameters.considerationIdentifier,
                    parameters.considerationAmount,
                    conduitKey,
                    accumulator
                );
            }
            // Transfer ERC20 tokens to all recipients and wrap up.
            _transferERC20AndFinalize(
                parameters.offerer,
                parameters,
                offerTypeIsAdditionalRecipientsType,
                accumulator
            );
            // Trigger any remaining accumulated transfers via call to conduit.
            _triggerIfArmed(accumulator);
        }
        // Clear the reentrancy guard.
        _clearReentrancyGuard();
        return true;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to prepare fulfillment of a basic order with
     *      manual calldata and memory access. This calculates the order hash,
     *      emits an OrderFulfilled event, and asserts basic order validity.
     *      Note that calldata offsets must be validated as this function
     *      accesses constant calldata pointers for dynamic types that match
     *      default ABI encoding, but valid ABI encoding can use arbitrary
     *      offsets. Checking that the offsets were produced by default encoding
     *      will ensure that other functions using Solidity's calldata accessors
     *      (which calculate pointers from the stored offsets) are reading the
     *      same data as the order hash is derived from. Also note that This
     *      function accesses memory directly. It does not clear the expanded
     *      memory regions used, nor does it update the free memory pointer, so
     *      other direct memory access must not assume that unused memory is
     *      empty.
     *
     * @param parameters                   The parameters of the basic order.
     * @param orderType                    The order type.
     * @param receivedItemType             The item type of the initial
     *                                     consideration item on the order.
     * @param additionalRecipientsItemType The item type of any additional
     *                                     consideration item on the order.
     * @param additionalRecipientsToken    The ERC20 token contract address (if
     *                                     applicable) for any additional
     *                                     consideration item on the order.
     * @param offeredItemType              The item type of the offered item on
     *                                     the order.
     */
    function _prepareBasicFulfillmentFromCalldata(
        BasicOrderParameters calldata parameters,
        OrderType orderType,
        ItemType receivedItemType,
        ItemType additionalRecipientsItemType,
        address additionalRecipientsToken,
        ItemType offeredItemType
    ) internal {
        // Ensure this function cannot be triggered during a reentrant call.
        _setReentrancyGuard();
        // Ensure current timestamp falls between order start time and end time.
        _verifyTime(parameters.startTime, parameters.endTime, true);
        // Verify that calldata offsets for all dynamic types were produced by
        // default encoding. This ensures that the constants we use for calldata
        // pointers to dynamic types are the same as those calculated by
        // Solidity using their offsets. Also verify that the basic order type
        // is within range.
        _assertValidBasicOrderParameters();
        // Ensure supplied consideration array length is not less than original.
        _assertConsiderationLengthIsNotLessThanOriginalConsiderationLength(
            parameters.additionalRecipients.length,
            parameters.totalOriginalAdditionalRecipients
        );
        // Declare stack element for the order hash.
        bytes32 orderHash;
        {
            /**
             * First, handle consideration items. Memory Layout:
             *  0x60: final hash of the array of consideration item hashes
             *  0x80-0x160: reused space for EIP712 hashing of each item
             *   - 0x80: ConsiderationItem EIP-712 typehash (constant)
             *   - 0xa0: itemType
             *   - 0xc0: token
             *   - 0xe0: identifier
             *   - 0x100: startAmount
             *   - 0x120: endAmount
             *   - 0x140: recipient
             *  0x160-END_ARR: array of consideration item hashes
             *   - 0x160: primary consideration item EIP712 hash
             *   - 0x180-END_ARR: additional recipient item EIP712 hashes
             *  END_ARR: beginning of data for OrderFulfilled event
             *   - END_ARR + 0x120: length of ReceivedItem array
             *   - END_ARR + 0x140: beginning of data for first ReceivedItem
             * (Note: END_ARR = 0x180 + RECIPIENTS_LENGTH * 0x20)
             */
            // Load consideration item typehash from runtime and place on stack.
            bytes32 typeHash = _CONSIDERATION_ITEM_TYPEHASH;
            // Utilize assembly to enable reuse of memory regions and use
            // constant pointers when possible.
            assembly {
                /*
                 * 1. Calculate the EIP712 ConsiderationItem hash for the
                 * primary consideration item of the basic order.
                 */
                // Write ConsiderationItem type hash and item type to memory.
                mstore(BasicOrder_considerationItem_typeHash_ptr, typeHash)
                mstore(
                    BasicOrder_considerationItem_itemType_ptr,
                    receivedItemType
                )
                // Copy calldata region with (token, identifier, amount) from
                // BasicOrderParameters to ConsiderationItem. The
                // considerationAmount is written to startAmount and endAmount
                // as basic orders do not have dynamic amounts.
                calldatacopy(
                    BasicOrder_considerationItem_token_ptr,
                    BasicOrder_considerationToken_cdPtr,
                    ThreeWords
                )
                // Copy calldata region with considerationAmount and offerer
                // from BasicOrderParameters to endAmount and recipient in
                // ConsiderationItem.
                calldatacopy(
                    BasicOrder_considerationItem_endAmount_ptr,
                    BasicOrder_considerationAmount_cdPtr,
                    TwoWords
                )
                // Calculate EIP712 ConsiderationItem hash and store it in the
                // array of EIP712 consideration hashes.
                mstore(
                    BasicOrder_considerationHashesArray_ptr,
                    keccak256(
                        BasicOrder_considerationItem_typeHash_ptr,
                        EIP712_ConsiderationItem_size
                    )
                )
                /*
                 * 2. Write a ReceivedItem struct for the primary consideration
                 * item to the consideration array in OrderFulfilled.
                 */
                // Get the length of the additional recipients array.
                let totalAdditionalRecipients := calldataload(
                    BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr
                )
                // Calculate pointer to length of OrderFulfilled consideration
                // array.
                let eventConsiderationArrPtr := add(
                    OrderFulfilled_consideration_length_baseOffset,
                    mul(totalAdditionalRecipients, OneWord)
                )
                // Set the length of the consideration array to the number of
                // additional recipients, plus one for the primary consideration
                // item.
                mstore(
                    eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                    add(
                        calldataload(
                            BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr
                        ),
                        1
                    )
                )
                // Overwrite the consideration array pointer so it points to the
                // body of the first element
                eventConsiderationArrPtr := add(
                    eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                    OneWord
                )
                // Set itemType at start of the ReceivedItem memory region.
                mstore(eventConsiderationArrPtr, receivedItemType)
                // Copy calldata region (token, identifier, amount & recipient)
                // from BasicOrderParameters to ReceivedItem memory.
                calldatacopy(
                    add(eventConsiderationArrPtr, Common_token_offset),
                    BasicOrder_considerationToken_cdPtr,
                    FourWords
                )
                /*
                 * 3. Calculate EIP712 ConsiderationItem hashes for original
                 * additional recipients and add a ReceivedItem for each to the
                 * consideration array in the OrderFulfilled event. The original
                 * additional recipients are all the considerations signed by
                 * the offerer aside from the primary consideration of the
                 * order. Uses memory region from 0x80-0x160 as a buffer for
                 * calculating EIP712 ConsiderationItem hashes.
                 */
                // Put pointer to consideration hashes array on the stack.
                // This will be updated as each additional recipient is hashed
                let
                    considerationHashesPtr
                := BasicOrder_considerationHashesArray_ptr
                // Write item type, token, & identifier for additional recipient
                // to memory region for hashing EIP712 ConsiderationItem; these
                // values will be reused for each recipient.
                mstore(
                    BasicOrder_considerationItem_itemType_ptr,
                    additionalRecipientsItemType
                )
                mstore(
                    BasicOrder_considerationItem_token_ptr,
                    additionalRecipientsToken
                )
                mstore(BasicOrder_considerationItem_identifier_ptr, 0)
                // Read length of the additionalRecipients array from calldata
                // and iterate.
                totalAdditionalRecipients := calldataload(
                    BasicOrder_totalOriginalAdditionalRecipients_cdPtr
                )
                let i := 0
                // prettier-ignore
                for {} lt(i, totalAdditionalRecipients) {
                    i := add(i, 1)
                } {
                    /*
                     * Calculate EIP712 ConsiderationItem hash for recipient.
                     */
                    // Retrieve calldata pointer for additional recipient.
                    let additionalRecipientCdPtr := add(
                        BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_data_cdPtr,
                        mul(AdditionalRecipients_size, i)
                    )
                    // Copy startAmount from calldata to the ConsiderationItem
                    // struct.
                    calldatacopy(
                        BasicOrder_considerationItem_startAmount_ptr,
                        additionalRecipientCdPtr,
                        OneWord
                    )
                    // Copy endAmount and recipient from calldata to the
                    // ConsiderationItem struct.
                    calldatacopy(
                        BasicOrder_considerationItem_endAmount_ptr,
                        additionalRecipientCdPtr,
                        AdditionalRecipients_size
                    )
                    // Add 1 word to the pointer as part of each loop to reduce
                    // operations needed to get local offset into the array.
                    considerationHashesPtr := add(
                        considerationHashesPtr,
                        OneWord
                    )
                    // Calculate EIP712 ConsiderationItem hash and store it in
                    // the array of consideration hashes.
                    mstore(
                        considerationHashesPtr,
                        keccak256(
                            BasicOrder_considerationItem_typeHash_ptr,
                            EIP712_ConsiderationItem_size
                        )
                    )
                    /*
                     * Write ReceivedItem to OrderFulfilled data.
                     */
                    // At this point, eventConsiderationArrPtr points to the
                    // beginning of the ReceivedItem struct of the previous
                    // element in the array. Increase it by the size of the
                    // struct to arrive at the pointer for the current element.
                    eventConsiderationArrPtr := add(
                        eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                        ReceivedItem_size
                    )
                    // Write itemType to the ReceivedItem struct.
                    mstore(
                        eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                        additionalRecipientsItemType
                    )
                    // Write token to the next word of the ReceivedItem struct.
                    mstore(
                        add(eventConsiderationArrPtr, OneWord),
                        additionalRecipientsToken
                    )
                    // Copy endAmount & recipient words to ReceivedItem struct.
                    calldatacopy(
                        add(
                            eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                            ReceivedItem_amount_offset
                        ),
                        additionalRecipientCdPtr,
                        TwoWords
                    )
                }
                /*
                 * 4. Hash packed array of ConsiderationItem EIP712 hashes:
                 *   `keccak256(abi.encodePacked(receivedItemHashes))`
                 * Note that it is set at 0x60 — all other memory begins at
                 * 0x80. 0x60 is the "zero slot" and will be restored at the end
                 * of the assembly section and before required by the compiler.
                 */
                mstore(
                    receivedItemsHash_ptr,
                    keccak256(
                        BasicOrder_considerationHashesArray_ptr,
                        mul(add(totalAdditionalRecipients, 1), OneWord)
                    )
                )
                /*
                 * 5. Add a ReceivedItem for each tip to the consideration array
                 * in the OrderFulfilled event. The tips are all the
                 * consideration items that were not signed by the offerer and
                 * were provided by the fulfiller.
                 */
                // Overwrite length to length of the additionalRecipients array.
                totalAdditionalRecipients := calldataload(
                    BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr
                )
                // prettier-ignore
                for {} lt(i, totalAdditionalRecipients) {
                    i := add(i, 1)
                } {
                    // Retrieve calldata pointer for additional recipient.
                    let additionalRecipientCdPtr := add(
                        BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_data_cdPtr,
                        mul(AdditionalRecipients_size, i)
                    )
                    // At this point, eventConsiderationArrPtr points to the
                    // beginning of the ReceivedItem struct of the previous
                    // element in the array. Increase it by the size of the
                    // struct to arrive at the pointer for the current element.
                    eventConsiderationArrPtr := add(
                        eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                        ReceivedItem_size
                    )
                    // Write itemType to the ReceivedItem struct.
                    mstore(
                        eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                        additionalRecipientsItemType
                    )
                    // Write token to the next word of the ReceivedItem struct.
                    mstore(
                        add(eventConsiderationArrPtr, OneWord),
                        additionalRecipientsToken
                    )
                    // Copy endAmount & recipient words to ReceivedItem struct.
                    calldatacopy(
                        add(
                            eventConsiderationArrPtr,
                            ReceivedItem_amount_offset
                        ),
                        additionalRecipientCdPtr,
                        TwoWords
                    )
                }
            }
        }
        {
            /**
             * Next, handle offered items. Memory Layout:
             *  EIP712 data for OfferItem
             *   - 0x80:  OfferItem EIP-712 typehash (constant)
             *   - 0xa0:  itemType
             *   - 0xc0:  token
             *   - 0xe0:  identifier (reused for offeredItemsHash)
             *   - 0x100: startAmount
             *   - 0x120: endAmount
             */
            // Place offer item typehash on the stack.
            bytes32 typeHash = _OFFER_ITEM_TYPEHASH;
            // Utilize assembly to enable reuse of memory regions when possible.
            assembly {
                /*
                 * 1. Calculate OfferItem EIP712 hash
                 */
                // Write the OfferItem typeHash to memory.
                mstore(BasicOrder_offerItem_typeHash_ptr, typeHash)
                // Write the OfferItem item type to memory.
                mstore(BasicOrder_offerItem_itemType_ptr, offeredItemType)
                // Copy calldata region with (offerToken, offerIdentifier,
                // offerAmount) from OrderParameters to (token, identifier,
                // startAmount) in OfferItem struct. The offerAmount is written
                // to startAmount and endAmount as basic orders do not have
                // dynamic amounts.
                calldatacopy(
                    BasicOrder_offerItem_token_ptr,
                    BasicOrder_offerToken_cdPtr,
                    ThreeWords
                )
                // Copy offerAmount from calldata to endAmount in OfferItem
                // struct.
                calldatacopy(
                    BasicOrder_offerItem_endAmount_ptr,
                    BasicOrder_offerAmount_cdPtr,
                    OneWord
                )
                // Compute EIP712 OfferItem hash, write result to scratch space:
                //   `keccak256(abi.encode(offeredItem))`
                mstore(
                    0,
                    keccak256(
                        BasicOrder_offerItem_typeHash_ptr,
                        EIP712_OfferItem_size
                    )
                )
                /*
                 * 2. Calculate hash of array of EIP712 hashes and write the
                 * result to the corresponding OfferItem struct:
                 *   `keccak256(abi.encodePacked(offerItemHashes))`
                 */
                mstore(BasicOrder_order_offerHashes_ptr, keccak256(0, OneWord))
                /*
                 * 3. Write SpentItem to offer array in OrderFulfilled event.
                 */
                let eventConsiderationArrPtr := add(
                    OrderFulfilled_offer_length_baseOffset,
                    mul(
                        calldataload(
                            BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr
                        ),
                        OneWord
                    )
                )
                // Set a length of 1 for the offer array.
                mstore(eventConsiderationArrPtr, 1)
                // Write itemType to the SpentItem struct.
                mstore(add(eventConsiderationArrPtr, OneWord), offeredItemType)
                // Copy calldata region with (offerToken, offerIdentifier,
                // offerAmount) from OrderParameters to (token, identifier,
                // amount) in SpentItem struct.
                calldatacopy(
                    add(eventConsiderationArrPtr, AdditionalRecipients_size),
                    BasicOrder_offerToken_cdPtr,
                    ThreeWords
                )
            }
        }
        {
            /**
             * Once consideration items and offer items have been handled,
             * derive the final order hash. Memory Layout:
             *  0x80-0x1c0: EIP712 data for order
             *   - 0x80:   Order EIP-712 typehash (constant)
             *   - 0xa0:   orderParameters.offerer
             *   - 0xc0:   orderParameters.zone
             *   - 0xe0:   keccak256(abi.encodePacked(offerHashes))
             *   - 0x100:  keccak256(abi.encodePacked(considerationHashes))
             *   - 0x120:  orderParameters.basicOrderType (% 4 = orderType)
             *   - 0x140:  orderParameters.startTime
             *   - 0x160:  orderParameters.endTime
             *   - 0x180:  orderParameters.zoneHash
             *   - 0x1a0:  orderParameters.salt
             *   - 0x1c0:  orderParameters.conduitKey
             *   - 0x1e0:  _counters[orderParameters.offerer] (from storage)
             */
            // Read the offerer from calldata and place on the stack.
            address offerer;
            assembly {
                offerer := calldataload(BasicOrder_offerer_cdPtr)
            }
            // Read offerer's current counter from storage and place on stack.
            uint256 counter = _getCounter(offerer);
            // Load order typehash from runtime code and place on stack.
            bytes32 typeHash = _ORDER_TYPEHASH;
            assembly {
                // Set the OrderItem typeHash in memory.
                mstore(BasicOrder_order_typeHash_ptr, typeHash)
                // Copy offerer and zone from OrderParameters in calldata to the
                // Order struct.
                calldatacopy(
                    BasicOrder_order_offerer_ptr,
                    BasicOrder_offerer_cdPtr,
                    TwoWords
                )
                // Copy receivedItemsHash from zero slot to the Order struct.
                mstore(
                    BasicOrder_order_considerationHashes_ptr,
                    mload(receivedItemsHash_ptr)
                )
                // Write the supplied orderType to the Order struct.
                mstore(BasicOrder_order_orderType_ptr, orderType)
                // Copy startTime, endTime, zoneHash, salt & conduit from
                // calldata to the Order struct.
                calldatacopy(
                    BasicOrder_order_startTime_ptr,
                    BasicOrder_startTime_cdPtr,
                    FiveWords
                )
                // Write offerer's counter, retrieved from storage, to struct.
                mstore(BasicOrder_order_counter_ptr, counter)
                // Compute the EIP712 Order hash.
                orderHash := keccak256(
                    BasicOrder_order_typeHash_ptr,
                    EIP712_Order_size
                )
            }
        }
        assembly {
            /**
             * After the order hash has been derived, emit OrderFulfilled event:
             *   event OrderFulfilled(
             *     bytes32 orderHash,
             *     address indexed offerer,
             *     address indexed zone,
             *     address fulfiller,
             *     SpentItem[] offer,
             *       > (itemType, token, id, amount)
             *     ReceivedItem[] consideration
             *       > (itemType, token, id, amount, recipient)
             *   )
             * topic0 - OrderFulfilled event signature
             * topic1 - offerer
             * topic2 - zone
             * data:
             *  - 0x00: orderHash
             *  - 0x20: fulfiller
             *  - 0x40: offer arr ptr (0x80)
             *  - 0x60: consideration arr ptr (0x120)
             *  - 0x80: offer arr len (1)
             *  - 0xa0: offer.itemType
             *  - 0xc0: offer.token
             *  - 0xe0: offer.identifier
             *  - 0x100: offer.amount
             *  - 0x120: 1 + recipients.length
             *  - 0x140: recipient 0
             */
            // Derive pointer to start of OrderFulfilled event data
            let eventDataPtr := add(
                OrderFulfilled_baseOffset,
                mul(
                    calldataload(BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr),
                    OneWord
                )
            )
            // Write the order hash to the head of the event's data region.
            mstore(eventDataPtr, orderHash)
            // Write the fulfiller (i.e. the caller) next for receiver argument.
            mstore(add(eventDataPtr, OrderFulfilled_fulfiller_offset), caller())
            // Write the SpentItem and ReceivedItem array offsets (constants).
            mstore(
                // SpentItem array offset
                add(eventDataPtr, OrderFulfilled_offer_head_offset),
                OrderFulfilled_offer_body_offset
            )
            mstore(
                // ReceivedItem array offset
                add(eventDataPtr, OrderFulfilled_consideration_head_offset),
                OrderFulfilled_consideration_body_offset
            )
            // Derive total data size including SpentItem and ReceivedItem data.
            // SpentItem portion is already included in the baseSize constant,
            // as there can only be one element in the array.
            let dataSize := add(
                OrderFulfilled_baseSize,
                mul(
                    calldataload(BasicOrder_additionalRecipients_length_cdPtr),
                    ReceivedItem_size
                )
            )
            // Emit OrderFulfilled log with three topics (the event signature
            // as well as the two indexed arguments, the offerer and the zone).
            log3(
                // Supply the pointer for event data in memory.
                eventDataPtr,
                // Supply the size of event data in memory.
                dataSize,
                // Supply the OrderFulfilled event signature.
                OrderFulfilled_selector,
                // Supply the first topic (the offerer).
                calldataload(BasicOrder_offerer_cdPtr),
                // Supply the second topic (the zone).
                calldataload(BasicOrder_zone_cdPtr)
            )
            // Restore the zero slot.
            mstore(ZeroSlot, 0)
        }
        // Determine whether order is restricted and, if so, that it is valid.
        _assertRestrictedBasicOrderValidity(
            orderHash,
            parameters.zoneHash,
            orderType,
            parameters.offerer,
            parameters.zone
        );
        // Verify and update the status of the derived order.
        _validateBasicOrderAndUpdateStatus(
            orderHash,
            parameters.offerer,
            parameters.signature
        );
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer Ether (or other native tokens) to a
     *      given recipient as part of basic order fulfillment. Note that
     *      conduits are not utilized for native tokens as the transferred
     *      amount must be provided as msg.value.
     *
     * @param amount               The amount to transfer.
     * @param to                   The recipient of the native token transfer.
     * @param additionalRecipients The additional recipients of the order.
     */
    function _transferEthAndFinalize(
        uint256 amount,
        address payable to,
        AdditionalRecipient[] calldata additionalRecipients
    ) internal {
        // Put ether value supplied by the caller on the stack.
        uint256 etherRemaining = msg.value;
        // Retrieve total number of additional recipients and place on stack.
        uint256 totalAdditionalRecipients = additionalRecipients.length;
        // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Iterate over each additional recipient.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalAdditionalRecipients; ++i) {
                // Retrieve the additional recipient.
                AdditionalRecipient calldata additionalRecipient = (
                    additionalRecipients[i]
                );
                // Read ether amount to transfer to recipient & place on stack.
                uint256 additionalRecipientAmount = additionalRecipient.amount;
                // Ensure that sufficient Ether is available.
                if (additionalRecipientAmount > etherRemaining) {
                    revert InsufficientEtherSupplied();
                }
                // Transfer Ether to the additional recipient.
                _transferEth(
                    additionalRecipient.recipient,
                    additionalRecipientAmount
                );
                // Reduce ether value available. Skip underflow check as
                // subtracted value is confirmed above as less than remaining.
                etherRemaining -= additionalRecipientAmount;
            }
        }
        // Ensure that sufficient Ether is still available.
        if (amount > etherRemaining) {
            revert InsufficientEtherSupplied();
        }
        // Transfer Ether to the offerer.
        _transferEth(to, amount);
        // If any Ether remains after transfers, return it to the caller.
        if (etherRemaining > amount) {
            // Skip underflow check as etherRemaining > amount.
            unchecked {
                // Transfer remaining Ether to the caller.
                _transferEth(payable(msg.sender), etherRemaining - amount);
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC20 tokens to a given recipient as
     *      part of basic order fulfillment.
     *
     * @param offerer     The offerer of the fulfiller order.
     * @param parameters  The basic order parameters.
     * @param fromOfferer A boolean indicating whether to decrement amount from
     *                    the offered amount.
     * @param accumulator An open-ended array that collects transfers to execute
     *                    against a given conduit in a single call.
     */
    function _transferERC20AndFinalize(
        address offerer,
        BasicOrderParameters calldata parameters,
        bool fromOfferer,
        bytes memory accumulator
    ) internal {
        // Declare from and to variables determined by fromOfferer value.
        address from;
        address to;
        // Declare token and amount variables determined by fromOfferer value.
        address token;
        uint256 amount;
        // Declare and check identifier variable within an isolated scope.
        {
            // Declare identifier variable determined by fromOfferer value.
            uint256 identifier;
            // Set ERC20 token transfer variables based on fromOfferer boolean.
            if (fromOfferer) {
                // Use offerer as from value and msg.sender as to value.
                from = offerer;
                to = msg.sender;
                // Use offer token and related values if token is from offerer.
                token = parameters.offerToken;
                identifier = parameters.offerIdentifier;
                amount = parameters.offerAmount;
            } else {
                // Use msg.sender as from value and offerer as to value.
                from = msg.sender;
                to = offerer;
                // Otherwise, use consideration token and related values.
                token = parameters.considerationToken;
                identifier = parameters.considerationIdentifier;
                amount = parameters.considerationAmount;
            }
            // Ensure that no identifier is supplied.
            if (identifier != 0) {
                revert UnusedItemParameters();
            }
        }
        // Determine the appropriate conduit to utilize.
        bytes32 conduitKey;
        // Utilize assembly to derive conduit (if relevant) based on route.
        assembly {
            // Use offerer conduit if fromOfferer, fulfiller conduit otherwise.
            conduitKey := calldataload(
                sub(
                    BasicOrder_fulfillerConduit_cdPtr,
                    mul(fromOfferer, OneWord)
                )
            )
        }
        // Retrieve total number of additional recipients and place on stack.
        uint256 totalAdditionalRecipients = (
            parameters.additionalRecipients.length
        );
        // Iterate over each additional recipient.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalAdditionalRecipients; ) {
            // Retrieve the additional recipient.
            AdditionalRecipient calldata additionalRecipient = (
                parameters.additionalRecipients[i]
            );
            uint256 additionalRecipientAmount = additionalRecipient.amount;
            // Decrement the amount to transfer to fulfiller if indicated.
            if (fromOfferer) {
                amount -= additionalRecipientAmount;
            }
            // Transfer ERC20 tokens to additional recipient given approval.
            _transferERC20(
                token,
                from,
                additionalRecipient.recipient,
                additionalRecipientAmount,
                conduitKey,
                accumulator
            );
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Transfer ERC20 token amount (from account must have proper approval).
        _transferERC20(token, from, to, amount, conduitKey, accumulator);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { OrderType } from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OrderParameters,
    Order,
    AdvancedOrder,
    OrderComponents,
    OrderStatus,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
import { Executor } from "./Executor.sol";
import { ZoneInteraction } from "./ZoneInteraction.sol";
/**
 * @title OrderValidator
 * @author 0age
 * @notice OrderValidator contains functionality related to validating orders
 *         and updating their status.
 */
contract OrderValidator is Executor, ZoneInteraction {
    // Track status of each order (validated, cancelled, and fraction filled).
    mapping(bytes32 => OrderStatus) private _orderStatus;
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) Executor(conduitController) {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to verify and update the status of a basic order.
     *
     * @param orderHash The hash of the order.
     * @param offerer   The offerer of the order.
     * @param signature A signature from the offerer indicating that the order
     *                  has been approved.
     */
    function _validateBasicOrderAndUpdateStatus(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address offerer,
        bytes memory signature
    ) internal {
        // Retrieve the order status for the given order hash.
        OrderStatus storage orderStatus = _orderStatus[orderHash];
        // Ensure order is fillable and is not cancelled.
        _verifyOrderStatus(
            orderHash,
            orderStatus,
            true, // Only allow unused orders when fulfilling basic orders.
            true // Signifies to revert if the order is invalid.
        );
        // If the order is not already validated, verify the supplied signature.
        if (!orderStatus.isValidated) {
            _verifySignature(offerer, orderHash, signature);
        }
        // Update order status as fully filled, packing struct values.
        orderStatus.isValidated = true;
        orderStatus.isCancelled = false;
        orderStatus.numerator = 1;
        orderStatus.denominator = 1;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to validate an order, determine what portion to
     *      fill, and update its status. The desired fill amount is supplied as
     *      a fraction, as is the returned amount to fill.
     *
     * @param advancedOrder     The order to fulfill as well as the fraction to
     *                          fill. Note that all offer and consideration
     *                          amounts must divide with no remainder in order
     *                          for a partial fill to be valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific offer or consideration, a token
     *                          identifier, and a proof that the supplied token
     *                          identifier is contained in the order's merkle
     *                          root. Note that a criteria of zero indicates
     *                          that any (transferable) token identifier is
     *                          valid and that no proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param revertOnInvalid   A boolean indicating whether to revert if the
     *                          order is invalid due to the time or status.
     * @param priorOrderHashes  The order hashes of each order supplied prior to
     *                          the current order as part of a "match" variety
     *                          of order fulfillment (e.g. this array will be
     *                          empty for single or "fulfill available").
     *
     * @return orderHash      The order hash.
     * @return newNumerator   A value indicating the portion of the order that
     *                        will be filled.
     * @return newDenominator A value indicating the total size of the order.
     */
    function _validateOrderAndUpdateStatus(
        AdvancedOrder memory advancedOrder,
        CriteriaResolver[] memory criteriaResolvers,
        bool revertOnInvalid,
        bytes32[] memory priorOrderHashes
    )
        internal
        returns (
            bytes32 orderHash,
            uint256 newNumerator,
            uint256 newDenominator
        )
    {
        // Retrieve the parameters for the order.
        OrderParameters memory orderParameters = advancedOrder.parameters;
        // Ensure current timestamp falls between order start time and end time.
        if (
            !_verifyTime(
                orderParameters.startTime,
                orderParameters.endTime,
                revertOnInvalid
            )
        ) {
            // Assuming an invalid time and no revert, return zeroed out values.
            return (bytes32(0), 0, 0);
        }
        // Read numerator and denominator from memory and place on the stack.
        uint256 numerator = uint256(advancedOrder.numerator);
        uint256 denominator = uint256(advancedOrder.denominator);
        // Ensure that the supplied numerator and denominator are valid.
        if (numerator > denominator || numerator == 0) {
            revert BadFraction();
        }
        // If attempting partial fill (n < d) check order type & ensure support.
        if (
            numerator < denominator &&
            _doesNotSupportPartialFills(orderParameters.orderType)
        ) {
            // Revert if partial fill was attempted on an unsupported order.
            revert PartialFillsNotEnabledForOrder();
        }
        // Retrieve current counter & use it w/ parameters to derive order hash.
        orderHash = _assertConsiderationLengthAndGetOrderHash(orderParameters);
        // Ensure restricted orders have a valid submitter or pass a zone check.
        _assertRestrictedAdvancedOrderValidity(
            advancedOrder,
            criteriaResolvers,
            priorOrderHashes,
            orderHash,
            orderParameters.zoneHash,
            orderParameters.orderType,
            orderParameters.offerer,
            orderParameters.zone
        );
        // Retrieve the order status using the derived order hash.
        OrderStatus storage orderStatus = _orderStatus[orderHash];
        // Ensure order is fillable and is not cancelled.
        if (
            !_verifyOrderStatus(
                orderHash,
                orderStatus,
                false, // Allow partially used orders to be filled.
                revertOnInvalid
            )
        ) {
            // Assuming an invalid order status and no revert, return zero fill.
            return (orderHash, 0, 0);
        }
        // If the order is not already validated, verify the supplied signature.
        if (!orderStatus.isValidated) {
            _verifySignature(
                orderParameters.offerer,
                orderHash,
                advancedOrder.signature
            );
        }
        // Read filled amount as numerator and denominator and put on the stack.
        uint256 filledNumerator = orderStatus.numerator;
        uint256 filledDenominator = orderStatus.denominator;
        // If order (orderStatus) currently has a non-zero denominator it is
        // partially filled.
        if (filledDenominator != 0) {
            // If denominator of 1 supplied, fill all remaining amount on order.
            if (denominator == 1) {
                // Scale numerator & denominator to match current denominator.
                numerator = filledDenominator;
                denominator = filledDenominator;
            }
            // Otherwise, if supplied denominator differs from current one...
            else if (filledDenominator != denominator) {
                // scale current numerator by the supplied denominator, then...
                filledNumerator *= denominator;
                // the supplied numerator & denominator by current denominator.
                numerator *= filledDenominator;
                denominator *= filledDenominator;
            }
            // Once adjusted, if current+supplied numerator exceeds denominator:
            if (filledNumerator + numerator > denominator) {
                // Skip underflow check: denominator >= orderStatus.numerator
                unchecked {
                    // Reduce current numerator so it + supplied = denominator.
                    numerator = denominator - filledNumerator;
                }
            }
            // Increment the filled numerator by the new numerator.
            filledNumerator += numerator;
            // Use assembly to ensure fractional amounts are below max uint120.
            assembly {
                // Check filledNumerator and denominator for uint120 overflow.
                if or(
                    gt(filledNumerator, MaxUint120),
                    gt(denominator, MaxUint120)
                ) {
                    // Derive greatest common divisor using euclidean algorithm.
                    function gcd(_a, _b) -> out {
                        for {
                        } _b {
                        } {
                            let _c := _b
                            _b := mod(_a, _c)
                            _a := _c
                        }
                        out := _a
                    }
                    let scaleDown := gcd(
                        numerator,
                        gcd(filledNumerator, denominator)
                    )
                    // Ensure that the divisor is at least one.
                    let safeScaleDown := add(scaleDown, iszero(scaleDown))
                    // Scale all fractional values down by gcd.
                    numerator := div(numerator, safeScaleDown)
                    filledNumerator := div(filledNumerator, safeScaleDown)
                    denominator := div(denominator, safeScaleDown)
                    // Perform the overflow check a second time.
                    if or(
                        gt(filledNumerator, MaxUint120),
                        gt(denominator, MaxUint120)
                    ) {
                        // Store the Panic error signature.
                        mstore(0, Panic_error_signature)
                        // Set arithmetic (0x11) panic code as initial argument.
                        mstore(Panic_error_offset, Panic_arithmetic)
                        // Return, supplying Panic signature & arithmetic code.
                        revert(0, Panic_error_length)
                    }
                }
            }
            // Skip overflow check: checked above unless numerator is reduced.
            unchecked {
                // Update order status and fill amount, packing struct values.
                orderStatus.isValidated = true;
                orderStatus.isCancelled = false;
                orderStatus.numerator = uint120(filledNumerator);
                orderStatus.denominator = uint120(denominator);
            }
        } else {
            // Update order status and fill amount, packing struct values.
            orderStatus.isValidated = true;
            orderStatus.isCancelled = false;
            orderStatus.numerator = uint120(numerator);
            orderStatus.denominator = uint120(denominator);
        }
        // Return order hash, a modified numerator, and a modified denominator.
        return (orderHash, numerator, denominator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to cancel an arbitrary number of orders. Note that
     *      only the offerer or the zone of a given order may cancel it. Callers
     *      should ensure that the intended order was cancelled by calling
     *      `getOrderStatus` and confirming that `isCancelled` returns `true`.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to cancel.
     *
     * @return cancelled A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders were
     *                   successfully cancelled.
     */
    function _cancel(OrderComponents[] calldata orders)
        internal
        returns (bool cancelled)
    {
        // Ensure that the reentrancy guard is not currently set.
        _assertNonReentrant();
        // Declare variables outside of the loop.
        OrderStatus storage orderStatus;
        address offerer;
        address zone;
        // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Read length of the orders array from memory and place on stack.
            uint256 totalOrders = orders.length;
            // Iterate over each order.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOrders; ) {
                // Retrieve the order.
                OrderComponents calldata order = orders[i];
                offerer = order.offerer;
                zone = order.zone;
                // Ensure caller is either offerer or zone of the order.
                if (msg.sender != offerer && msg.sender != zone) {
                    revert InvalidCanceller();
                }
                // Derive order hash using the order parameters and the counter.
                bytes32 orderHash = _deriveOrderHash(
                    OrderParameters(
                        offerer,
                        zone,
                        order.offer,
                        order.consideration,
                        order.orderType,
                        order.startTime,
                        order.endTime,
                        order.zoneHash,
                        order.salt,
                        order.conduitKey,
                        order.consideration.length
                    ),
                    order.counter
                );
                // Retrieve the order status using the derived order hash.
                orderStatus = _orderStatus[orderHash];
                // Update the order status as not valid and cancelled.
                orderStatus.isValidated = false;
                orderStatus.isCancelled = true;
                // Emit an event signifying that the order has been cancelled.
                emit OrderCancelled(orderHash, offerer, zone);
                // Increment counter inside body of loop for gas efficiency.
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Return a boolean indicating that orders were successfully cancelled.
        cancelled = true;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to validate an arbitrary number of orders, thereby
     *      registering their signatures as valid and allowing the fulfiller to
     *      skip signature verification on fulfillment. Note that validated
     *      orders may still be unfulfillable due to invalid item amounts or
     *      other factors; callers should determine whether validated orders are
     *      fulfillable by simulating the fulfillment call prior to execution.
     *      Also note that anyone can validate a signed order, but only the
     *      offerer can validate an order without supplying a signature.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to validate.
     *
     * @return validated A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders were
     *                   successfully validated.
     */
    function _validate(Order[] calldata orders)
        internal
        returns (bool validated)
    {
        // Ensure that the reentrancy guard is not currently set.
        _assertNonReentrant();
        // Declare variables outside of the loop.
        OrderStatus storage orderStatus;
        bytes32 orderHash;
        address offerer;
        // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Read length of the orders array from memory and place on stack.
            uint256 totalOrders = orders.length;
            // Iterate over each order.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOrders; ) {
                // Retrieve the order.
                Order calldata order = orders[i];
                // Retrieve the order parameters.
                OrderParameters calldata orderParameters = order.parameters;
                // Move offerer from memory to the stack.
                offerer = orderParameters.offerer;
                // Get current counter & use it w/ params to derive order hash.
                orderHash = _assertConsiderationLengthAndGetOrderHash(
                    orderParameters
                );
                // Retrieve the order status using the derived order hash.
                orderStatus = _orderStatus[orderHash];
                // Ensure order is fillable and retrieve the filled amount.
                _verifyOrderStatus(
                    orderHash,
                    orderStatus,
                    false, // Signifies that partially filled orders are valid.
                    true // Signifies to revert if the order is invalid.
                );
                // If the order has not already been validated...
                if (!orderStatus.isValidated) {
                    // Verify the supplied signature.
                    _verifySignature(offerer, orderHash, order.signature);
                    // Update order status to mark the order as valid.
                    orderStatus.isValidated = true;
                    // Emit an event signifying the order has been validated.
                    emit OrderValidated(
                        orderHash,
                        offerer,
                        orderParameters.zone
                    );
                }
                // Increment counter inside body of the loop for gas efficiency.
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Return a boolean indicating that orders were successfully validated.
        validated = true;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to retrieve the status of a given order by
     *      hash, including whether the order has been cancelled or validated
     *      and the fraction of the order that has been filled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash in question.
     *
     * @return isValidated A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been validated (i.e. previously approved or
     *                     partially filled).
     * @return isCancelled A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been cancelled.
     * @return totalFilled The total portion of the order that has been filled
     *                     (i.e. the "numerator").
     * @return totalSize   The total size of the order that is either filled or
     *                     unfilled (i.e. the "denominator").
     */
    function _getOrderStatus(bytes32 orderHash)
        internal
        view
        returns (
            bool isValidated,
            bool isCancelled,
            uint256 totalFilled,
            uint256 totalSize
        )
    {
        // Retrieve the order status using the order hash.
        OrderStatus storage orderStatus = _orderStatus[orderHash];
        // Return the fields on the order status.
        return (
            orderStatus.isValidated,
            orderStatus.isCancelled,
            orderStatus.numerator,
            orderStatus.denominator
        );
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to check whether a given order type indicates
     *      that partial fills are not supported (e.g. only "full fills" are
     *      allowed for the order in question).
     *
     * @param orderType The order type in question.
     *
     * @return isFullOrder A boolean indicating whether the order type only
     *                     supports full fills.
     */
    function _doesNotSupportPartialFills(OrderType orderType)
        internal
        pure
        returns (bool isFullOrder)
    {
        // The "full" order types are even, while "partial" order types are odd.
        // Bitwise and by 1 is equivalent to modulo by 2, but 2 gas cheaper.
        assembly {
            // Equivalent to `uint256(orderType) & 1 == 0`.
            isFullOrder := iszero(and(orderType, 1))
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { ItemType } from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OfferItem,
    ConsiderationItem,
    SpentItem,
    ReceivedItem,
    OrderParameters,
    Order,
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { BasicOrderFulfiller } from "./BasicOrderFulfiller.sol";
import { CriteriaResolution } from "./CriteriaResolution.sol";
import { AmountDeriver } from "./AmountDeriver.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title OrderFulfiller
 * @author 0age
 * @notice OrderFulfiller contains logic related to order fulfillment where a
 *         single order is being fulfilled and where basic order fulfillment is
 *         not available as an option.
 */
contract OrderFulfiller is
    BasicOrderFulfiller,
    CriteriaResolution,
    AmountDeriver
{
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController)
        BasicOrderFulfiller(conduitController)
    {}
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to validate an order and update its status, adjust
     *      prices based on current time, apply criteria resolvers, determine
     *      what portion to fill, and transfer relevant tokens.
     *
     * @param advancedOrder       The order to fulfill as well as the fraction
     *                            to fill. Note that all offer and consideration
     *                            components must divide with no remainder for
     *                            the partial fill to be valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers   An array where each element contains a
     *                            reference to a specific offer or
     *                            consideration, a token identifier, and a proof
     *                            that the supplied token identifier is
     *                            contained in the order's merkle root. Note
     *                            that a criteria of zero indicates that any
     *                            (transferable) token identifier is valid and
     *                            that no proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Consideration.
     * @param recipient           The intended recipient for all received items.
     *
     * @return A boolean indicating whether the order has been fulfilled.
     */
    function _validateAndFulfillAdvancedOrder(
        AdvancedOrder memory advancedOrder,
        CriteriaResolver[] memory criteriaResolvers,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    ) internal returns (bool) {
        // Ensure this function cannot be triggered during a reentrant call.
        _setReentrancyGuard();
        // Declare empty bytes32 array (unused, will remain empty).
        bytes32[] memory priorOrderHashes;
        // Validate order, update status, and determine fraction to fill.
        (
            bytes32 orderHash,
            uint256 fillNumerator,
            uint256 fillDenominator
        ) = _validateOrderAndUpdateStatus(
                advancedOrder,
                criteriaResolvers,
                true,
                priorOrderHashes
            );
        // Create an array with length 1 containing the order.
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders = new AdvancedOrder[](1);
        // Populate the order as the first and only element of the new array.
        advancedOrders[0] = advancedOrder;
        // Apply criteria resolvers using generated orders and details arrays.
        _applyCriteriaResolvers(advancedOrders, criteriaResolvers);
        // Retrieve the order parameters after applying criteria resolvers.
        OrderParameters memory orderParameters = advancedOrders[0].parameters;
        // Perform each item transfer with the appropriate fractional amount.
        _applyFractionsAndTransferEach(
            orderParameters,
            fillNumerator,
            fillDenominator,
            fulfillerConduitKey,
            recipient
        );
        // Emit an event signifying that the order has been fulfilled.
        _emitOrderFulfilledEvent(
            orderHash,
            orderParameters.offerer,
            orderParameters.zone,
            recipient,
            orderParameters.offer,
            orderParameters.consideration
        );
        // Clear the reentrancy guard.
        _clearReentrancyGuard();
        return true;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer each item contained in a given single
     *      order fulfillment after applying a respective fraction to the amount
     *      being transferred.
     *
     * @param orderParameters     The parameters for the fulfilled order.
     * @param numerator           A value indicating the portion of the order
     *                            that should be filled.
     * @param denominator         A value indicating the total order size.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Consideration.
     * @param recipient           The intended recipient for all received items.
     */
    function _applyFractionsAndTransferEach(
        OrderParameters memory orderParameters,
        uint256 numerator,
        uint256 denominator,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    ) internal {
        // Read start time & end time from order parameters and place on stack.
        uint256 startTime = orderParameters.startTime;
        uint256 endTime = orderParameters.endTime;
        // Initialize an accumulator array. From this point forward, no new
        // memory regions can be safely allocated until the accumulator is no
        // longer being utilized, as the accumulator operates in an open-ended
        // fashion from this memory pointer; existing memory may still be
        // accessed and modified, however.
        bytes memory accumulator = new bytes(AccumulatorDisarmed);
        // As of solidity 0.6.0, inline assembly cannot directly access function
        // definitions, but can still access locally scoped function variables.
        // This means that in order to recast the type of a function, we need to
        // create a local variable to reference the internal function definition
        // (using the same type) and a local variable with the desired type,
        // and then cast the original function pointer to the desired type.
        /**
         * Repurpose existing OfferItem memory regions on the offer array for
         * the order by overriding the _transfer function pointer to accept a
         * modified OfferItem argument in place of the usual ReceivedItem:
         *
         *   ========= OfferItem ==========   ====== ReceivedItem ======
         *   ItemType itemType; ------------> ItemType itemType;
         *   address token; ----------------> address token;
         *   uint256 identifierOrCriteria; -> uint256 identifier;
         *   uint256 startAmount; ----------> uint256 amount;
         *   uint256 endAmount; ------------> address recipient;
         */
        // Declare a nested scope to minimize stack depth.
        unchecked {
            // Declare a virtual function pointer taking an OfferItem argument.
            function(OfferItem memory, address, bytes32, bytes memory)
                internal _transferOfferItem;
            {
                // Assign _transfer function to a new function pointer (it takes
                // a ReceivedItem as its initial argument)
                function(ReceivedItem memory, address, bytes32, bytes memory)
                    internal _transferReceivedItem = _transfer;
                // Utilize assembly to override the virtual function pointer.
                assembly {
                    // Cast initial ReceivedItem type to an OfferItem type.
                    _transferOfferItem := _transferReceivedItem
                }
            }
            // Read offer array length from memory and place on stack.
            uint256 totalOfferItems = orderParameters.offer.length;
            // Iterate over each offer on the order.
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOfferItems; ++i) {
                // Retrieve the offer item.
                OfferItem memory offerItem = orderParameters.offer[i];
                // Offer items for the native token can not be received
                // outside of a match order function.
                if (offerItem.itemType == ItemType.NATIVE) {
                    revert InvalidNativeOfferItem();
                }
                // Declare an additional nested scope to minimize stack depth.
                {
                    // Apply fill fraction to get offer item amount to transfer.
                    uint256 amount = _applyFraction(
                        offerItem.startAmount,
                        offerItem.endAmount,
                        numerator,
                        denominator,
                        startTime,
                        endTime,
                        false
                    );
                    // Utilize assembly to set overloaded offerItem arguments.
                    assembly {
                        // Write new fractional amount to startAmount as amount.
                        mstore(
                            add(offerItem, ReceivedItem_amount_offset),
                            amount
                        )
                        // Write recipient to endAmount.
                        mstore(
                            add(offerItem, ReceivedItem_recipient_offset),
                            recipient
                        )
                    }
                }
                // Transfer the item from the offerer to the recipient.
                _transferOfferItem(
                    offerItem,
                    orderParameters.offerer,
                    orderParameters.conduitKey,
                    accumulator
                );
            }
        }
        // Put ether value supplied by the caller on the stack.
        uint256 etherRemaining = msg.value;
        /**
         * Repurpose existing ConsiderationItem memory regions on the
         * consideration array for the order by overriding the _transfer
         * function pointer to accept a modified ConsiderationItem argument in
         * place of the usual ReceivedItem:
         *
         *   ====== ConsiderationItem =====   ====== ReceivedItem ======
         *   ItemType itemType; ------------> ItemType itemType;
         *   address token; ----------------> address token;
         *   uint256 identifierOrCriteria;--> uint256 identifier;
         *   uint256 startAmount; ----------> uint256 amount;
         *   uint256 endAmount;        /----> address recipient;
         *   address recipient; ------/
         */
        // Declare a nested scope to minimize stack depth.
        unchecked {
            // Declare virtual function pointer with ConsiderationItem argument.
            function(ConsiderationItem memory, address, bytes32, bytes memory)
                internal _transferConsiderationItem;
            {
                // Reassign _transfer function to a new function pointer (it
                // takes a ReceivedItem as its initial argument).
                function(ReceivedItem memory, address, bytes32, bytes memory)
                    internal _transferReceivedItem = _transfer;
                // Utilize assembly to override the virtual function pointer.
                assembly {
                    // Cast ReceivedItem type to ConsiderationItem type.
                    _transferConsiderationItem := _transferReceivedItem
                }
            }
            // Read consideration array length from memory and place on stack.
            uint256 totalConsiderationItems = orderParameters
                .consideration
                .length;
            // Iterate over each consideration item on the order.
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalConsiderationItems; ++i) {
                // Retrieve the consideration item.
                ConsiderationItem memory considerationItem = (
                    orderParameters.consideration[i]
                );
                // Apply fraction & derive considerationItem amount to transfer.
                uint256 amount = _applyFraction(
                    considerationItem.startAmount,
                    considerationItem.endAmount,
                    numerator,
                    denominator,
                    startTime,
                    endTime,
                    true
                );
                // Use assembly to set overloaded considerationItem arguments.
                assembly {
                    // Write derived fractional amount to startAmount as amount.
                    mstore(
                        add(considerationItem, ReceivedItem_amount_offset),
                        amount
                    )
                    // Write original recipient to endAmount as recipient.
                    mstore(
                        add(considerationItem, ReceivedItem_recipient_offset),
                        mload(
                            add(
                                considerationItem,
                                ConsiderationItem_recipient_offset
                            )
                        )
                    )
                }
                // Reduce available value if offer spent ETH or a native token.
                if (considerationItem.itemType == ItemType.NATIVE) {
                    // Ensure that sufficient native tokens are still available.
                    if (amount > etherRemaining) {
                        revert InsufficientEtherSupplied();
                    }
                    // Skip underflow check as a comparison has just been made.
                    etherRemaining -= amount;
                }
                // Transfer item from caller to recipient specified by the item.
                _transferConsiderationItem(
                    considerationItem,
                    msg.sender,
                    fulfillerConduitKey,
                    accumulator
                );
            }
        }
        // Trigger any remaining accumulated transfers via call to the conduit.
        _triggerIfArmed(accumulator);
        // If any ether remains after fulfillments...
        if (etherRemaining != 0) {
            // return it to the caller.
            _transferEth(payable(msg.sender), etherRemaining);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to emit an OrderFulfilled event. OfferItems are
     *      translated into SpentItems and ConsiderationItems are translated
     *      into ReceivedItems.
     *
     * @param orderHash     The order hash.
     * @param offerer       The offerer for the order.
     * @param zone          The zone for the order.
     * @param fulfiller     The fulfiller of the order, or the null address if
     *                      the order was fulfilled via order matching.
     * @param offer         The offer items for the order.
     * @param consideration The consideration items for the order.
     */
    function _emitOrderFulfilledEvent(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address offerer,
        address zone,
        address fulfiller,
        OfferItem[] memory offer,
        ConsiderationItem[] memory consideration
    ) internal {
        // Cast already-modified offer memory region as spent items.
        SpentItem[] memory spentItems;
        assembly {
            spentItems := offer
        }
        // Cast already-modified consideration memory region as received items.
        ReceivedItem[] memory receivedItems;
        assembly {
            receivedItems := consideration
        }
        // Emit an event signifying that the order has been fulfilled.
        emit OrderFulfilled(
            orderHash,
            offerer,
            zone,
            fulfiller,
            spentItems,
            receivedItems
        );
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to convert an order to an advanced order with
     *      numerator and denominator of 1 and empty extraData.
     *
     * @param order The order to convert.
     *
     * @return advancedOrder The new advanced order.
     */
    function _convertOrderToAdvanced(Order calldata order)
        internal
        pure
        returns (AdvancedOrder memory advancedOrder)
    {
        // Convert to partial order (1/1 or full fill) and return new value.
        advancedOrder = AdvancedOrder(
            order.parameters,
            1,
            1,
            order.signature,
            ""
        );
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to convert an array of orders to an array of
     *      advanced orders with numerator and denominator of 1.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to convert.
     *
     * @return advancedOrders The new array of partial orders.
     */
    function _convertOrdersToAdvanced(Order[] calldata orders)
        internal
        pure
        returns (AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders)
    {
        // Read the number of orders from calldata and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalOrders = orders.length;
        // Allocate new empty array for each partial order in memory.
        advancedOrders = new AdvancedOrder[](totalOrders);
        // Skip overflow check as the index for the loop starts at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Iterate over the given orders.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOrders; ++i) {
                // Convert to partial order (1/1 or full fill) and update array.
                advancedOrders[i] = _convertOrderToAdvanced(orders[i]);
            }
        }
        // Return the array of advanced orders.
        return advancedOrders;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    AmountDerivationErrors
} from "../interfaces/AmountDerivationErrors.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title AmountDeriver
 * @author 0age
 * @notice AmountDeriver contains view and pure functions related to deriving
 *         item amounts based on partial fill quantity and on linear
 *         interpolation based on current time when the start amount and end
 *         amount differ.
 */
contract AmountDeriver is AmountDerivationErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to derive the current amount of a given item
     *      based on the current price, the starting price, and the ending
     *      price. If the start and end prices differ, the current price will be
     *      interpolated on a linear basis. Note that this function expects that
     *      the startTime parameter of orderParameters is not greater than the
     *      current block timestamp and that the endTime parameter is greater
     *      than the current block timestamp. If this condition is not upheld,
     *      duration / elapsed / remaining variables will underflow.
     *
     * @param startAmount The starting amount of the item.
     * @param endAmount   The ending amount of the item.
     * @param startTime   The starting time of the order.
     * @param endTime     The end time of the order.
     * @param roundUp     A boolean indicating whether the resultant amount
     *                    should be rounded up or down.
     *
     * @return amount The current amount.
     */
    function _locateCurrentAmount(
        uint256 startAmount,
        uint256 endAmount,
        uint256 startTime,
        uint256 endTime,
        bool roundUp
    ) internal view returns (uint256 amount) {
        // Only modify end amount if it doesn't already equal start amount.
        if (startAmount != endAmount) {
            // Declare variables to derive in the subsequent unchecked scope.
            uint256 duration;
            uint256 elapsed;
            uint256 remaining;
            // Skip underflow checks as startTime <= block.timestamp < endTime.
            unchecked {
                // Derive the duration for the order and place it on the stack.
                duration = endTime - startTime;
                // Derive time elapsed since the order started & place on stack.
                elapsed = block.timestamp - startTime;
                // Derive time remaining until order expires and place on stack.
                remaining = duration - elapsed;
            }
            // Aggregate new amounts weighted by time with rounding factor.
            uint256 totalBeforeDivision = ((startAmount * remaining) +
                (endAmount * elapsed));
            // Use assembly to combine operations and skip divide-by-zero check.
            assembly {
                // Multiply by iszero(iszero(totalBeforeDivision)) to ensure
                // amount is set to zero if totalBeforeDivision is zero,
                // as intermediate overflow can occur if it is zero.
                amount := mul(
                    iszero(iszero(totalBeforeDivision)),
                    // Subtract 1 from the numerator and add 1 to the result if
                    // roundUp is true to get the proper rounding direction.
                    // Division is performed with no zero check as duration
                    // cannot be zero as long as startTime < endTime.
                    add(
                        div(sub(totalBeforeDivision, roundUp), duration),
                        roundUp
                    )
                )
            }
            // Return the current amount.
            return amount;
        }
        // Return the original amount as startAmount == endAmount.
        return endAmount;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal pure function to return a fraction of a given value and to
     *      ensure the resultant value does not have any fractional component.
     *      Note that this function assumes that zero will never be supplied as
     *      the denominator parameter; invalid / undefined behavior will result
     *      should a denominator of zero be provided.
     *
     * @param numerator   A value indicating the portion of the order that
     *                    should be filled.
     * @param denominator A value indicating the total size of the order. Note
     *                    that this value cannot be equal to zero.
     * @param value       The value for which to compute the fraction.
     *
     * @return newValue The value after applying the fraction.
     */
    function _getFraction(
        uint256 numerator,
        uint256 denominator,
        uint256 value
    ) internal pure returns (uint256 newValue) {
        // Return value early in cases where the fraction resolves to 1.
        if (numerator == denominator) {
            return value;
        }
        // Ensure fraction can be applied to the value with no remainder. Note
        // that the denominator cannot be zero.
        assembly {
            // Ensure new value contains no remainder via mulmod operator.
            // Credit to @hrkrshnn + @axic for proposing this optimal solution.
            if mulmod(value, numerator, denominator) {
                mstore(0, InexactFraction_error_signature)
                revert(0, InexactFraction_error_len)
            }
        }
        // Multiply the numerator by the value and ensure no overflow occurs.
        uint256 valueTimesNumerator = value * numerator;
        // Divide and check for remainder. Note that denominator cannot be zero.
        assembly {
            // Perform division without zero check.
            newValue := div(valueTimesNumerator, denominator)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal view function to apply a fraction to a consideration
     * or offer item.
     *
     * @param startAmount     The starting amount of the item.
     * @param endAmount       The ending amount of the item.
     * @param numerator       A value indicating the portion of the order that
     *                        should be filled.
     * @param denominator     A value indicating the total size of the order.
     * @param startTime       The starting time of the order.
     * @param endTime         The end time of the order.
     * @param roundUp         A boolean indicating whether the resultant
     *                        amount should be rounded up or down.
     *
     * @return amount The received item to transfer with the final amount.
     */
    function _applyFraction(
        uint256 startAmount,
        uint256 endAmount,
        uint256 numerator,
        uint256 denominator,
        uint256 startTime,
        uint256 endTime,
        bool roundUp
    ) internal view returns (uint256 amount) {
        // If start amount equals end amount, apply fraction to end amount.
        if (startAmount == endAmount) {
            // Apply fraction to end amount.
            amount = _getFraction(numerator, denominator, endAmount);
        } else {
            // Otherwise, apply fraction to both and interpolated final amount.
            amount = _locateCurrentAmount(
                _getFraction(numerator, denominator, startAmount),
                _getFraction(numerator, denominator, endAmount),
                startTime,
                endTime,
                roundUp
            );
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title AmountDerivationErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice AmountDerivationErrors contains errors related to amount derivation.
 */
interface AmountDerivationErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to apply a fraction as part of
     *      a partial fill that does not divide the target amount cleanly.
     */
    error InexactFraction();
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
import { Side, ItemType } from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OfferItem,
    ConsiderationItem,
    ReceivedItem,
    OrderParameters,
    Fulfillment,
    FulfillmentComponent,
    Execution,
    Order,
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { OrderFulfiller } from "./OrderFulfiller.sol";
import { FulfillmentApplier } from "./FulfillmentApplier.sol";
import "./ConsiderationConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title OrderCombiner
 * @author 0age
 * @notice OrderCombiner contains logic for fulfilling combinations of orders,
 *         either by matching offer items to consideration items or by
 *         fulfilling orders where available.
 */
contract OrderCombiner is OrderFulfiller, FulfillmentApplier {
    /**
     * @dev Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *      separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) OrderFulfiller(conduitController) {}
    /**
     * @notice Internal function to attempt to fill a group of orders, fully or
     *         partially, with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *         consideration per order alongside criteria resolvers containing
     *         specific token identifiers and associated proofs. Any order that
     *         is not currently active, has already been fully filled, or has
     *         been cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders            The orders to fulfill along with the
     *                                  fraction of those orders to attempt to
     *                                  fill. Note that both the offerer and the
     *                                  fulfiller must first approve this
     *                                  contract (or a conduit if indicated by
     *                                  the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                                  tokens on their behalf and that
     *                                  contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` in order to receive
     *                                  ERC1155 tokens as consideration. Also
     *                                  note that all offer and consideration
     *                                  components must have no remainder after
     *                                  multiplication of the respective amount
     *                                  with the supplied fraction for an
     *                                  order's partial fill amount to be
     *                                  considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers         An array where each element contains a
     *                                  reference to a specific offer or
     *                                  consideration, a token identifier, and a
     *                                  proof that the supplied token identifier
     *                                  is contained in the merkle root held by
     *                                  the item in question's criteria element.
     *                                  Note that an empty criteria indicates
     *                                  that any (transferable) token
     *                                  identifier on the token in question is
     *                                  valid and that no associated proof needs
     *                                  to be supplied.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used (and
     *                                  direct approvals set on Consideration).
     * @param recipient                 The intended recipient for all received
     *                                  items.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function _fulfillAvailableAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] memory criteriaResolvers,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        internal
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions)
    {
        // Validate orders, apply amounts, & determine if they utilize conduits.
        _validateOrdersAndPrepareToFulfill(
            advancedOrders,
            criteriaResolvers,
            false, // Signifies that invalid orders should NOT revert.
            maximumFulfilled,
            recipient
        );
        // Aggregate used offer and consideration items and execute transfers.
        (availableOrders, executions) = _executeAvailableFulfillments(
            advancedOrders,
            offerFulfillments,
            considerationFulfillments,
            fulfillerConduitKey,
            recipient
        );
        // Return order fulfillment details and executions.
        return (availableOrders, executions);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to validate a group of orders, update their
     *      statuses, reduce amounts by their previously filled fractions, apply
     *      criteria resolvers, and emit OrderFulfilled events.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders    The advanced orders to validate and reduce by
     *                          their previously filled amounts.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root. Note that
     *                          a root of zero indicates that any transferable
     *                          token identifier is valid and that no proof
     *                          needs to be supplied.
     * @param revertOnInvalid   A boolean indicating whether to revert on any
     *                          order being invalid; setting this to false will
     *                          instead cause the invalid order to be skipped.
     * @param maximumFulfilled  The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     * @param recipient         The intended recipient for all received items.
     */
    function _validateOrdersAndPrepareToFulfill(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] memory criteriaResolvers,
        bool revertOnInvalid,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled,
        address recipient
    ) internal {
        // Ensure this function cannot be triggered during a reentrant call.
        _setReentrancyGuard();
        // Read length of orders array and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalOrders = advancedOrders.length;
        // Track the order hash for each order being fulfilled.
        bytes32[] memory orderHashes = new bytes32[](totalOrders);
        // Override orderHashes length to zero after memory has been allocated.
        assembly {
            mstore(orderHashes, 0)
        }
        // Declare an error buffer indicating status of any native offer items.
        // {00} == 0 => In a match function, no native offer items: allow.
        // {01} == 1 => In a match function, some native offer items: allow.
        // {10} == 2 => Not in a match function, no native offer items: allow.
        // {11} == 3 => Not in a match function, some native offer items: THROW.
        uint256 invalidNativeOfferItemErrorBuffer;
        // Use assembly to set the value for the second bit of the error buffer.
        assembly {
            // Use the second bit of the error buffer to indicate whether the
            // current function is not matchAdvancedOrders or matchOrders.
            invalidNativeOfferItemErrorBuffer := shl(
                1,
                gt(
                    // Take the remainder of the selector modulo a magic value.
                    mod(
                        shr(NumBitsAfterSelector, calldataload(0)),
                        NonMatchSelector_MagicModulus
                    ),
                    // Check if remainder is higher than the greatest remainder
                    // of the two match selectors modulo the magic value.
                    NonMatchSelector_MagicRemainder
                )
            )
        }
        // Skip overflow checks as all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Iterate over each order.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOrders; ++i) {
                // Retrieve the current order.
                AdvancedOrder memory advancedOrder = advancedOrders[i];
                // Determine if max number orders have already been fulfilled.
                if (maximumFulfilled == 0) {
                    // Mark fill fraction as zero as the order will not be used.
                    advancedOrder.numerator = 0;
                    // Update the length of the orderHashes array.
                    assembly {
                        mstore(orderHashes, add(i, 1))
                    }
                    // Continue iterating through the remaining orders.
                    continue;
                }
                // Validate it, update status, and determine fraction to fill.
                (
                    bytes32 orderHash,
                    uint256 numerator,
                    uint256 denominator
                ) = _validateOrderAndUpdateStatus(
                        advancedOrder,
                        criteriaResolvers,
                        revertOnInvalid,
                        orderHashes
                    );
                // Update the length of the orderHashes array.
                assembly {
                    mstore(orderHashes, add(i, 1))
                }
                // Do not track hash or adjust prices if order is not fulfilled.
                if (numerator == 0) {
                    // Mark fill fraction as zero if the order is not fulfilled.
                    advancedOrder.numerator = 0;
                    // Continue iterating through the remaining orders.
                    continue;
                }
                // Otherwise, track the order hash in question.
                orderHashes[i] = orderHash;
                // Decrement the number of fulfilled orders.
                // Skip underflow check as the condition before
                // implies that maximumFulfilled > 0.
                maximumFulfilled--;
                // Place the start time for the order on the stack.
                uint256 startTime = advancedOrder.parameters.startTime;
                // Place the end time for the order on the stack.
                uint256 endTime = advancedOrder.parameters.endTime;
                // Retrieve array of offer items for the order in question.
                OfferItem[] memory offer = advancedOrder.parameters.offer;
                // Read length of offer array and place on the stack.
                uint256 totalOfferItems = offer.length;
                // Iterate over each offer item on the order.
                for (uint256 j = 0; j < totalOfferItems; ++j) {
                    // Retrieve the offer item.
                    OfferItem memory offerItem = offer[j];
                    assembly {
                        // If the offer item is for the native token, set the
                        // first bit of the error buffer to true.
                        invalidNativeOfferItemErrorBuffer := or(
                            invalidNativeOfferItemErrorBuffer,
                            iszero(mload(offerItem))
                        )
                    }
                    // Apply order fill fraction to offer item end amount.
                    uint256 endAmount = _getFraction(
                        numerator,
                        denominator,
                        offerItem.endAmount
                    );
                    // Reuse same fraction if start and end amounts are equal.
                    if (offerItem.startAmount == offerItem.endAmount) {
                        // Apply derived amount to both start and end amount.
                        offerItem.startAmount = endAmount;
                    } else {
                        // Apply order fill fraction to offer item start amount.
                        offerItem.startAmount = _getFraction(
                            numerator,
                            denominator,
                            offerItem.startAmount
                        );
                    }
                    // Update end amount in memory to match the derived amount.
                    offerItem.endAmount = endAmount;
                    // Adjust offer amount using current time; round down.
                    offerItem.startAmount = _locateCurrentAmount(
                        offerItem.startAmount,
                        offerItem.endAmount,
                        startTime,
                        endTime,
                        false // round down
                    );
                }
                // Retrieve array of consideration items for order in question.
                ConsiderationItem[] memory consideration = (
                    advancedOrder.parameters.consideration
                );
                // Read length of consideration array and place on the stack.
                uint256 totalConsiderationItems = consideration.length;
                // Iterate over each consideration item on the order.
                for (uint256 j = 0; j < totalConsiderationItems; ++j) {
                    // Retrieve the consideration item.
                    ConsiderationItem memory considerationItem = (
                        consideration[j]
                    );
                    // Apply fraction to consideration item end amount.
                    uint256 endAmount = _getFraction(
                        numerator,
                        denominator,
                        considerationItem.endAmount
                    );
                    // Reuse same fraction if start and end amounts are equal.
                    if (
                        considerationItem.startAmount ==
                        considerationItem.endAmount
                    ) {
                        // Apply derived amount to both start and end amount.
                        considerationItem.startAmount = endAmount;
                    } else {
                        // Apply fraction to consideration item start amount.
                        considerationItem.startAmount = _getFraction(
                            numerator,
                            denominator,
                            considerationItem.startAmount
                        );
                    }
                    // Update end amount in memory to match the derived amount.
                    considerationItem.endAmount = endAmount;
                    // Adjust consideration amount using current time; round up.
                    considerationItem.startAmount = (
                        _locateCurrentAmount(
                            considerationItem.startAmount,
                            considerationItem.endAmount,
                            startTime,
                            endTime,
                            true // round up
                        )
                    );
                    // Utilize assembly to manually "shift" the recipient value.
                    assembly {
                        // Write recipient to endAmount, as endAmount is not
                        // used from this point on and can be repurposed to fit
                        // the layout of a ReceivedItem.
                        mstore(
                            add(
                                considerationItem,
                                ReceivedItem_recipient_offset // old endAmount
                            ),
                            mload(
                                add(
                                    considerationItem,
                                    ConsiderationItem_recipient_offset
                                )
                            )
                        )
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        // If the first bit is set, a native offer item was encountered. If the
        // second bit is set in the error buffer, the current function is not
        // matchOrders or matchAdvancedOrders. If the value is three, both the
        // first and second bits were set; in that case, revert with an error.
        if (invalidNativeOfferItemErrorBuffer == 3) {
            revert InvalidNativeOfferItem();
        }
        // Apply criteria resolvers to each order as applicable.
        _applyCriteriaResolvers(advancedOrders, criteriaResolvers);
        // Emit an event for each order signifying that it has been fulfilled.
        // Skip overflow checks as all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Iterate over each order.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOrders; ++i) {
                // Do not emit an event if no order hash is present.
                if (orderHashes[i] == bytes32(0)) {
                    continue;
                }
                // Retrieve parameters for the order in question.
                OrderParameters memory orderParameters = (
                    advancedOrders[i].parameters
                );
                // Emit an OrderFulfilled event.
                _emitOrderFulfilledEvent(
                    orderHashes[i],
                    orderParameters.offerer,
                    orderParameters.zone,
                    recipient,
                    orderParameters.offer,
                    orderParameters.consideration
                );
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to fulfill a group of validated orders, fully or
     *      partially, with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *      consideration per order and to execute transfers. Any order that is
     *      not currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *      cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration items
     *      will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the supplied
     *      offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated items will
     *      be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended recipient,
     *      respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an issue with
     *      order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders            The orders to fulfill along with the
     *                                  fraction of those orders to attempt to
     *                                  fill. Note that both the offerer and the
     *                                  fulfiller must first approve this
     *                                  contract (or the conduit if indicated by
     *                                  the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                                  tokens on their behalf and that
     *                                  contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` in order to receive
     *                                  ERC1155 tokens as consideration. Also
     *                                  note that all offer and consideration
     *                                  components must have no remainder after
     *                                  multiplication of the respective amount
     *                                  with the supplied fraction for an
     *                                  order's partial fill amount to be
     *                                  considered valid.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used, with
     *                                  direct approvals set on Consideration.
     * @param recipient                 The intended recipient for all received
     *                                  items.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function _executeAvailableFulfillments(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] memory offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] memory considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    )
        internal
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions)
    {
        // Retrieve length of offer fulfillments array and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalOfferFulfillments = offerFulfillments.length;
        // Retrieve length of consideration fulfillments array & place on stack.
        uint256 totalConsiderationFulfillments = (
            considerationFulfillments.length
        );
        // Allocate an execution for each offer and consideration fulfillment.
        executions = new Execution[](
            totalOfferFulfillments + totalConsiderationFulfillments
        );
        // Skip overflow checks as all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Track number of filtered executions.
            uint256 totalFilteredExecutions = 0;
            // Iterate over each offer fulfillment.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOfferFulfillments; ++i) {
                /// Retrieve the offer fulfillment components in question.
                FulfillmentComponent[] memory components = (
                    offerFulfillments[i]
                );
                // Derive aggregated execution corresponding with fulfillment.
                Execution memory execution = _aggregateAvailable(
                    advancedOrders,
                    Side.OFFER,
                    components,
                    fulfillerConduitKey,
                    recipient
                );
                // If offerer and recipient on the execution are the same...
                if (execution.item.recipient == execution.offerer) {
                    // Increment total filtered executions.
                    ++totalFilteredExecutions;
                } else {
                    // Otherwise, assign the execution to the executions array.
                    executions[i - totalFilteredExecutions] = execution;
                }
            }
            // Iterate over each consideration fulfillment.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalConsiderationFulfillments; ++i) {
                /// Retrieve consideration fulfillment components in question.
                FulfillmentComponent[] memory components = (
                    considerationFulfillments[i]
                );
                // Derive aggregated execution corresponding with fulfillment.
                Execution memory execution = _aggregateAvailable(
                    advancedOrders,
                    Side.CONSIDERATION,
                    components,
                    fulfillerConduitKey,
                    address(0) // unused
                );
                // If offerer and recipient on the execution are the same...
                if (execution.item.recipient == execution.offerer) {
                    // Increment total filtered executions.
                    ++totalFilteredExecutions;
                } else {
                    // Otherwise, assign the execution to the executions array.
                    executions[
                        i + totalOfferFulfillments - totalFilteredExecutions
                    ] = execution;
                }
            }
            // If some number of executions have been filtered...
            if (totalFilteredExecutions != 0) {
                // reduce the total length of the executions array.
                assembly {
                    mstore(
                        executions,
                        sub(mload(executions), totalFilteredExecutions)
                    )
                }
            }
        }
        // Revert if no orders are available.
        if (executions.length == 0) {
            revert NoSpecifiedOrdersAvailable();
        }
        // Perform final checks and return.
        availableOrders = _performFinalChecksAndExecuteOrders(
            advancedOrders,
            executions
        );
        return (availableOrders, executions);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to perform a final check that each consideration
     *      item for an arbitrary number of fulfilled orders has been met and to
     *      trigger associated executions, transferring the respective items.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders     The orders to check and perform executions for.
     * @param executions         An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                           transfers to perform when fulfilling the given
     *                           orders.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     */
    function _performFinalChecksAndExecuteOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        Execution[] memory executions
    ) internal returns (bool[] memory availableOrders) {
        // Retrieve the length of the advanced orders array and place on stack.
        uint256 totalOrders = advancedOrders.length;
        // Initialize array for tracking available orders.
        availableOrders = new bool[](totalOrders);
        // Skip overflow checks as all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Iterate over orders to ensure all considerations are met.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalOrders; ++i) {
                // Retrieve the order in question.
                AdvancedOrder memory advancedOrder = advancedOrders[i];
                // Skip consideration item checks for order if not fulfilled.
                if (advancedOrder.numerator == 0) {
                    // Note: orders do not need to be marked as unavailable as a
                    // new memory region has been allocated. Review carefully if
                    // altering compiler version or managing memory manually.
                    continue;
                }
                // Mark the order as available.
                availableOrders[i] = true;
                // Retrieve consideration items to ensure they are fulfilled.
                ConsiderationItem[] memory consideration = (
                    advancedOrder.parameters.consideration
                );
                // Read length of consideration array and place on the stack.
                uint256 totalConsiderationItems = consideration.length;
                // Iterate over each consideration item to ensure it is met.
                for (uint256 j = 0; j < totalConsiderationItems; ++j) {
                    // Retrieve remaining amount on the consideration item.
                    uint256 unmetAmount = consideration[j].startAmount;
                    // Revert if the remaining amount is not zero.
                    if (unmetAmount != 0) {
                        revert ConsiderationNotMet(i, j, unmetAmount);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        // Put ether value supplied by the caller on the stack.
        uint256 etherRemaining = msg.value;
        // Initialize an accumulator array. From this point forward, no new
        // memory regions can be safely allocated until the accumulator is no
        // longer being utilized, as the accumulator operates in an open-ended
        // fashion from this memory pointer; existing memory may still be
        // accessed and modified, however.
        bytes memory accumulator = new bytes(AccumulatorDisarmed);
        // Retrieve the length of the executions array and place on stack.
        uint256 totalExecutions = executions.length;
        // Iterate over each execution.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalExecutions; ) {
            // Retrieve the execution and the associated received item.
            Execution memory execution = executions[i];
            ReceivedItem memory item = execution.item;
            // If execution transfers native tokens, reduce value available.
            if (item.itemType == ItemType.NATIVE) {
                // Ensure that sufficient native tokens are still available.
                if (item.amount > etherRemaining) {
                    revert InsufficientEtherSupplied();
                }
                // Skip underflow check as amount is less than ether remaining.
                unchecked {
                    etherRemaining -= item.amount;
                }
            }
            // Transfer the item specified by the execution.
            _transfer(
                item,
                execution.offerer,
                execution.conduitKey,
                accumulator
            );
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Trigger any remaining accumulated transfers via call to the conduit.
        _triggerIfArmed(accumulator);
        // If any ether remains after fulfillments, return it to the caller.
        if (etherRemaining != 0) {
            _transferEth(payable(msg.sender), etherRemaining);
        }
        // Clear the reentrancy guard.
        _clearReentrancyGuard();
        // Return the array containing available orders.
        return (availableOrders);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to match an arbitrary number of full or partial
     *      orders, each with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *      consideration, supplying criteria resolvers containing specific
     *      token identifiers and associated proofs as well as fulfillments
     *      allocating offer components to consideration components.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders    The advanced orders to match. Note that both the
     *                          offerer and fulfiller on each order must first
     *                          approve this contract (or their conduit if
     *                          indicated by the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                          tokens on their behalf and each consideration
     *                          recipient must implement `onERC1155Received` in
     *                          order to receive ERC1155 tokens. Also note that
     *                          the offer and consideration components for each
     *                          order must have no remainder after multiplying
     *                          the respective amount with the supplied fraction
     *                          in order for the group of partial fills to be
     *                          considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root. Note that
     *                          an empty root indicates that any (transferable)
     *                          token identifier is valid and that no associated
     *                          proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components. Note that each
     *                          consideration component must be fully met in
     *                          order for the match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function _matchAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] memory criteriaResolvers,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) internal returns (Execution[] memory executions) {
        // Validate orders, update order status, and determine item amounts.
        _validateOrdersAndPrepareToFulfill(
            advancedOrders,
            criteriaResolvers,
            true, // Signifies that invalid orders should revert.
            advancedOrders.length,
            address(0) // OrderFulfilled event has no recipient when matching.
        );
        // Fulfill the orders using the supplied fulfillments.
        return _fulfillAdvancedOrders(advancedOrders, fulfillments);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to fulfill an arbitrary number of orders, either
     *      full or partial, after validating, adjusting amounts, and applying
     *      criteria resolvers.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders     The orders to match, including a fraction to
     *                           attempt to fill for each order.
     * @param fulfillments       An array of elements allocating offer
     *                           components to consideration components. Note
     *                           that the final amount of each consideration
     *                           component must be zero for a match operation to
     *                           be considered valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function _fulfillAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) internal returns (Execution[] memory executions) {
        // Retrieve fulfillments array length and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalFulfillments = fulfillments.length;
        // Allocate executions by fulfillment and apply them to each execution.
        executions = new Execution[](totalFulfillments);
        // Skip overflow checks as all for loops are indexed starting at zero.
        unchecked {
            // Track number of filtered executions.
            uint256 totalFilteredExecutions = 0;
            // Iterate over each fulfillment.
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalFulfillments; ++i) {
                /// Retrieve the fulfillment in question.
                Fulfillment calldata fulfillment = fulfillments[i];
                // Derive the execution corresponding with the fulfillment.
                Execution memory execution = _applyFulfillment(
                    advancedOrders,
                    fulfillment.offerComponents,
                    fulfillment.considerationComponents
                );
                // If offerer and recipient on the execution are the same...
                if (execution.item.recipient == execution.offerer) {
                    // Increment total filtered executions.
                    ++totalFilteredExecutions;
                } else {
                    // Otherwise, assign the execution to the executions array.
                    executions[i - totalFilteredExecutions] = execution;
                }
            }
            // If some number of executions have been filtered...
            if (totalFilteredExecutions != 0) {
                // reduce the total length of the executions array.
                assembly {
                    mstore(
                        executions,
                        sub(mload(executions), totalFilteredExecutions)
                    )
                }
            }
        }
        // Perform final checks and execute orders.
        _performFinalChecksAndExecuteOrders(advancedOrders, executions);
        // Return the executions array.
        return (executions);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.13;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConsiderationInterface
} from "../interfaces/ConsiderationInterface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OrderComponents,
    BasicOrderParameters,
    OrderParameters,
    Order,
    AdvancedOrder,
    OrderStatus,
    CriteriaResolver,
    Fulfillment,
    FulfillmentComponent,
    Execution
} from "./ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { OrderCombiner } from "./OrderCombiner.sol";
/**
 * @title Consideration
 * @author 0age
 * @custom:coauthor d1ll0n
 * @custom:coauthor transmissions11
 * @custom:version 1.1
 * @notice Consideration is a generalized ETH/ERC20/ERC721/ERC1155 marketplace.
 *         It minimizes external calls to the greatest extent possible and
 *         provides lightweight methods for common routes as well as more
 *         flexible methods for composing advanced orders or groups of orders.
 *         Each order contains an arbitrary number of items that may be spent
 *         (the "offer") along with an arbitrary number of items that must be
 *         received back by the indicated recipients (the "consideration").
 */
contract Consideration is ConsiderationInterface, OrderCombiner {
    /**
     * @notice Derive and set hashes, reference chainId, and associated domain
     *         separator during deployment.
     *
     * @param conduitController A contract that deploys conduits, or proxies
     *                          that may optionally be used to transfer approved
     *                          ERC20/721/1155 tokens.
     */
    constructor(address conduitController) OrderCombiner(conduitController) {}
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order offering an ERC20, ERC721, or ERC1155 item by
     *         supplying Ether (or other native tokens), ERC20 tokens, an ERC721
     *         item, or an ERC1155 item as consideration. Six permutations are
     *         supported: Native token to ERC721, Native token to ERC1155, ERC20
     *         to ERC721, ERC20 to ERC1155, ERC721 to ERC20, and ERC1155 to
     *         ERC20 (with native tokens supplied as msg.value). For an order to
     *         be eligible for fulfillment via this method, it must contain a
     *         single offer item (though that item may have a greater amount if
     *         the item is not an ERC721). An arbitrary number of "additional
     *         recipients" may also be supplied which will each receive native
     *         tokens or ERC20 items from the fulfiller as consideration. Refer
     *         to the documentation for a more comprehensive summary of how to
     *         utilize this method and what orders are compatible with it.
     *
     * @param parameters Additional information on the fulfilled order. Note
     *                   that the offerer and the fulfiller must first approve
     *                   this contract (or their chosen conduit if indicated)
     *                   before any tokens can be transferred. Also note that
     *                   contract recipients of ERC1155 consideration items must
     *                   implement `onERC1155Received` in order to receive those
     *                   items.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillBasicOrder(BasicOrderParameters calldata parameters)
        external
        payable
        override
        returns (bool fulfilled)
    {
        // Validate and fulfill the basic order.
        fulfilled = _validateAndFulfillBasicOrder(parameters);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *         consideration. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based orders or partial filling of orders (though
     *         filling the remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param order               The order to fulfill. Note that both the
     *                            offerer and the fulfiller must first approve
     *                            this contract (or the corresponding conduit if
     *                            indicated) to transfer any relevant tokens on
     *                            their behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                            `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155 tokens
     *                            as consideration.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used (and direct approvals set on
     *                            Consideration).
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillOrder(Order calldata order, bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey)
        external
        payable
        override
        returns (bool fulfilled)
    {
        // Convert order to "advanced" order, then validate and fulfill it.
        fulfilled = _validateAndFulfillAdvancedOrder(
            _convertOrderToAdvanced(order),
            new CriteriaResolver[](0), // No criteria resolvers supplied.
            fulfillerConduitKey,
            msg.sender
        );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Fill an order, fully or partially, with an arbitrary number of
     *         items for offer and consideration alongside criteria resolvers
     *         containing specific token identifiers and associated proofs.
     *
     * @param advancedOrder       The order to fulfill along with the fraction
     *                            of the order to attempt to fill. Note that
     *                            both the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                            approve this contract (or their conduit if
     *                            indicated by the order) to transfer any
     *                            relevant tokens on their behalf and that
     *                            contracts must implement `onERC1155Received`
     *                            to receive ERC1155 tokens as consideration.
     *                            Also note that all offer and consideration
     *                            components must have no remainder after
     *                            multiplication of the respective amount with
     *                            the supplied fraction for the partial fill to
     *                            be considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers   An array where each element contains a
     *                            reference to a specific offer or
     *                            consideration, a token identifier, and a proof
     *                            that the supplied token identifier is
     *                            contained in the merkle root held by the item
     *                            in question's criteria element. Note that an
     *                            empty criteria indicates that any
     *                            (transferable) token identifier on the token
     *                            in question is valid and that no associated
     *                            proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used (and direct approvals set on
     *                            Consideration).
     * @param recipient           The intended recipient for all received items,
     *                            with `address(0)` indicating that the caller
     *                            should receive the items.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillAdvancedOrder(
        AdvancedOrder calldata advancedOrder,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    ) external payable override returns (bool fulfilled) {
        // Validate and fulfill the order.
        fulfilled = _validateAndFulfillAdvancedOrder(
            advancedOrder,
            criteriaResolvers,
            fulfillerConduitKey,
            recipient == address(0) ? msg.sender : recipient
        );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, each with an arbitrary number
     *         of items for offer and consideration. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *         Note that this function does not support criteria-based orders or
     *         partial filling of orders (though filling the remainder of a
     *         partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders                    The orders to fulfill. Note that both
     *                                  the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                                  approve this contract (or the
     *                                  corresponding conduit if indicated) to
     *                                  transfer any relevant tokens on their
     *                                  behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155
     *                                  tokens as consideration.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used (and
     *                                  direct approvals set on Consideration).
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        override
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions)
    {
        // Convert orders to "advanced" orders and fulfill all available orders.
        return
            _fulfillAvailableAdvancedOrders(
                _convertOrdersToAdvanced(orders), // Convert to advanced orders.
                new CriteriaResolver[](0), // No criteria resolvers supplied.
                offerFulfillments,
                considerationFulfillments,
                fulfillerConduitKey,
                msg.sender,
                maximumFulfilled
            );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, fully or partially, with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration per order
     *         alongside criteria resolvers containing specific token
     *         identifiers and associated proofs. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders            The orders to fulfill along with the
     *                                  fraction of those orders to attempt to
     *                                  fill. Note that both the offerer and the
     *                                  fulfiller must first approve this
     *                                  contract (or their conduit if indicated
     *                                  by the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                                  tokens on their behalf and that
     *                                  contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` in order to receive
     *                                  ERC1155 tokens as consideration. Also
     *                                  note that all offer and consideration
     *                                  components must have no remainder after
     *                                  multiplication of the respective amount
     *                                  with the supplied fraction for an
     *                                  order's partial fill amount to be
     *                                  considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers         An array where each element contains a
     *                                  reference to a specific offer or
     *                                  consideration, a token identifier, and a
     *                                  proof that the supplied token identifier
     *                                  is contained in the merkle root held by
     *                                  the item in question's criteria element.
     *                                  Note that an empty criteria indicates
     *                                  that any (transferable) token
     *                                  identifier on the token in question is
     *                                  valid and that no associated proof needs
     *                                  to be supplied.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used (and
     *                                  direct approvals set on Consideration).
     * @param recipient                 The intended recipient for all received
     *                                  items, with `address(0)` indicating that
     *                                  the caller should receive the items.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        override
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions)
    {
        // Fulfill all available orders.
        return
            _fulfillAvailableAdvancedOrders(
                advancedOrders,
                criteriaResolvers,
                offerFulfillments,
                considerationFulfillments,
                fulfillerConduitKey,
                recipient == address(0) ? msg.sender : recipient,
                maximumFulfilled
            );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of orders, each with an arbitrary
     *         number of items for offer and consideration along with a set of
     *         fulfillments allocating offer components to consideration
     *         components. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based or partial filling of orders (though filling the
     *         remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders            The orders to match. Note that both the offerer
     *                          and fulfiller on each order must first approve
     *                          this contract (or their conduit if indicated by
     *                          the order) to transfer any relevant tokens on
     *                          their behalf and each consideration recipient
     *                          must implement `onERC1155Received` in order to
     *                          receive ERC1155 tokens.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components. Note that each
     *                          consideration component must be fully met in
     *                          order for the match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable override returns (Execution[] memory executions) {
        // Convert to advanced, validate, and match orders using fulfillments.
        return
            _matchAdvancedOrders(
                _convertOrdersToAdvanced(orders),
                new CriteriaResolver[](0), // No criteria resolvers supplied.
                fulfillments
            );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of full or partial orders, each with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration, supplying
     *         criteria resolvers containing specific token identifiers and
     *         associated proofs as well as fulfillments allocating offer
     *         components to consideration components.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders    The advanced orders to match. Note that both the
     *                          offerer and fulfiller on each order must first
     *                          approve this contract (or their conduit if
     *                          indicated by the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                          tokens on their behalf and each consideration
     *                          recipient must implement `onERC1155Received` in
     *                          order to receive ERC1155 tokens. Also note that
     *                          the offer and consideration components for each
     *                          order must have no remainder after multiplying
     *                          the respective amount with the supplied fraction
     *                          in order for the group of partial fills to be
     *                          considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root. Note that
     *                          an empty root indicates that any (transferable)
     *                          token identifier is valid and that no associated
     *                          proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components. Note that each
     *                          consideration component must be fully met in
     *                          order for the match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] memory advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable override returns (Execution[] memory executions) {
        // Validate and match the advanced orders using supplied fulfillments.
        return
            _matchAdvancedOrders(
                advancedOrders,
                criteriaResolvers,
                fulfillments
            );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Cancel an arbitrary number of orders. Note that only the offerer
     *         or the zone of a given order may cancel it. Callers should ensure
     *         that the intended order was cancelled by calling `getOrderStatus`
     *         and confirming that `isCancelled` returns `true`.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to cancel.
     *
     * @return cancelled A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully cancelled.
     */
    function cancel(OrderComponents[] calldata orders)
        external
        override
        returns (bool cancelled)
    {
        // Cancel the orders.
        cancelled = _cancel(orders);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Validate an arbitrary number of orders, thereby registering their
     *         signatures as valid and allowing the fulfiller to skip signature
     *         verification on fulfillment. Note that validated orders may still
     *         be unfulfillable due to invalid item amounts or other factors;
     *         callers should determine whether validated orders are fulfillable
     *         by simulating the fulfillment call prior to execution. Also note
     *         that anyone can validate a signed order, but only the offerer can
     *         validate an order without supplying a signature.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to validate.
     *
     * @return validated A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully validated.
     */
    function validate(Order[] calldata orders)
        external
        override
        returns (bool validated)
    {
        // Validate the orders.
        validated = _validate(orders);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Cancel all orders from a given offerer with a given zone in bulk
     *         by incrementing a counter. Note that only the offerer may
     *         increment the counter.
     *
     * @return newCounter The new counter.
     */
    function incrementCounter() external override returns (uint256 newCounter) {
        // Increment current counter for the supplied offerer.
        newCounter = _incrementCounter();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the order hash for a given order.
     *
     * @param order The components of the order.
     *
     * @return orderHash The order hash.
     */
    function getOrderHash(OrderComponents calldata order)
        external
        view
        override
        returns (bytes32 orderHash)
    {
        // Derive order hash by supplying order parameters along with counter.
        orderHash = _deriveOrderHash(
            OrderParameters(
                order.offerer,
                order.zone,
                order.offer,
                order.consideration,
                order.orderType,
                order.startTime,
                order.endTime,
                order.zoneHash,
                order.salt,
                order.conduitKey,
                order.consideration.length
            ),
            order.counter
        );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the status of a given order by hash, including whether
     *         the order has been cancelled or validated and the fraction of the
     *         order that has been filled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash in question.
     *
     * @return isValidated A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been validated (i.e. previously approved or
     *                     partially filled).
     * @return isCancelled A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been cancelled.
     * @return totalFilled The total portion of the order that has been filled
     *                     (i.e. the "numerator").
     * @return totalSize   The total size of the order that is either filled or
     *                     unfilled (i.e. the "denominator").
     */
    function getOrderStatus(bytes32 orderHash)
        external
        view
        override
        returns (
            bool isValidated,
            bool isCancelled,
            uint256 totalFilled,
            uint256 totalSize
        )
    {
        // Retrieve the order status using the order hash.
        return _getOrderStatus(orderHash);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the current counter for a given offerer.
     *
     * @param offerer The offerer in question.
     *
     * @return counter The current counter.
     */
    function getCounter(address offerer)
        external
        view
        override
        returns (uint256 counter)
    {
        // Return the counter for the supplied offerer.
        counter = _getCounter(offerer);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve configuration information for this contract.
     *
     * @return version           The contract version.
     * @return domainSeparator   The domain separator for this contract.
     * @return conduitController The conduit Controller set for this contract.
     */
    function information()
        external
        view
        override
        returns (
            string memory version,
            bytes32 domainSeparator,
            address conduitController
        )
    {
        // Return the information for this contract.
        return _information();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the name of this contract.
     *
     * @return contractName The name of this contract.
     */
    function name()
        external
        pure
        override
        returns (string memory contractName)
    {
        // Return the name of the contract.
        contractName = _name();
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    BasicOrderParameters,
    OrderComponents,
    Fulfillment,
    FulfillmentComponent,
    Execution,
    Order,
    AdvancedOrder,
    OrderStatus,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title ConsiderationInterface
 * @author 0age
 * @custom:version 1.1
 * @notice Consideration is a generalized ETH/ERC20/ERC721/ERC1155 marketplace.
 *         It minimizes external calls to the greatest extent possible and
 *         provides lightweight methods for common routes as well as more
 *         flexible methods for composing advanced orders.
 *
 * @dev ConsiderationInterface contains all external function interfaces for
 *      Consideration.
 */
interface ConsiderationInterface {
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order offering an ERC721 token by supplying Ether (or
     *         the native token for the given chain) as consideration for the
     *         order. An arbitrary number of "additional recipients" may also be
     *         supplied which will each receive native tokens from the fulfiller
     *         as consideration.
     *
     * @param parameters Additional information on the fulfilled order. Note
     *                   that the offerer must first approve this contract (or
     *                   their preferred conduit if indicated by the order) for
     *                   their offered ERC721 token to be transferred.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillBasicOrder(BasicOrderParameters calldata parameters)
        external
        payable
        returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *         consideration. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based orders or partial filling of orders (though
     *         filling the remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param order               The order to fulfill. Note that both the
     *                            offerer and the fulfiller must first approve
     *                            this contract (or the corresponding conduit if
     *                            indicated) to transfer any relevant tokens on
     *                            their behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                            `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155 tokens
     *                            as consideration.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Consideration.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillOrder(Order calldata order, bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey)
        external
        payable
        returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Fill an order, fully or partially, with an arbitrary number of
     *         items for offer and consideration alongside criteria resolvers
     *         containing specific token identifiers and associated proofs.
     *
     * @param advancedOrder       The order to fulfill along with the fraction
     *                            of the order to attempt to fill. Note that
     *                            both the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                            approve this contract (or their preferred
     *                            conduit if indicated by the order) to transfer
     *                            any relevant tokens on their behalf and that
     *                            contracts must implement `onERC1155Received`
     *                            to receive ERC1155 tokens as consideration.
     *                            Also note that all offer and consideration
     *                            components must have no remainder after
     *                            multiplication of the respective amount with
     *                            the supplied fraction for the partial fill to
     *                            be considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers   An array where each element contains a
     *                            reference to a specific offer or
     *                            consideration, a token identifier, and a proof
     *                            that the supplied token identifier is
     *                            contained in the merkle root held by the item
     *                            in question's criteria element. Note that an
     *                            empty criteria indicates that any
     *                            (transferable) token identifier on the token
     *                            in question is valid and that no associated
     *                            proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Consideration.
     * @param recipient           The intended recipient for all received items,
     *                            with `address(0)` indicating that the caller
     *                            should receive the items.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillAdvancedOrder(
        AdvancedOrder calldata advancedOrder,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    ) external payable returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, each with an arbitrary number
     *         of items for offer and consideration. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *         Note that this function does not support criteria-based orders or
     *         partial filling of orders (though filling the remainder of a
     *         partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders                    The orders to fulfill. Note that both
     *                                  the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                                  approve this contract (or the
     *                                  corresponding conduit if indicated) to
     *                                  transfer any relevant tokens on their
     *                                  behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155
     *                                  tokens as consideration.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used, with
     *                                  direct approvals set on this contract.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, fully or partially, with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration per order
     *         alongside criteria resolvers containing specific token
     *         identifiers and associated proofs. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders            The orders to fulfill along with the
     *                                  fraction of those orders to attempt to
     *                                  fill. Note that both the offerer and the
     *                                  fulfiller must first approve this
     *                                  contract (or their preferred conduit if
     *                                  indicated by the order) to transfer any
     *                                  relevant tokens on their behalf and that
     *                                  contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` to enable receipt of
     *                                  ERC1155 tokens as consideration. Also
     *                                  note that all offer and consideration
     *                                  components must have no remainder after
     *                                  multiplication of the respective amount
     *                                  with the supplied fraction for an
     *                                  order's partial fill amount to be
     *                                  considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers         An array where each element contains a
     *                                  reference to a specific offer or
     *                                  consideration, a token identifier, and a
     *                                  proof that the supplied token identifier
     *                                  is contained in the merkle root held by
     *                                  the item in question's criteria element.
     *                                  Note that an empty criteria indicates
     *                                  that any (transferable) token
     *                                  identifier on the token in question is
     *                                  valid and that no associated proof needs
     *                                  to be supplied.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used, with
     *                                  direct approvals set on this contract.
     * @param recipient                 The intended recipient for all received
     *                                  items, with `address(0)` indicating that
     *                                  the caller should receive the items.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of orders, each with an arbitrary
     *         number of items for offer and consideration along with as set of
     *         fulfillments allocating offer components to consideration
     *         components. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based or partial filling of orders (though filling the
     *         remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders       The orders to match. Note that both the offerer and
     *                     fulfiller on each order must first approve this
     *                     contract (or their conduit if indicated by the order)
     *                     to transfer any relevant tokens on their behalf and
     *                     each consideration recipient must implement
     *                     `onERC1155Received` to enable ERC1155 token receipt.
     * @param fulfillments An array of elements allocating offer components to
     *                     consideration components. Note that each
     *                     consideration component must be fully met for the
     *                     match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of full or partial orders, each with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration, supplying
     *         criteria resolvers containing specific token identifiers and
     *         associated proofs as well as fulfillments allocating offer
     *         components to consideration components.
     *
     * @param orders            The advanced orders to match. Note that both the
     *                          offerer and fulfiller on each order must first
     *                          approve this contract (or a preferred conduit if
     *                          indicated by the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                          tokens on their behalf and each consideration
     *                          recipient must implement `onERC1155Received` in
     *                          order to receive ERC1155 tokens. Also note that
     *                          the offer and consideration components for each
     *                          order must have no remainder after multiplying
     *                          the respective amount with the supplied fraction
     *                          in order for the group of partial fills to be
     *                          considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root. Note that
     *                          an empty root indicates that any (transferable)
     *                          token identifier is valid and that no associated
     *                          proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components. Note that each
     *                          consideration component must be fully met in
     *                          order for the match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata orders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Cancel an arbitrary number of orders. Note that only the offerer
     *         or the zone of a given order may cancel it. Callers should ensure
     *         that the intended order was cancelled by calling `getOrderStatus`
     *         and confirming that `isCancelled` returns `true`.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to cancel.
     *
     * @return cancelled A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully cancelled.
     */
    function cancel(OrderComponents[] calldata orders)
        external
        returns (bool cancelled);
    /**
     * @notice Validate an arbitrary number of orders, thereby registering their
     *         signatures as valid and allowing the fulfiller to skip signature
     *         verification on fulfillment. Note that validated orders may still
     *         be unfulfillable due to invalid item amounts or other factors;
     *         callers should determine whether validated orders are fulfillable
     *         by simulating the fulfillment call prior to execution. Also note
     *         that anyone can validate a signed order, but only the offerer can
     *         validate an order without supplying a signature.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to validate.
     *
     * @return validated A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully validated.
     */
    function validate(Order[] calldata orders)
        external
        returns (bool validated);
    /**
     * @notice Cancel all orders from a given offerer with a given zone in bulk
     *         by incrementing a counter. Note that only the offerer may
     *         increment the counter.
     *
     * @return newCounter The new counter.
     */
    function incrementCounter() external returns (uint256 newCounter);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the order hash for a given order.
     *
     * @param order The components of the order.
     *
     * @return orderHash The order hash.
     */
    function getOrderHash(OrderComponents calldata order)
        external
        view
        returns (bytes32 orderHash);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the status of a given order by hash, including whether
     *         the order has been cancelled or validated and the fraction of the
     *         order that has been filled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash in question.
     *
     * @return isValidated A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been validated (i.e. previously approved or
     *                     partially filled).
     * @return isCancelled A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been cancelled.
     * @return totalFilled The total portion of the order that has been filled
     *                     (i.e. the "numerator").
     * @return totalSize   The total size of the order that is either filled or
     *                     unfilled (i.e. the "denominator").
     */
    function getOrderStatus(bytes32 orderHash)
        external
        view
        returns (
            bool isValidated,
            bool isCancelled,
            uint256 totalFilled,
            uint256 totalSize
        );
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the current counter for a given offerer.
     *
     * @param offerer The offerer in question.
     *
     * @return counter The current counter.
     */
    function getCounter(address offerer)
        external
        view
        returns (uint256 counter);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve configuration information for this contract.
     *
     * @return version           The contract version.
     * @return domainSeparator   The domain separator for this contract.
     * @return conduitController The conduit Controller set for this contract.
     */
    function information()
        external
        view
        returns (
            string memory version,
            bytes32 domainSeparator,
            address conduitController
        );
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the name of this contract.
     *
     * @return contractName The name of this contract.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory contractName);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract OwnableUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    function __Ownable_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        __Ownable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __Ownable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (finance/PaymentSplitter.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title PaymentSplitter
 * @dev This contract allows to split Ether payments among a group of accounts. The sender does not need to be aware
 * that the Ether will be split in this way, since it is handled transparently by the contract.
 *
 * The split can be in equal parts or in any other arbitrary proportion. The way this is specified is by assigning each
 * account to a number of shares. Of all the Ether that this contract receives, each account will then be able to claim
 * an amount proportional to the percentage of total shares they were assigned. The distribution of shares is set at the
 * time of contract deployment and can't be updated thereafter.
 *
 * `PaymentSplitter` follows a _pull payment_ model. This means that payments are not automatically forwarded to the
 * accounts but kept in this contract, and the actual transfer is triggered as a separate step by calling the {release}
 * function.
 *
 * NOTE: This contract assumes that ERC20 tokens will behave similarly to native tokens (Ether). Rebasing tokens, and
 * tokens that apply fees during transfers, are likely to not be supported as expected. If in doubt, we encourage you
 * to run tests before sending real value to this contract.
 */
contract PaymentSplitterUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    event PayeeAdded(address account, uint256 shares);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event ERC20PaymentReleased(IERC20Upgradeable indexed token, address to, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReceived(address from, uint256 amount);
    uint256 private _totalShares;
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _shares;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    address[] private _payees;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => uint256) private _erc20TotalReleased;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => mapping(address => uint256)) private _erc20Released;
    /**
     * @dev Creates an instance of `PaymentSplitter` where each account in `payees` is assigned the number of shares at
     * the matching position in the `shares` array.
     *
     * All addresses in `payees` must be non-zero. Both arrays must have the same non-zero length, and there must be no
     * duplicates in `payees`.
     */
    function __PaymentSplitter_init(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(payees, shares_);
    }
    function __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        require(payees.length == shares_.length, "PaymentSplitter: payees and shares length mismatch");
        require(payees.length > 0, "PaymentSplitter: no payees");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < payees.length; i++) {
            _addPayee(payees[i], shares_[i]);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev The Ether received will be logged with {PaymentReceived} events. Note that these events are not fully
     * reliable: it's possible for a contract to receive Ether without triggering this function. This only affects the
     * reliability of the events, and not the actual splitting of Ether.
     *
     * To learn more about this see the Solidity documentation for
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/contracts.html#fallback-function[fallback
     * functions].
     */
    receive() external payable virtual {
        emit PaymentReceived(_msgSender(), msg.value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total shares held by payees.
     */
    function totalShares() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalShares;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of `token` already released. `token` should be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function totalReleased(IERC20Upgradeable token) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20TotalReleased[token];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of shares held by an account.
     */
    function shares(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _shares[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of `token` tokens already released to a payee. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function released(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20Released[token][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the address of the payee number `index`.
     */
    function payee(uint256 index) public view returns (address) {
        return _payees[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = address(this).balance + totalReleased();
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable `token` tokens. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function releasable(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = token.balanceOf(address(this)) + totalReleased(token);
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(token, account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of Ether they are owed, according to their percentage of the
     * total shares and their previous withdrawals.
     */
    function release(address payable account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _totalReleased is the sum of all values in _released.
        // If "_totalReleased += payment" does not overflow, then "_released[account] += payment" cannot overflow.
        _totalReleased += payment;
        unchecked {
            _released[account] += payment;
        }
        AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(account, payment);
        emit PaymentReleased(account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of `token` tokens they are owed, according to their
     * percentage of the total shares and their previous withdrawals. `token` must be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function release(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(token, account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _erc20TotalReleased[token] is the sum of all values in _erc20Released[token].
        // If "_erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment" does not overflow, then "_erc20Released[token][account] += payment"
        // cannot overflow.
        _erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment;
        unchecked {
            _erc20Released[token][account] += payment;
        }
        SafeERC20Upgradeable.safeTransfer(token, account, payment);
        emit ERC20PaymentReleased(token, account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev internal logic for computing the pending payment of an `account` given the token historical balances and
     * already released amounts.
     */
    function _pendingPayment(
        address account,
        uint256 totalReceived,
        uint256 alreadyReleased
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        return (totalReceived * _shares[account]) / _totalShares - alreadyReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a new payee to the contract.
     * @param account The address of the payee to add.
     * @param shares_ The number of shares owned by the payee.
     */
    function _addPayee(address account, uint256 shares_) private {
        require(account != address(0), "PaymentSplitter: account is the zero address");
        require(shares_ > 0, "PaymentSplitter: shares are 0");
        require(_shares[account] == 0, "PaymentSplitter: account already has shares");
        _payees.push(account);
        _shares[account] = shares_;
        _totalShares = _totalShares + shares_;
        emit PayeeAdded(account, shares_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[43] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initialized`
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initializing`
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
abstract contract ERC2981Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC2981Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC2981_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC2981_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }
    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981Upgradeable
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 _tokenId, uint256 _salePrice) public view virtual override returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[_tokenId];
        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }
        uint256 royaltyAmount = (_salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();
        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }
    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: invalid receiver");
        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: Invalid parameters");
        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[48] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/extensions/draft-IERC20Permit.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 */
interface IERC20PermitUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Sets `amount` as the allowance of `spender` over the caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `amount` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../extensions/draft-IERC20PermitUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20Upgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    function safePermit(
        IERC20PermitUpgradeable token,
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal {
        uint256 nonceBefore = token.nonces(owner);
        token.permit(owner, spender, value, deadline, v, r, s);
        uint256 nonceAfter = token.nonces(owner);
        require(nonceAfter == nonceBefore + 1, "SafeERC20: permit did not succeed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20Upgradeable token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/finance/PaymentSplitterUpgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
struct PhaseSettings {
    /// @dev phase supply. This can be released to public by ending the phase.
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the phase
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev wallet maximum for the phase
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev merkle root for the phase (if applicable, otherwise bytes32(0))
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev whether the phase is active
    bool isActive;
    /// @dev price for the phase (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct BaseSettings {
    /// @dev public sale supply. ending a phase will carry supply into this value
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev global wallet maximum across all phases (including public)
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the public sale
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev price for the public sale (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct SaleState {
    uint64 numPhases;
    mapping(uint256 => PhaseSettings) phases;
}
struct PaymentSplitterSettings {
    address[] payees;
    uint256[] shares;
}
struct RoyaltySettings {
    address royaltyAddress;
    uint96 royaltyAmount;
}
error SaleInactive();
error SoldOut();
error InvalidPrice();
error ExceedMaxPerWallet();
error InvalidProof();
error PhaseNotActive();
error NotAllowlisted();
error InvalidMintFunction();
error InvalidAirdrop();
error InvalidPhase();
error BurningNotAllowed();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-721 Multi-Phase Drop Contract
contract Bueno721Drop is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    PaymentSplitterUpgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public _baseTokenURI;
    SaleState public saleState;
    BaseSettings public baseSettings;
    address[] public withdrawAddresses;
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint64)) private amountMintedForPhase;
    bool public isPublicActive;
    bool private allowBurning;
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event PhasesActivated(uint256[] phaseIds, bool activatedPublic);
    event PhasesPaused(uint256[] phaseIds, bool pausedPublic);
    event PhaseEnded(uint256 phaseIds);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event PhaseSettingsUpdated(uint256 phaseId, PhaseSettings settings);
    event BaseSettingsUpdated(BaseSettings settings);
    event BaseURIUpdated(string baseURI);
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializerERC721A initializer {
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __Ownable_init();
        __PaymentSplitter_init(
            _paymentSplitterSettings.payees,
            _paymentSplitterSettings.shares
        );
        uint64 numPhases = uint64(_phases.length);
        uint256 supplyValidationCount = _baseSettings.maxSupply;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            saleState.phases[i] = _phases[i];
            supplyValidationCount += _phases[i].maxSupply;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        require(
            supplyValidationCount == _maxIntendedSupply,
            "Supply of all phases must equal maxIntendedSupply"
        );
        _baseTokenURI = _baseUri;
        withdrawAddresses = _paymentSplitterSettings.payees;
        saleState.numPhases = numPhases;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    // ========= EXTERNAL MINTING METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for an allowlisted phase
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that doesn't have an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhaseAllowlist(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            proof,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a non-allowlist phase.
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that has an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhase(uint256 phaseIndex, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     */
    function mintPublic(uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPublicMintConditions(
            quantity,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in all possible phases (including public sale)
     */
    function mintBatch(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        bytes32[][] calldata proofs,
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        uint64 publicQuantity
    ) external payable {
        uint256 phaseLength = phaseIndices.length;
        if (
            phaseLength > saleState.numPhases ||
            phaseLength != quantities.length ||
            phaseLength != proofs.length
        ) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        uint256 balance = msg.value;
        uint256 quantityToMint;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseLength; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmount;
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            uint64 quantity = quantities[i];
            bytes32[] calldata proof = proofs[i];
            PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
            uint256 priceForPhase = phase.price * quantity;
            // Since price is strictly checked in the _check* functions below,
            // we have an additional check here to ensure that the balance doesn't underflow
            if (balance < priceForPhase) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
            // if the phase has no allowlist, the merkleRoot will be zeroed out.
            if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
                updatedAmount = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            } else {
                updatedAmount = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    proof,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            }
            // quantity & phaseLength have a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            // balance underflow is checked above
            unchecked {
                saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
                amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmount;
                balance -= priceForPhase;
                quantityToMint += quantity;
                ++i;
            }
        }
        uint256 totalMintQuantity = quantityToMint;
        if (publicQuantity > 0) {
            _checkPublicMintConditions(publicQuantity, balance);
            // publicQuantity has a max value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                baseSettings.amountMinted += publicQuantity;
                totalMintQuantity += publicQuantity;
            }
        }
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        _mint(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(tokenId, true);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, tokenId);
    }
    // ========= OWNER METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for a particular phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the phase that is specified in the airdropper.
     */
    function airdropForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = phase.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            phase.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for the public phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the public phase.
     */
    function airdropPublic(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted +
                quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are active.
     * Public sale can be activated by setting `activatePublic` to true.
     */
    function activatePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool activatePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        // activate all the phases provided in phaseIndices
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndices[i]].isActive = true;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with activatePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be activated, but it does not pause it.
        if (activatePublic) {
            isPublicActive = true;
        }
        emit PhasesActivated(phaseIndices, activatePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are inactive (paused).
     * Public sale can be paused by setting `pausePublic` to true.
     * Pausing is separate from ending, since ending permanently closes the phase.
     */
    function pausePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool pausePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = false;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with pausePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be paused, but it does not pause it.
        if (pausePublic) {
            isPublicActive = false;
        }
        emit PhasesPaused(phaseIndices, pausePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Permanently closes a phase by capping the supply & releasing it
     */
    function endPhase(uint256 phaseIndex) public onlyOwner {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        // if the phase never had supply, there is nothing to do
        if (phase.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        // transfer the remaining supply into the base settings (used for public sale accounting)
        baseSettings.maxSupply += phase.maxSupply - phase.amountMinted;
        // remove the supply from the phase
        phase.maxSupply = 0;
        emit PhaseEnded(phaseIndex);
    }
    function endPhases(uint64[] calldata phaseIndices) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 phaseIndicesLength = phaseIndices.length;
        // ensure that phaseIndices argument will only ever be as large as the number of phases
        if (phaseIndicesLength > saleState.numPhases) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseIndicesLength; ) {
            endPhase(phaseIndices[i]);
            // phaseIndicesLength has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the minting rules for a particular phase
     * @dev supply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updatePhaseSettings(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        PhaseSettings calldata phase
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted;
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply;
        bool existingStatus = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex] = phase;
        // ensure that the amountMinted, maxSupply, and status values cannot be set
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = existingStatus;
        emit PhaseSettingsUpdated(phaseIndex, phase);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the the base minting settings
     * The global maxPerWallet setting applies to all phases
     * Pricing and other fields will apply to the public sale
     *
     * @dev maxSupply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updateBaseSettings(
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = baseSettings.maxSupply;
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        // ensure that the maxSupply & amountMinted value cannot be set
        baseSettings.maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        baseSettings.amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        emit BaseSettingsUpdated(_baseSettings);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Payment can be pulled via PaymentSplitter.release
     * this method is provided for convenience to release all payee funds
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numAddresses = withdrawAddresses.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numAddresses; ) {
            address payable withdrawAddress = payable(withdrawAddresses[i]);
            if (releasable(withdrawAddress) > 0) {
                release(withdrawAddress);
            }
            // numAddresses has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    function setBaseURI(string memory baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _baseTokenURI = baseURI;
        emit BaseURIUpdated(baseURI);
    }
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    // ========= VIEW METHODS =========
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // there should be a valid merkle root for the phase
        if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                phase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(wallet))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // the phase should not have a merkleRoot
        if (phase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPublicMintConditions(
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        if (!isPublicActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted + quantity;
        if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * baseSettings.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal view {
        if (
            baseSettings.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
            _numberMinted(wallet) + quantity > baseSettings.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
    }
    function getDataForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex
    ) external view returns (PhaseSettings memory) {
        return saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
    }
    function getMintBalance(address wallet) external view returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(wallet);
    }
    function getAmountMintedForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint64) {
        return amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
    }
    function getAmountMintedForOwner(
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory amountMintedPerPhase = new uint256[](
            saleState.numPhases + 1
        );
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < saleState.numPhases; ) {
            amountMintedPerPhase[i] = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][i];
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        amountMintedPerPhase[saleState.numPhases] = _numberMinted(wallet);
        return amountMintedPerPhase;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC721-_baseURI}.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _baseTokenURI;
    }
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721AUpgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981Upgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    // ========= OPERATOR FILTERER OVERRIDES =========
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    )
        public
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    function approve(
        address operator,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If not burned.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
                if (packed == 0) {
                    if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
                    // Invariant:
                    // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // before an unintialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                    //
                    // We can directly compare the packed value.
                    // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                    for (;;) {
                        unchecked {
                            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                        }
                        if (packed == 0) continue;
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise, the data exists and is not burned. We can skip the scan.
                // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
                // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
                return packed;
            }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck)
            if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "../IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Initializable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is Initializable {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant operatorFilterRegistry =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe)
        internal
        onlyInitializing
    {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isRegistered(address(this))) {
                if (subscribe) {
                    operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    if (subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy != address(0)) {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                    } else {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.register(address(this));
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
            // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
            // from an EOA.
            if (from == msg.sender) {
                _;
                return;
            }
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { ZoneInterface } from "../interfaces/ZoneInterface.sol";
import { ZoneInteractionErrors } from "../interfaces/ZoneInteractionErrors.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    PausableZoneEventsAndErrors
} from "./interfaces/PausableZoneEventsAndErrors.sol";
import { SeaportInterface } from "../interfaces/SeaportInterface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver,
    Order,
    OrderComponents,
    Fulfillment,
    Execution
} from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
import { PausableZoneInterface } from "./interfaces/PausableZoneInterface.sol";
/**
 * @title  PausableZone
 * @author cupOJoseph, BCLeFevre, ryanio
 * @notice PausableZone is a simple zone implementation that approves every
 *         order. It can be self-destructed by its controller to pause
 *         restricted orders that have it set as their zone.
 */
contract PausableZone is
    PausableZoneEventsAndErrors,
    ZoneInterface,
    PausableZoneInterface
{
    // Set an immutable controller that can pause the zone & update an operator.
    address internal immutable _controller;
    // Set an operator that can instruct the zone to cancel or execute orders.
    address public operator;
    /**
     * @dev Ensure that the caller is either the operator or controller.
     */
    modifier isOperator() {
        // Ensure that the caller is either the operator or the controller.
        if (msg.sender != operator && msg.sender != _controller) {
            revert InvalidOperator();
        }
        // Continue with function execution.
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Ensure that the caller is the controller.
     */
    modifier isController() {
        // Ensure that the caller is the controller.
        if (msg.sender != _controller) {
            revert InvalidController();
        }
        // Continue with function execution.
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Set the deployer as the controller of the zone.
     */
    constructor() {
        // Set the controller to the deployer.
        _controller = msg.sender;
        // Emit an event signifying that the zone is unpaused.
        emit Unpaused();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Check if a given order is currently valid.
     *
     * @dev This function is called by Seaport whenever extraData is not
     *      provided by the caller.
     *
     * @param orderHash The hash of the order.
     * @param caller    The caller in question.
     * @param offerer   The offerer in question.
     * @param zoneHash  The hash to provide upon calling the zone.
     *
     * @return validOrderMagicValue A magic value indicating if the order is
     *                              currently valid.
     */
    function isValidOrder(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        address offerer,
        bytes32 zoneHash
    ) external pure override returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue) {
        orderHash;
        caller;
        offerer;
        zoneHash;
        // Return the selector of isValidOrder as the magic value.
        validOrderMagicValue = ZoneInterface.isValidOrder.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Check if a given order including extraData is currently valid.
     *
     * @dev This function is called by Seaport whenever any extraData is
     *      provided by the caller.
     *
     * @param orderHash         The hash of the order.
     * @param caller            The caller in question.
     * @param order             The order in question.
     * @param priorOrderHashes  The order hashes of each order supplied prior to
     *                          the current order as part of a "match" variety
     *                          of order fulfillment.
     * @param criteriaResolvers The criteria resolvers corresponding to
     *                          the order.
     *
     * @return validOrderMagicValue A magic value indicating if the order is
     *                              currently valid.
     */
    function isValidOrderIncludingExtraData(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        AdvancedOrder calldata order,
        bytes32[] calldata priorOrderHashes,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers
    ) external pure override returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue) {
        orderHash;
        caller;
        order;
        priorOrderHashes;
        criteriaResolvers;
        // Return the selector of isValidOrder as the magic value.
        validOrderMagicValue = ZoneInterface.isValidOrder.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Cancel an arbitrary number of orders that have agreed to use the
     *         contract as their zone.
     *
     * @param seaport  The Seaport address.
     * @param orders   The orders to cancel.
     *
     * @return cancelled A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully cancelled.
     */
    function cancelOrders(
        SeaportInterface seaport,
        OrderComponents[] calldata orders
    ) external override isOperator returns (bool cancelled) {
        // Call cancel on Seaport and return its boolean value.
        cancelled = seaport.cancel(orders);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute an arbitrary number of matched orders, each with
     *         an arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration
     *         along with a set of fulfillments allocating offer components
     *         to consideration components.
     *
     * @param seaport      The Seaport address.
     * @param orders       The orders to match.
     * @param fulfillments An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                     to consideration components.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function executeMatchOrders(
        SeaportInterface seaport,
        Order[] calldata orders,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    )
        external
        payable
        override
        isOperator
        returns (Execution[] memory executions)
    {
        // Call matchOrders on Seaport and return the sequence of transfers
        // performed as part of matching the given orders.
        executions = seaport.matchOrders{ value: msg.value }(
            orders,
            fulfillments
        );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute an arbitrary number of matched advanced orders,
     *         each with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *         consideration along with a set of fulfillments allocating
     *         offer components to consideration components.
     *
     * @param seaport           The Seaport address.
     * @param orders            The orders to match.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function executeMatchAdvancedOrders(
        SeaportInterface seaport,
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata orders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    )
        external
        payable
        override
        isOperator
        returns (Execution[] memory executions)
    {
        // Call matchAdvancedOrders on Seaport and return the sequence of
        // transfers performed as part of matching the given orders.
        executions = seaport.matchAdvancedOrders{ value: msg.value }(
            orders,
            criteriaResolvers,
            fulfillments
        );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Pause this contract, safely stopping orders from using
     *         the contract as a zone. Restricted orders with this address as a
     *         zone will not be fulfillable unless the zone is redeployed to the
     *         same address.
     */
    function pause() external override isController {
        // Emit an event signifying that the zone is paused.
        emit Paused();
        // Destroy the zone, sending any ether to the transaction submitter.
        selfdestruct(payable(tx.origin));
    }
    /**
     * @notice Assign the given address with the ability to operate the zone.
     *
     * @param operatorToAssign The address to assign as the operator.
     */
    function assignOperator(address operatorToAssign)
        external
        override
        isController
    {
        // Ensure the operator being assigned is not the null address.
        require(
            operatorToAssign != address(0),
            "Operator can not be set to the null address"
        );
        // Set the given address as the new operator.
        operator = operatorToAssign;
        // Emit an event indicating the operator has been updated.
        emit OperatorUpdated(operator);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
interface ZoneInterface {
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a zone is successfully paused.
     */
    event Paused();
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a zone is successfully unpaused (created).
     */
    event Unpaused();
    // Called by Consideration whenever extraData is not provided by the caller.
    function isValidOrder(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        address offerer,
        bytes32 zoneHash
    ) external view returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue);
    // Called by Consideration whenever any extraData is provided by the caller.
    function isValidOrderIncludingExtraData(
        bytes32 orderHash,
        address caller,
        AdvancedOrder calldata order,
        bytes32[] calldata priorOrderHashes,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers
    ) external view returns (bytes4 validOrderMagicValue);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title ZoneInteractionErrors
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ZoneInteractionErrors contains errors related to zone interaction.
 */
interface ZoneInteractionErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fill an order that specifies
     *      a restricted submitter as its order type when not submitted by
     *      either the offerer or the order's zone or approved as valid by the
     *      zone in question via a staticcall to `isValidOrder`.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash for the invalid restricted order.
     */
    error InvalidRestrictedOrder(bytes32 orderHash);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @notice PausableZoneEventsAndErrors contains errors and events
 *         related to zone interaction.
 */
interface PausableZoneEventsAndErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a zone owner registers a new potential
     *      owner for that zone.
     *
     * @param newPotentialOwner The new potential owner of the zone.
     */
    event PotentialOwnerUpdated(address newPotentialOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever zone ownership is transferred.
     *
     * @param previousOwner The previous owner of the zone.
     * @param newOwner      The new owner of the zone.
     */
    event OwnershipTransferred(address previousOwner, address newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a new zone is created.
     *
     * @param zone The address of the zone.
     * @param salt The salt used to deploy the zone.
     */
    event ZoneCreated(address zone, bytes32 salt);
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a zone owner assigns a new pauser
     *
     * @param newPauser The new pausear of the zone.
     */
    event PauserUpdated(address newPauser);
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a zone owner assigns a new operator
     *
     * @param newOperator The new operator of the zone.
     */
    event OperatorUpdated(address newOperator);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to pause the zone
     *      while the caller is not the owner or pauser of the zone.
     */
    error InvalidPauser();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to call an operation
     *      while the caller is not the controller or operator of the zone.
     */
    error InvalidOperator();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to pause the zone or update the
     *      operator while the caller is not the controller of the zone.
     */
    error InvalidController();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to deploy a zone that is
     *      currently deployed.
     */
    error ZoneAlreadyExists(address zone);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    BasicOrderParameters,
    OrderComponents,
    Fulfillment,
    FulfillmentComponent,
    Execution,
    Order,
    AdvancedOrder,
    OrderStatus,
    CriteriaResolver
} from "../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title SeaportInterface
 * @author 0age
 * @custom:version 1.1
 * @notice Seaport is a generalized ETH/ERC20/ERC721/ERC1155 marketplace. It
 *         minimizes external calls to the greatest extent possible and provides
 *         lightweight methods for common routes as well as more flexible
 *         methods for composing advanced orders.
 *
 * @dev SeaportInterface contains all external function interfaces for Seaport.
 */
interface SeaportInterface {
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order offering an ERC721 token by supplying Ether (or
     *         the native token for the given chain) as consideration for the
     *         order. An arbitrary number of "additional recipients" may also be
     *         supplied which will each receive native tokens from the fulfiller
     *         as consideration.
     *
     * @param parameters Additional information on the fulfilled order. Note
     *                   that the offerer must first approve this contract (or
     *                   their preferred conduit if indicated by the order) for
     *                   their offered ERC721 token to be transferred.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillBasicOrder(BasicOrderParameters calldata parameters)
        external
        payable
        returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Fulfill an order with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *         consideration. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based orders or partial filling of orders (though
     *         filling the remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param order               The order to fulfill. Note that both the
     *                            offerer and the fulfiller must first approve
     *                            this contract (or the corresponding conduit if
     *                            indicated) to transfer any relevant tokens on
     *                            their behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                            `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155 tokens
     *                            as consideration.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Seaport.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillOrder(Order calldata order, bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey)
        external
        payable
        returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Fill an order, fully or partially, with an arbitrary number of
     *         items for offer and consideration alongside criteria resolvers
     *         containing specific token identifiers and associated proofs.
     *
     * @param advancedOrder       The order to fulfill along with the fraction
     *                            of the order to attempt to fill. Note that
     *                            both the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                            approve this contract (or their preferred
     *                            conduit if indicated by the order) to transfer
     *                            any relevant tokens on their behalf and that
     *                            contracts must implement `onERC1155Received`
     *                            to receive ERC1155 tokens as consideration.
     *                            Also note that all offer and consideration
     *                            components must have no remainder after
     *                            multiplication of the respective amount with
     *                            the supplied fraction for the partial fill to
     *                            be considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers   An array where each element contains a
     *                            reference to a specific offer or
     *                            consideration, a token identifier, and a proof
     *                            that the supplied token identifier is
     *                            contained in the merkle root held by the item
     *                            in question's criteria element. Note that an
     *                            empty criteria indicates that any
     *                            (transferable) token identifier on the token
     *                            in question is valid and that no associated
     *                            proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey A bytes32 value indicating what conduit, if
     *                            any, to source the fulfiller's token approvals
     *                            from. The zero hash signifies that no conduit
     *                            should be used, with direct approvals set on
     *                            Seaport.
     * @param recipient           The intended recipient for all received items,
     *                            with `address(0)` indicating that the caller
     *                            should receive the items.
     *
     * @return fulfilled A boolean indicating whether the order has been
     *                   successfully fulfilled.
     */
    function fulfillAdvancedOrder(
        AdvancedOrder calldata advancedOrder,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient
    ) external payable returns (bool fulfilled);
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, each with an arbitrary number
     *         of items for offer and consideration. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *         Note that this function does not support criteria-based orders or
     *         partial filling of orders (though filling the remainder of a
     *         partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders                    The orders to fulfill. Note that both
     *                                  the offerer and the fulfiller must first
     *                                  approve this contract (or the
     *                                  corresponding conduit if indicated) to
     *                                  transfer any relevant tokens on their
     *                                  behalf and that contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` to receive ERC1155
     *                                  tokens as consideration.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used, with
     *                                  direct approvals set on this contract.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Attempt to fill a group of orders, fully or partially, with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration per order
     *         alongside criteria resolvers containing specific token
     *         identifiers and associated proofs. Any order that is not
     *         currently active, has already been fully filled, or has been
     *         cancelled will be omitted. Remaining offer and consideration
     *         items will then be aggregated where possible as indicated by the
     *         supplied offer and consideration component arrays and aggregated
     *         items will be transferred to the fulfiller or to each intended
     *         recipient, respectively. Note that a failing item transfer or an
     *         issue with order formatting will cause the entire batch to fail.
     *
     * @param advancedOrders            The orders to fulfill along with the
     *                                  fraction of those orders to attempt to
     *                                  fill. Note that both the offerer and the
     *                                  fulfiller must first approve this
     *                                  contract (or their preferred conduit if
     *                                  indicated by the order) to transfer any
     *                                  relevant tokens on their behalf and that
     *                                  contracts must implement
     *                                  `onERC1155Received` to enable receipt of
     *                                  ERC1155 tokens as consideration. Also
     *                                  note that all offer and consideration
     *                                  components must have no remainder after
     *                                  multiplication of the respective amount
     *                                  with the supplied fraction for an
     *                                  order's partial fill amount to be
     *                                  considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers         An array where each element contains a
     *                                  reference to a specific offer or
     *                                  consideration, a token identifier, and a
     *                                  proof that the supplied token identifier
     *                                  is contained in the merkle root held by
     *                                  the item in question's criteria element.
     *                                  Note that an empty criteria indicates
     *                                  that any (transferable) token
     *                                  identifier on the token in question is
     *                                  valid and that no associated proof needs
     *                                  to be supplied.
     * @param offerFulfillments         An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which offer items to attempt
     *                                  to aggregate when preparing executions.
     * @param considerationFulfillments An array of FulfillmentComponent arrays
     *                                  indicating which consideration items to
     *                                  attempt to aggregate when preparing
     *                                  executions.
     * @param fulfillerConduitKey       A bytes32 value indicating what conduit,
     *                                  if any, to source the fulfiller's token
     *                                  approvals from. The zero hash signifies
     *                                  that no conduit should be used, with
     *                                  direct approvals set on this contract.
     * @param recipient                 The intended recipient for all received
     *                                  items, with `address(0)` indicating that
     *                                  the caller should receive the items.
     * @param maximumFulfilled          The maximum number of orders to fulfill.
     *
     * @return availableOrders An array of booleans indicating if each order
     *                         with an index corresponding to the index of the
     *                         returned boolean was fulfillable or not.
     * @return executions      An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                         transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                         orders.
     */
    function fulfillAvailableAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata advancedOrders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata offerFulfillments,
        FulfillmentComponent[][] calldata considerationFulfillments,
        bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey,
        address recipient,
        uint256 maximumFulfilled
    )
        external
        payable
        returns (bool[] memory availableOrders, Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of orders, each with an arbitrary
     *         number of items for offer and consideration along with as set of
     *         fulfillments allocating offer components to consideration
     *         components. Note that this function does not support
     *         criteria-based or partial filling of orders (though filling the
     *         remainder of a partially-filled order is supported).
     *
     * @param orders       The orders to match. Note that both the offerer and
     *                     fulfiller on each order must first approve this
     *                     contract (or their conduit if indicated by the order)
     *                     to transfer any relevant tokens on their behalf and
     *                     each consideration recipient must implement
     *                     `onERC1155Received` to enable ERC1155 token receipt.
     * @param fulfillments An array of elements allocating offer components to
     *                     consideration components. Note that each
     *                     consideration component must be fully met for the
     *                     match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchOrders(
        Order[] calldata orders,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Match an arbitrary number of full or partial orders, each with an
     *         arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration, supplying
     *         criteria resolvers containing specific token identifiers and
     *         associated proofs as well as fulfillments allocating offer
     *         components to consideration components.
     *
     * @param orders            The advanced orders to match. Note that both the
     *                          offerer and fulfiller on each order must first
     *                          approve this contract (or a preferred conduit if
     *                          indicated by the order) to transfer any relevant
     *                          tokens on their behalf and each consideration
     *                          recipient must implement `onERC1155Received` in
     *                          order to receive ERC1155 tokens. Also note that
     *                          the offer and consideration components for each
     *                          order must have no remainder after multiplying
     *                          the respective amount with the supplied fraction
     *                          in order for the group of partial fills to be
     *                          considered valid.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root. Note that
     *                          an empty root indicates that any (transferable)
     *                          token identifier is valid and that no associated
     *                          proof needs to be supplied.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components. Note that each
     *                          consideration component must be fully met in
     *                          order for the match operation to be valid.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function matchAdvancedOrders(
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata orders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Cancel an arbitrary number of orders. Note that only the offerer
     *         or the zone of a given order may cancel it. Callers should ensure
     *         that the intended order was cancelled by calling `getOrderStatus`
     *         and confirming that `isCancelled` returns `true`.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to cancel.
     *
     * @return cancelled A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully cancelled.
     */
    function cancel(OrderComponents[] calldata orders)
        external
        returns (bool cancelled);
    /**
     * @notice Validate an arbitrary number of orders, thereby registering their
     *         signatures as valid and allowing the fulfiller to skip signature
     *         verification on fulfillment. Note that validated orders may still
     *         be unfulfillable due to invalid item amounts or other factors;
     *         callers should determine whether validated orders are fulfillable
     *         by simulating the fulfillment call prior to execution. Also note
     *         that anyone can validate a signed order, but only the offerer can
     *         validate an order without supplying a signature.
     *
     * @param orders The orders to validate.
     *
     * @return validated A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully validated.
     */
    function validate(Order[] calldata orders)
        external
        returns (bool validated);
    /**
     * @notice Cancel all orders from a given offerer with a given zone in bulk
     *         by incrementing a counter. Note that only the offerer may
     *         increment the counter.
     *
     * @return newCounter The new counter.
     */
    function incrementCounter() external returns (uint256 newCounter);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the order hash for a given order.
     *
     * @param order The components of the order.
     *
     * @return orderHash The order hash.
     */
    function getOrderHash(OrderComponents calldata order)
        external
        view
        returns (bytes32 orderHash);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the status of a given order by hash, including whether
     *         the order has been cancelled or validated and the fraction of the
     *         order that has been filled.
     *
     * @param orderHash The order hash in question.
     *
     * @return isValidated A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been validated (i.e. previously approved or
     *                     partially filled).
     * @return isCancelled A boolean indicating whether the order in question
     *                     has been cancelled.
     * @return totalFilled The total portion of the order that has been filled
     *                     (i.e. the "numerator").
     * @return totalSize   The total size of the order that is either filled or
     *                     unfilled (i.e. the "denominator").
     */
    function getOrderStatus(bytes32 orderHash)
        external
        view
        returns (
            bool isValidated,
            bool isCancelled,
            uint256 totalFilled,
            uint256 totalSize
        );
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the current counter for a given offerer.
     *
     * @param offerer The offerer in question.
     *
     * @return counter The current counter.
     */
    function getCounter(address offerer)
        external
        view
        returns (uint256 counter);
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve configuration information for this contract.
     *
     * @return version           The contract version.
     * @return domainSeparator   The domain separator for this contract.
     * @return conduitController The conduit Controller set for this contract.
     */
    function information()
        external
        view
        returns (
            string memory version,
            bytes32 domainSeparator,
            address conduitController
        );
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the name of this contract.
     *
     * @return contractName The name of this contract.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory contractName);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    OrderType,
    BasicOrderType,
    ItemType,
    Side
} from "./ConsiderationEnums.sol";
/**
 * @dev An order contains eleven components: an offerer, a zone (or account that
 *      can cancel the order or restrict who can fulfill the order depending on
 *      the type), the order type (specifying partial fill support as well as
 *      restricted order status), the start and end time, a hash that will be
 *      provided to the zone when validating restricted orders, a salt, a key
 *      corresponding to a given conduit, a counter, and an arbitrary number of
 *      offer items that can be spent along with consideration items that must
 *      be received by their respective recipient.
 */
struct OrderComponents {
    address offerer;
    address zone;
    OfferItem[] offer;
    ConsiderationItem[] consideration;
    OrderType orderType;
    uint256 startTime;
    uint256 endTime;
    bytes32 zoneHash;
    uint256 salt;
    bytes32 conduitKey;
    uint256 counter;
}
/**
 * @dev An offer item has five components: an item type (ETH or other native
 *      tokens, ERC20, ERC721, and ERC1155, as well as criteria-based ERC721 and
 *      ERC1155), a token address, a dual-purpose "identifierOrCriteria"
 *      component that will either represent a tokenId or a merkle root
 *      depending on the item type, and a start and end amount that support
 *      increasing or decreasing amounts over the duration of the respective
 *      order.
 */
struct OfferItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifierOrCriteria;
    uint256 startAmount;
    uint256 endAmount;
}
/**
 * @dev A consideration item has the same five components as an offer item and
 *      an additional sixth component designating the required recipient of the
 *      item.
 */
struct ConsiderationItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifierOrCriteria;
    uint256 startAmount;
    uint256 endAmount;
    address payable recipient;
}
/**
 * @dev A spent item is translated from a utilized offer item and has four
 *      components: an item type (ETH or other native tokens, ERC20, ERC721, and
 *      ERC1155), a token address, a tokenId, and an amount.
 */
struct SpentItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifier;
    uint256 amount;
}
/**
 * @dev A received item is translated from a utilized consideration item and has
 *      the same four components as a spent item, as well as an additional fifth
 *      component designating the required recipient of the item.
 */
struct ReceivedItem {
    ItemType itemType;
    address token;
    uint256 identifier;
    uint256 amount;
    address payable recipient;
}
/**
 * @dev For basic orders involving ETH / native / ERC20 <=> ERC721 / ERC1155
 *      matching, a group of six functions may be called that only requires a
 *      subset of the usual order arguments. Note the use of a "basicOrderType"
 *      enum; this represents both the usual order type as well as the "route"
 *      of the basic order (a simple derivation function for the basic order
 *      type is `basicOrderType = orderType + (4 * basicOrderRoute)`.)
 */
struct BasicOrderParameters {
    // calldata offset
    address considerationToken; // 0x24
    uint256 considerationIdentifier; // 0x44
    uint256 considerationAmount; // 0x64
    address payable offerer; // 0x84
    address zone; // 0xa4
    address offerToken; // 0xc4
    uint256 offerIdentifier; // 0xe4
    uint256 offerAmount; // 0x104
    BasicOrderType basicOrderType; // 0x124
    uint256 startTime; // 0x144
    uint256 endTime; // 0x164
    bytes32 zoneHash; // 0x184
    uint256 salt; // 0x1a4
    bytes32 offererConduitKey; // 0x1c4
    bytes32 fulfillerConduitKey; // 0x1e4
    uint256 totalOriginalAdditionalRecipients; // 0x204
    AdditionalRecipient[] additionalRecipients; // 0x224
    bytes signature; // 0x244
    // Total length, excluding dynamic array data: 0x264 (580)
}
/**
 * @dev Basic orders can supply any number of additional recipients, with the
 *      implied assumption that they are supplied from the offered ETH (or other
 *      native token) or ERC20 token for the order.
 */
struct AdditionalRecipient {
    uint256 amount;
    address payable recipient;
}
/**
 * @dev The full set of order components, with the exception of the counter,
 *      must be supplied when fulfilling more sophisticated orders or groups of
 *      orders. The total number of original consideration items must also be
 *      supplied, as the caller may specify additional consideration items.
 */
struct OrderParameters {
    address offerer; // 0x00
    address zone; // 0x20
    OfferItem[] offer; // 0x40
    ConsiderationItem[] consideration; // 0x60
    OrderType orderType; // 0x80
    uint256 startTime; // 0xa0
    uint256 endTime; // 0xc0
    bytes32 zoneHash; // 0xe0
    uint256 salt; // 0x100
    bytes32 conduitKey; // 0x120
    uint256 totalOriginalConsiderationItems; // 0x140
    // offer.length                          // 0x160
}
/**
 * @dev Orders require a signature in addition to the other order parameters.
 */
struct Order {
    OrderParameters parameters;
    bytes signature;
}
/**
 * @dev Advanced orders include a numerator (i.e. a fraction to attempt to fill)
 *      and a denominator (the total size of the order) in addition to the
 *      signature and other order parameters. It also supports an optional field
 *      for supplying extra data; this data will be included in a staticcall to
 *      `isValidOrderIncludingExtraData` on the zone for the order if the order
 *      type is restricted and the offerer or zone are not the caller.
 */
struct AdvancedOrder {
    OrderParameters parameters;
    uint120 numerator;
    uint120 denominator;
    bytes signature;
    bytes extraData;
}
/**
 * @dev Orders can be validated (either explicitly via `validate`, or as a
 *      consequence of a full or partial fill), specifically cancelled (they can
 *      also be cancelled in bulk via incrementing a per-zone counter), and
 *      partially or fully filled (with the fraction filled represented by a
 *      numerator and denominator).
 */
struct OrderStatus {
    bool isValidated;
    bool isCancelled;
    uint120 numerator;
    uint120 denominator;
}
/**
 * @dev A criteria resolver specifies an order, side (offer vs. consideration),
 *      and item index. It then provides a chosen identifier (i.e. tokenId)
 *      alongside a merkle proof demonstrating the identifier meets the required
 *      criteria.
 */
struct CriteriaResolver {
    uint256 orderIndex;
    Side side;
    uint256 index;
    uint256 identifier;
    bytes32[] criteriaProof;
}
/**
 * @dev A fulfillment is applied to a group of orders. It decrements a series of
 *      offer and consideration items, then generates a single execution
 *      element. A given fulfillment can be applied to as many offer and
 *      consideration items as desired, but must contain at least one offer and
 *      at least one consideration that match. The fulfillment must also remain
 *      consistent on all key parameters across all offer items (same offerer,
 *      token, type, tokenId, and conduit preference) as well as across all
 *      consideration items (token, type, tokenId, and recipient).
 */
struct Fulfillment {
    FulfillmentComponent[] offerComponents;
    FulfillmentComponent[] considerationComponents;
}
/**
 * @dev Each fulfillment component contains one index referencing a specific
 *      order and another referencing a specific offer or consideration item.
 */
struct FulfillmentComponent {
    uint256 orderIndex;
    uint256 itemIndex;
}
/**
 * @dev An execution is triggered once all consideration items have been zeroed
 *      out. It sends the item in question from the offerer to the item's
 *      recipient, optionally sourcing approvals from either this contract
 *      directly or from the offerer's chosen conduit if one is specified. An
 *      execution is not provided as an argument, but rather is derived via
 *      orders, criteria resolvers, and fulfillments (where the total number of
 *      executions will be less than or equal to the total number of indicated
 *      fulfillments) and returned as part of `matchOrders`.
 */
struct Execution {
    ReceivedItem item;
    address offerer;
    bytes32 conduitKey;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { SeaportInterface } from "../../interfaces/SeaportInterface.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    AdvancedOrder,
    CriteriaResolver,
    Order,
    OrderComponents,
    Fulfillment,
    Execution
} from "../../lib/ConsiderationStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title  PausableZone
 * @author cupOJoseph, BCLeFevre, ryanio
 * @notice PausableZone is a simple zone implementation that approves every
 *         order. It can be self-destructed by its controller to pause
 *         restricted orders that have it set as their zone.
 */
interface PausableZoneInterface {
    /**
     * @notice Cancel an arbitrary number of orders that have agreed to use the
     *         contract as their zone.
     *
     * @param seaport  The Seaport address.
     * @param orders   The orders to cancel.
     *
     * @return cancelled A boolean indicating whether the supplied orders have
     *                   been successfully cancelled.
     */
    function cancelOrders(
        SeaportInterface seaport,
        OrderComponents[] calldata orders
    ) external returns (bool cancelled);
    /**
     * @notice Execute an arbitrary number of matched orders, each with
     *         an arbitrary number of items for offer and consideration
     *         along with a set of fulfillments allocating offer components
     *         to consideration components.
     *
     * @param seaport      The Seaport address.
     * @param orders       The orders to match.
     * @param fulfillments An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                     to consideration components.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function executeMatchOrders(
        SeaportInterface seaport,
        Order[] calldata orders,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Execute an arbitrary number of matched advanced orders,
     *         each with an arbitrary number of items for offer and
     *         consideration along with a set of fulfillments allocating
     *         offer components to consideration components.
     *
     * @param seaport           The Seaport address.
     * @param orders            The orders to match.
     * @param criteriaResolvers An array where each element contains a reference
     *                          to a specific order as well as that order's
     *                          offer or consideration, a token identifier, and
     *                          a proof that the supplied token identifier is
     *                          contained in the order's merkle root.
     * @param fulfillments      An array of elements allocating offer components
     *                          to consideration components.
     *
     * @return executions An array of elements indicating the sequence of
     *                    transfers performed as part of matching the given
     *                    orders.
     */
    function executeMatchAdvancedOrders(
        SeaportInterface seaport,
        AdvancedOrder[] calldata orders,
        CriteriaResolver[] calldata criteriaResolvers,
        Fulfillment[] calldata fulfillments
    ) external payable returns (Execution[] memory executions);
    /**
     * @notice Pause this contract, safely stopping orders from using
     *         the contract as a zone. Restricted orders with this address as a
     *         zone will not be fulfillable unless the zone is redeployed to the
     *         same address.
     */
    function pause() external;
    /**
     * @notice Assign the given address with the ability to operate the zone.
     *
     * @param operatorToAssign The address to assign as the operator.
     */
    function assignOperator(address operatorToAssign) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
enum OrderType {
    // 0: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    FULL_OPEN,
    // 1: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 2: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 3: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    PARTIAL_RESTRICTED
}
// prettier-ignore
enum BasicOrderType {
    // 0: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_FULL_OPEN,
    // 1: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 2: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 3: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 4: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_FULL_OPEN,
    // 5: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 6: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 7: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ETH_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 8: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_FULL_OPEN,
    // 9: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 10: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 11: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC721_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 12: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_FULL_OPEN,
    // 13: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 14: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 15: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 16: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_FULL_OPEN,
    // 17: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 18: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 19: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC721_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED,
    // 20: no partial fills, anyone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_FULL_OPEN,
    // 21: partial fills supported, anyone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_OPEN,
    // 22: no partial fills, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_FULL_RESTRICTED,
    // 23: partial fills supported, only offerer or zone can execute
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20_PARTIAL_RESTRICTED
}
// prettier-ignore
enum BasicOrderRouteType {
    // 0: provide Ether (or other native token) to receive offered ERC721 item.
    ETH_TO_ERC721,
    // 1: provide Ether (or other native token) to receive offered ERC1155 item.
    ETH_TO_ERC1155,
    // 2: provide ERC20 item to receive offered ERC721 item.
    ERC20_TO_ERC721,
    // 3: provide ERC20 item to receive offered ERC1155 item.
    ERC20_TO_ERC1155,
    // 4: provide ERC721 item to receive offered ERC20 item.
    ERC721_TO_ERC20,
    // 5: provide ERC1155 item to receive offered ERC20 item.
    ERC1155_TO_ERC20
}
// prettier-ignore
enum ItemType {
    // 0: ETH on mainnet, MATIC on polygon, etc.
    NATIVE,
    // 1: ERC20 items (ERC777 and ERC20 analogues could also technically work)
    ERC20,
    // 2: ERC721 items
    ERC721,
    // 3: ERC1155 items
    ERC1155,
    // 4: ERC721 items where a number of tokenIds are supported
    ERC721_WITH_CRITERIA,
    // 5: ERC1155 items where a number of ids are supported
    ERC1155_WITH_CRITERIA
}
// prettier-ignore
enum Side {
    // 0: Items that can be spent
    OFFER,
    // 1: Items that must be received
    CONSIDERATION
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { ConduitInterface } from "../interfaces/ConduitInterface.sol";
import { ConduitItemType } from "./lib/ConduitEnums.sol";
import { TokenTransferrer } from "../lib/TokenTransferrer.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConduitTransfer,
    ConduitBatch1155Transfer
} from "./lib/ConduitStructs.sol";
import "./lib/ConduitConstants.sol";
/**
 * @title Conduit
 * @author 0age
 * @notice This contract serves as an originator for "proxied" transfers. Each
 *         conduit is deployed and controlled by a "conduit controller" that can
 *         add and remove "channels" or contracts that can instruct the conduit
 *         to transfer approved ERC20/721/1155 tokens. *IMPORTANT NOTE: each
 *         conduit has an owner that can arbitrarily add or remove channels, and
 *         a malicious or negligent owner can add a channel that allows for any
 *         approved ERC20/721/1155 tokens to be taken immediately — be extremely
 *         cautious with what conduits you give token approvals to!*
 */
contract Conduit is ConduitInterface, TokenTransferrer {
    // Set deployer as an immutable controller that can update channel statuses.
    address private immutable _controller;
    // Track the status of each channel.
    mapping(address => bool) private _channels;
    /**
     * @notice Ensure that the caller is currently registered as an open channel
     *         on the conduit.
     */
    modifier onlyOpenChannel() {
        // Utilize assembly to access channel storage mapping directly.
        assembly {
            // Write the caller to scratch space.
            mstore(ChannelKey_channel_ptr, caller())
            // Write the storage slot for _channels to scratch space.
            mstore(ChannelKey_slot_ptr, _channels.slot)
            // Derive the position in storage of _channels[msg.sender]
            // and check if the stored value is zero.
            if iszero(
                sload(keccak256(ChannelKey_channel_ptr, ChannelKey_length))
            ) {
                // The caller is not an open channel; revert with
                // ChannelClosed(caller). First, set error signature in memory.
                mstore(ChannelClosed_error_ptr, ChannelClosed_error_signature)
                // Next, set the caller as the argument.
                mstore(ChannelClosed_channel_ptr, caller())
                // Finally, revert, returning full custom error with argument.
                revert(ChannelClosed_error_ptr, ChannelClosed_error_length)
            }
        }
        // Continue with function execution.
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @notice In the constructor, set the deployer as the controller.
     */
    constructor() {
        // Set the deployer as the controller.
        _controller = msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of ERC20/721/1155 transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function. Note that channels
     *         are expected to implement reentrancy protection if desired, and
     *         that cross-channel reentrancy may be possible if the conduit has
     *         multiple open channels at once. Also note that channels are
     *         expected to implement checks against transferring any zero-amount
     *         items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param transfers The ERC20/721/1155 transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function execute(ConduitTransfer[] calldata transfers)
        external
        override
        onlyOpenChannel
        returns (bytes4 magicValue)
    {
        // Retrieve the total number of transfers and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalStandardTransfers = transfers.length;
        // Iterate over each transfer.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalStandardTransfers; ) {
            // Retrieve the transfer in question and perform the transfer.
            _transfer(transfers[i]);
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Return a magic value indicating that the transfers were performed.
        magicValue = this.execute.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of batch 1155 item transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function. Note that channels
     *         are expected to implement reentrancy protection if desired, and
     *         that cross-channel reentrancy may be possible if the conduit has
     *         multiple open channels at once. Also note that channels are
     *         expected to implement checks against transferring any zero-amount
     *         items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param batchTransfers The 1155 batch item transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the item transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeBatch1155(
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batchTransfers
    ) external override onlyOpenChannel returns (bytes4 magicValue) {
        // Perform 1155 batch transfers. Note that memory should be considered
        // entirely corrupted from this point forward.
        _performERC1155BatchTransfers(batchTransfers);
        // Return a magic value indicating that the transfers were performed.
        magicValue = this.executeBatch1155.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of transfers, both single ERC20/721/1155 item
     *         transfers as well as batch 1155 item transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function. Note that channels
     *         are expected to implement reentrancy protection if desired, and
     *         that cross-channel reentrancy may be possible if the conduit has
     *         multiple open channels at once. Also note that channels are
     *         expected to implement checks against transferring any zero-amount
     *         items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param standardTransfers The ERC20/721/1155 item transfers to perform.
     * @param batchTransfers    The 1155 batch item transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the item transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeWithBatch1155(
        ConduitTransfer[] calldata standardTransfers,
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batchTransfers
    ) external override onlyOpenChannel returns (bytes4 magicValue) {
        // Retrieve the total number of transfers and place on the stack.
        uint256 totalStandardTransfers = standardTransfers.length;
        // Iterate over each standard transfer.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalStandardTransfers; ) {
            // Retrieve the transfer in question and perform the transfer.
            _transfer(standardTransfers[i]);
            // Skip overflow check as for loop is indexed starting at zero.
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // Perform 1155 batch transfers. Note that memory should be considered
        // entirely corrupted from this point forward aside from the free memory
        // pointer having the default value.
        _performERC1155BatchTransfers(batchTransfers);
        // Return a magic value indicating that the transfers were performed.
        magicValue = this.executeWithBatch1155.selector;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Open or close a given channel. Only callable by the controller.
     *
     * @param channel The channel to open or close.
     * @param isOpen  The status of the channel (either open or closed).
     */
    function updateChannel(address channel, bool isOpen) external override {
        // Ensure that the caller is the controller of this contract.
        if (msg.sender != _controller) {
            revert InvalidController();
        }
        // Ensure that the channel does not already have the indicated status.
        if (_channels[channel] == isOpen) {
            revert ChannelStatusAlreadySet(channel, isOpen);
        }
        // Update the status of the channel.
        _channels[channel] = isOpen;
        // Emit a corresponding event.
        emit ChannelUpdated(channel, isOpen);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer a given ERC20/721/1155 item. Note that
     *      channels are expected to implement checks against transferring any
     *      zero-amount items if that constraint is desired.
     *
     * @param item The ERC20/721/1155 item to transfer.
     */
    function _transfer(ConduitTransfer calldata item) internal {
        // Determine the transfer method based on the respective item type.
        if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC20) {
            // Transfer ERC20 token. Note that item.identifier is ignored and
            // therefore ERC20 transfer items are potentially malleable — this
            // check should be performed by the calling channel if a constraint
            // on item malleability is desired.
            _performERC20Transfer(item.token, item.from, item.to, item.amount);
        } else if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC721) {
            // Ensure that exactly one 721 item is being transferred.
            if (item.amount != 1) {
                revert InvalidERC721TransferAmount();
            }
            // Transfer ERC721 token.
            _performERC721Transfer(
                item.token,
                item.from,
                item.to,
                item.identifier
            );
        } else if (item.itemType == ConduitItemType.ERC1155) {
            // Transfer ERC1155 token.
            _performERC1155Transfer(
                item.token,
                item.from,
                item.to,
                item.identifier,
                item.amount
            );
        } else {
            // Throw with an error.
            revert InvalidItemType();
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// prettier-ignore
import {
    ConduitTransfer,
    ConduitBatch1155Transfer
} from "../conduit/lib/ConduitStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title ConduitInterface
 * @author 0age
 * @notice ConduitInterface contains all external function interfaces, events,
 *         and errors for conduit contracts.
 */
interface ConduitInterface {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to execute transfers using a
     *      caller that does not have an open channel.
     */
    error ChannelClosed(address channel);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to update a channel to the
     *      current status of that channel.
     */
    error ChannelStatusAlreadySet(address channel, bool isOpen);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to execute a transfer for an
     *      item that does not have an ERC20/721/1155 item type.
     */
    error InvalidItemType();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to update the status of a
     *      channel from a caller that is not the conduit controller.
     */
    error InvalidController();
    /**
     * @dev Emit an event whenever a channel is opened or closed.
     *
     * @param channel The channel that has been updated.
     * @param open    A boolean indicating whether the conduit is open or not.
     */
    event ChannelUpdated(address indexed channel, bool open);
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of ERC20/721/1155 transfers. Only a caller
     *         with an open channel can call this function.
     *
     * @param transfers The ERC20/721/1155 transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function execute(ConduitTransfer[] calldata transfers)
        external
        returns (bytes4 magicValue);
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of batch 1155 transfers. Only a caller with an
     *         open channel can call this function.
     *
     * @param batch1155Transfers The 1155 batch transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeBatch1155(
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batch1155Transfers
    ) external returns (bytes4 magicValue);
    /**
     * @notice Execute a sequence of transfers, both single and batch 1155. Only
     *         a caller with an open channel can call this function.
     *
     * @param standardTransfers  The ERC20/721/1155 transfers to perform.
     * @param batch1155Transfers The 1155 batch transfers to perform.
     *
     * @return magicValue A magic value indicating that the transfers were
     *                    performed successfully.
     */
    function executeWithBatch1155(
        ConduitTransfer[] calldata standardTransfers,
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batch1155Transfers
    ) external returns (bytes4 magicValue);
    /**
     * @notice Open or close a given channel. Only callable by the controller.
     *
     * @param channel The channel to open or close.
     * @param isOpen  The status of the channel (either open or closed).
     */
    function updateChannel(address channel, bool isOpen) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
enum ConduitItemType {
    NATIVE, // unused
    ERC20,
    ERC721,
    ERC1155
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import "./TokenTransferrerConstants.sol";
// prettier-ignore
import {
    TokenTransferrerErrors
} from "../interfaces/TokenTransferrerErrors.sol";
import { ConduitBatch1155Transfer } from "../conduit/lib/ConduitStructs.sol";
/**
 * @title TokenTransferrer
 * @author 0age
 * @custom:coauthor d1ll0n
 * @custom:coauthor transmissions11
 * @notice TokenTransferrer is a library for performing optimized ERC20, ERC721,
 *         ERC1155, and batch ERC1155 transfers, used by both Seaport as well as
 *         by conduits deployed by the ConduitController. Use great caution when
 *         considering these functions for use in other codebases, as there are
 *         significant side effects and edge cases that need to be thoroughly
 *         understood and carefully addressed.
 */
contract TokenTransferrer is TokenTransferrerErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC20 tokens from a given originator
     *      to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on the
     *      contract performing the transfer.
     *
     * @param token      The ERC20 token to transfer.
     * @param from       The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount to transfer.
     */
    function _performERC20Transfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform an optimized ERC20 token transfer.
        assembly {
            // The free memory pointer memory slot will be used when populating
            // call data for the transfer; read the value and restore it later.
            let memPointer := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            // Write call data into memory, starting with function selector.
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_sig_ptr, ERC20_transferFrom_signature)
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_from_ptr, from)
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_to_ptr, to)
            mstore(ERC20_transferFrom_amount_ptr, amount)
            // Make call & copy up to 32 bytes of return data to scratch space.
            // Scratch space does not need to be cleared ahead of time, as the
            // subsequent check will ensure that either at least a full word of
            // return data is received (in which case it will be overwritten) or
            // that no data is received (in which case scratch space will be
            // ignored) on a successful call to the given token.
            let callStatus := call(
                gas(),
                token,
                0,
                ERC20_transferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC20_transferFrom_length,
                0,
                OneWord
            )
            // Determine whether transfer was successful using status & result.
            let success := and(
                // Set success to whether the call reverted, if not check it
                // either returned exactly 1 (can't just be non-zero data), or
                // had no return data.
                or(
                    and(eq(mload(0), 1), gt(returndatasize(), 31)),
                    iszero(returndatasize())
                ),
                callStatus
            )
            // Handle cases where either the transfer failed or no data was
            // returned. Group these, as most transfers will succeed with data.
            // Equivalent to `or(iszero(success), iszero(returndatasize()))`
            // but after it's inverted for JUMPI this expression is cheaper.
            if iszero(and(success, iszero(iszero(returndatasize())))) {
                // If the token has no code or the transfer failed: Equivalent
                // to `or(iszero(success), iszero(extcodesize(token)))` but
                // after it's inverted for JUMPI this expression is cheaper.
                if iszero(and(iszero(iszero(extcodesize(token))), success)) {
                    // If the transfer failed:
                    if iszero(success) {
                        // If it was due to a revert:
                        if iszero(callStatus) {
                            // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as
                            // sufficient gas remains to do so:
                            if returndatasize() {
                                // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to
                                // copy returndata while expanding memory where
                                // necessary. Start by computing the word size
                                // of returndata and allocated memory. Round up
                                // to the nearest full word.
                                let returnDataWords := div(
                                    add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                                    OneWord
                                )
                                // Note: use the free memory pointer in place of
                                // msize() to work around a Yul warning that
                                // prevents accessing msize directly when the IR
                                // pipeline is activated.
                                let msizeWords := div(memPointer, OneWord)
                                // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                                let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                                // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                                if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                                    cost := add(
                                        cost,
                                        add(
                                            mul(
                                                sub(
                                                    returnDataWords,
                                                    msizeWords
                                                ),
                                                CostPerWord
                                            ),
                                            div(
                                                sub(
                                                    mul(
                                                        returnDataWords,
                                                        returnDataWords
                                                    ),
                                                    mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                                ),
                                                MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                            )
                                        )
                                    )
                                }
                                // Finally, add a small constant and compare to
                                // gas remaining; bubble up the revert data if
                                // enough gas is still available.
                                if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                                    // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite
                                    // existing memory.
                                    returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                                    // Revert, specifying memory region with
                                    // copied returndata.
                                    revert(0, returndatasize())
                                }
                            }
                            // Otherwise revert with a generic error message.
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                            )
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr,
                                token
                            )
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr,
                                from
                            )
                            mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr, to)
                            mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr, 0)
                            mstore(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr,
                                amount
                            )
                            revert(
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                                TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length
                            )
                        }
                        // Otherwise revert with a message about the token
                        // returning false or non-compliant return values.
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_sig_ptr,
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_signature
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_token_ptr,
                            token
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_from_ptr,
                            from
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_to_ptr,
                            to
                        )
                        mstore(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_amount_ptr,
                            amount
                        )
                        revert(
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_sig_ptr,
                            BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_length
                        )
                    }
                    // Otherwise, revert with error about token not having code:
                    mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                    mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                    revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
                }
                // Otherwise, the token just returned no data despite the call
                // having succeeded; no need to optimize for this as it's not
                // technically ERC20 compliant.
            }
            // Restore the original free memory pointer.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, memPointer)
            // Restore the zero slot to zero.
            mstore(ZeroSlot, 0)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer an ERC721 token from a given
     *      originator to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on
     *      the contract performing the transfer. Note that this function does
     *      not check whether the receiver can accept the ERC721 token (i.e. it
     *      does not use `safeTransferFrom`).
     *
     * @param token      The ERC721 token to transfer.
     * @param from       The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier The tokenId to transfer.
     */
    function _performERC721Transfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform an optimized ERC721 token transfer.
        assembly {
            // If the token has no code, revert.
            if iszero(extcodesize(token)) {
                mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
            }
            // The free memory pointer memory slot will be used when populating
            // call data for the transfer; read the value and restore it later.
            let memPointer := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            // Write call data to memory starting with function selector.
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_sig_ptr, ERC721_transferFrom_signature)
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_from_ptr, from)
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_to_ptr, to)
            mstore(ERC721_transferFrom_id_ptr, identifier)
            // Perform the call, ignoring return data.
            let success := call(
                gas(),
                token,
                0,
                ERC721_transferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC721_transferFrom_length,
                0,
                0
            )
            // If the transfer reverted:
            if iszero(success) {
                // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as sufficient
                // gas remains to do so:
                if returndatasize() {
                    // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to copy
                    // returndata while expanding memory where necessary. Start
                    // by computing word size of returndata & allocated memory.
                    // Round up to the nearest full word.
                    let returnDataWords := div(
                        add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                        OneWord
                    )
                    // Note: use the free memory pointer in place of msize() to
                    // work around a Yul warning that prevents accessing msize
                    // directly when the IR pipeline is activated.
                    let msizeWords := div(memPointer, OneWord)
                    // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                    let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                    // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                    if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                        cost := add(
                            cost,
                            add(
                                mul(
                                    sub(returnDataWords, msizeWords),
                                    CostPerWord
                                ),
                                div(
                                    sub(
                                        mul(returnDataWords, returnDataWords),
                                        mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                    ),
                                    MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                )
                            )
                        )
                    }
                    // Finally, add a small constant and compare to gas
                    // remaining; bubble up the revert data if enough gas is
                    // still available.
                    if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                        // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite existing memory.
                        returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                        // Revert, giving memory region with copied returndata.
                        revert(0, returndatasize())
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise revert with a generic error message.
                mstore(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                )
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr, token)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr, from)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr, to)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr, identifier)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr, 1)
                revert(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length
                )
            }
            // Restore the original free memory pointer.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, memPointer)
            // Restore the zero slot to zero.
            mstore(ZeroSlot, 0)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC1155 tokens from a given
     *      originator to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on
     *      the contract performing the transfer and contract recipients must
     *      implement the ERC1155TokenReceiver interface to indicate that they
     *      are willing to accept the transfer.
     *
     * @param token      The ERC1155 token to transfer.
     * @param from       The originator of the transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the transfer.
     * @param identifier The id to transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount to transfer.
     */
    function _performERC1155Transfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform an optimized ERC1155 token transfer.
        assembly {
            // If the token has no code, revert.
            if iszero(extcodesize(token)) {
                mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
            }
            // The following memory slots will be used when populating call data
            // for the transfer; read the values and restore them later.
            let memPointer := mload(FreeMemoryPointerSlot)
            let slot0x80 := mload(Slot0x80)
            let slot0xA0 := mload(Slot0xA0)
            let slot0xC0 := mload(Slot0xC0)
            // Write call data into memory, beginning with function selector.
            mstore(
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_signature
            )
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_from_ptr, from)
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_to_ptr, to)
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_id_ptr, identifier)
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_amount_ptr, amount)
            mstore(
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_offset_ptr,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_offset
            )
            mstore(ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_ptr, 0)
            // Perform the call, ignoring return data.
            let success := call(
                gas(),
                token,
                0,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_sig_ptr,
                ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_length,
                0,
                0
            )
            // If the transfer reverted:
            if iszero(success) {
                // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as sufficient
                // gas remains to do so:
                if returndatasize() {
                    // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to copy
                    // returndata while expanding memory where necessary. Start
                    // by computing word size of returndata & allocated memory.
                    // Round up to the nearest full word.
                    let returnDataWords := div(
                        add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                        OneWord
                    )
                    // Note: use the free memory pointer in place of msize() to
                    // work around a Yul warning that prevents accessing msize
                    // directly when the IR pipeline is activated.
                    let msizeWords := div(memPointer, OneWord)
                    // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                    let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                    // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                    if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                        cost := add(
                            cost,
                            add(
                                mul(
                                    sub(returnDataWords, msizeWords),
                                    CostPerWord
                                ),
                                div(
                                    sub(
                                        mul(returnDataWords, returnDataWords),
                                        mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                    ),
                                    MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                )
                            )
                        )
                    }
                    // Finally, add a small constant and compare to gas
                    // remaining; bubble up the revert data if enough gas is
                    // still available.
                    if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                        // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite existing memory.
                        returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                        // Revert, giving memory region with copied returndata.
                        revert(0, returndatasize())
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise revert with a generic error message.
                mstore(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                )
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr, token)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr, from)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr, to)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr, identifier)
                mstore(TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr, amount)
                revert(
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr,
                    TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length
                )
            }
            mstore(Slot0x80, slot0x80) // Restore slot 0x80.
            mstore(Slot0xA0, slot0xA0) // Restore slot 0xA0.
            mstore(Slot0xC0, slot0xC0) // Restore slot 0xC0.
            // Restore the original free memory pointer.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, memPointer)
            // Restore the zero slot to zero.
            mstore(ZeroSlot, 0)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function to transfer ERC1155 tokens from a given
     *      originator to a given recipient. Sufficient approvals must be set on
     *      the contract performing the transfer and contract recipients must
     *      implement the ERC1155TokenReceiver interface to indicate that they
     *      are willing to accept the transfer. NOTE: this function is not
     *      memory-safe; it will overwrite existing memory, restore the free
     *      memory pointer to the default value, and overwrite the zero slot.
     *      This function should only be called once memory is no longer
     *      required and when uninitialized arrays are not utilized, and memory
     *      should be considered fully corrupted (aside from the existence of a
     *      default-value free memory pointer) after calling this function.
     *
     * @param batchTransfers The group of 1155 batch transfers to perform.
     */
    function _performERC1155BatchTransfers(
        ConduitBatch1155Transfer[] calldata batchTransfers
    ) internal {
        // Utilize assembly to perform optimized batch 1155 transfers.
        assembly {
            let len := batchTransfers.length
            // Pointer to first head in the array, which is offset to the struct
            // at each index. This gets incremented after each loop to avoid
            // multiplying by 32 to get the offset for each element.
            let nextElementHeadPtr := batchTransfers.offset
            // Pointer to beginning of the head of the array. This is the
            // reference position each offset references. It's held static to
            // let each loop calculate the data position for an element.
            let arrayHeadPtr := nextElementHeadPtr
            // Write the function selector, which will be reused for each call:
            // safeBatchTransferFrom(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)
            mstore(
                ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset,
                ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_signature
            )
            // Iterate over each batch transfer.
            for {
                let i := 0
            } lt(i, len) {
                i := add(i, 1)
            } {
                // Read the offset to the beginning of the element and add
                // it to pointer to the beginning of the array head to get
                // the absolute position of the element in calldata.
                let elementPtr := add(
                    arrayHeadPtr,
                    calldataload(nextElementHeadPtr)
                )
                // Retrieve the token from calldata.
                let token := calldataload(elementPtr)
                // If the token has no code, revert.
                if iszero(extcodesize(token)) {
                    mstore(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_signature)
                    mstore(NoContract_error_token_ptr, token)
                    revert(NoContract_error_sig_ptr, NoContract_error_length)
                }
                // Get the total number of supplied ids.
                let idsLength := calldataload(
                    add(elementPtr, ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset)
                )
                // Determine the expected offset for the amounts array.
                let expectedAmountsOffset := add(
                    ConduitBatch1155Transfer_amounts_length_baseOffset,
                    mul(idsLength, OneWord)
                )
                // Validate struct encoding.
                let invalidEncoding := iszero(
                    and(
                        // ids.length == amounts.length
                        eq(
                            idsLength,
                            calldataload(add(elementPtr, expectedAmountsOffset))
                        ),
                        and(
                            // ids_offset == 0xa0
                            eq(
                                calldataload(
                                    add(
                                        elementPtr,
                                        ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_head_offset
                                    )
                                ),
                                ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset
                            ),
                            // amounts_offset == 0xc0 + ids.length*32
                            eq(
                                calldataload(
                                    add(
                                        elementPtr,
                                        ConduitBatchTransfer_amounts_head_offset
                                    )
                                ),
                                expectedAmountsOffset
                            )
                        )
                    )
                )
                // Revert with an error if the encoding is not valid.
                if invalidEncoding {
                    mstore(
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_ptr,
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_selector
                    )
                    revert(
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_ptr,
                        Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_length
                    )
                }
                // Update the offset position for the next loop
                nextElementHeadPtr := add(nextElementHeadPtr, OneWord)
                // Copy the first section of calldata (before dynamic values).
                calldatacopy(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_ptr,
                    add(elementPtr, ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset),
                    ConduitBatch1155Transfer_usable_head_size
                )
                // Determine size of calldata required for ids and amounts. Note
                // that the size includes both lengths as well as the data.
                let idsAndAmountsSize := add(TwoWords, mul(idsLength, TwoWords))
                // Update the offset for the data array in memory.
                mstore(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_data_head_ptr,
                    add(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_offset,
                        idsAndAmountsSize
                    )
                )
                // Set the length of the data array in memory to zero.
                mstore(
                    add(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_data_length_basePtr,
                        idsAndAmountsSize
                    ),
                    0
                )
                // Determine the total calldata size for the call to transfer.
                let transferDataSize := add(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_calldata_baseSize,
                    idsAndAmountsSize
                )
                // Copy second section of calldata (including dynamic values).
                calldatacopy(
                    BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_ptr,
                    add(elementPtr, ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset),
                    idsAndAmountsSize
                )
                // Perform the call to transfer 1155 tokens.
                let success := call(
                    gas(),
                    token,
                    0,
                    ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset, // Data portion start.
                    transferDataSize, // Location of the length of callData.
                    0,
                    0
                )
                // If the transfer reverted:
                if iszero(success) {
                    // If it returned a message, bubble it up as long as
                    // sufficient gas remains to do so:
                    if returndatasize() {
                        // Ensure that sufficient gas is available to copy
                        // returndata while expanding memory where necessary.
                        // Start by computing word size of returndata and
                        // allocated memory. Round up to the nearest full word.
                        let returnDataWords := div(
                            add(returndatasize(), AlmostOneWord),
                            OneWord
                        )
                        // Note: use transferDataSize in place of msize() to
                        // work around a Yul warning that prevents accessing
                        // msize directly when the IR pipeline is activated.
                        // The free memory pointer is not used here because
                        // this function does almost all memory management
                        // manually and does not update it, and transferDataSize
                        // should be the largest memory value used (unless a
                        // previous batch was larger).
                        let msizeWords := div(transferDataSize, OneWord)
                        // Next, compute the cost of the returndatacopy.
                        let cost := mul(CostPerWord, returnDataWords)
                        // Then, compute cost of new memory allocation.
                        if gt(returnDataWords, msizeWords) {
                            cost := add(
                                cost,
                                add(
                                    mul(
                                        sub(returnDataWords, msizeWords),
                                        CostPerWord
                                    ),
                                    div(
                                        sub(
                                            mul(
                                                returnDataWords,
                                                returnDataWords
                                            ),
                                            mul(msizeWords, msizeWords)
                                        ),
                                        MemoryExpansionCoefficient
                                    )
                                )
                            )
                        }
                        // Finally, add a small constant and compare to gas
                        // remaining; bubble up the revert data if enough gas is
                        // still available.
                        if lt(add(cost, ExtraGasBuffer), gas()) {
                            // Copy returndata to memory; overwrite existing.
                            returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                            // Revert with memory region containing returndata.
                            revert(0, returndatasize())
                        }
                    }
                    // Set the error signature.
                    mstore(
                        0,
                        ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_error_signature
                    )
                    // Write the token.
                    mstore(ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_token_ptr, token)
                    // Increase the offset to ids by 32.
                    mstore(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_head_ptr,
                        ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_ids_offset
                    )
                    // Increase the offset to amounts by 32.
                    mstore(
                        BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_head_ptr,
                        add(
                            OneWord,
                            mload(BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_head_ptr)
                        )
                    )
                    // Return modified region. The total size stays the same as
                    // `token` uses the same number of bytes as `data.length`.
                    revert(0, transferDataSize)
                }
            }
            // Reset the free memory pointer to the default value; memory must
            // be assumed to be dirtied and not reused from this point forward.
            // Also note that the zero slot is not reset to zero, meaning empty
            // arrays cannot be safely created or utilized until it is restored.
            mstore(FreeMemoryPointerSlot, DefaultFreeMemoryPointer)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
import { ConduitItemType } from "./ConduitEnums.sol";
struct ConduitTransfer {
    ConduitItemType itemType;
    address token;
    address from;
    address to;
    uint256 identifier;
    uint256 amount;
}
struct ConduitBatch1155Transfer {
    address token;
    address from;
    address to;
    uint256[] ids;
    uint256[] amounts;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
// error ChannelClosed(address channel)
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_error_signature = (
    0x93daadf200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_error_ptr = 0x00;
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_channel_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant ChannelClosed_error_length = 0x24;
// For the mapping:
// mapping(address => bool) channels
// The position in storage for a particular account is:
// keccak256(abi.encode(account, channels.slot))
uint256 constant ChannelKey_channel_ptr = 0x00;
uint256 constant ChannelKey_slot_ptr = 0x20;
uint256 constant ChannelKey_length = 0x40;
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/*
 * -------------------------- Disambiguation & Other Notes ---------------------
 *    - The term "head" is used as it is in the documentation for ABI encoding,
 *      but only in reference to dynamic types, i.e. it always refers to the
 *      offset or pointer to the body of a dynamic type. In calldata, the head
 *      is always an offset (relative to the parent object), while in memory,
 *      the head is always the pointer to the body. More information found here:
 *      https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/v0.8.14/abi-spec.html#argument-encoding
 *        - Note that the length of an array is separate from and precedes the
 *          head of the array.
 *
 *    - The term "body" is used in place of the term "head" used in the ABI
 *      documentation. It refers to the start of the data for a dynamic type,
 *      e.g. the first word of a struct or the first word of the first element
 *      in an array.
 *
 *    - The term "pointer" is used to describe the absolute position of a value
 *      and never an offset relative to another value.
 *        - The suffix "_ptr" refers to a memory pointer.
 *        - The suffix "_cdPtr" refers to a calldata pointer.
 *
 *    - The term "offset" is used to describe the position of a value relative
 *      to some parent value. For example, OrderParameters_conduit_offset is the
 *      offset to the "conduit" value in the OrderParameters struct relative to
 *      the start of the body.
 *        - Note: Offsets are used to derive pointers.
 *
 *    - Some structs have pointers defined for all of their fields in this file.
 *      Lines which are commented out are fields that are not used in the
 *      codebase but have been left in for readability.
 */
uint256 constant AlmostOneWord = 0x1f;
uint256 constant OneWord = 0x20;
uint256 constant TwoWords = 0x40;
uint256 constant ThreeWords = 0x60;
uint256 constant FreeMemoryPointerSlot = 0x40;
uint256 constant ZeroSlot = 0x60;
uint256 constant DefaultFreeMemoryPointer = 0x80;
uint256 constant Slot0x80 = 0x80;
uint256 constant Slot0xA0 = 0xa0;
uint256 constant Slot0xC0 = 0xc0;
// abi.encodeWithSignature("transferFrom(address,address,uint256)")
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_signature = (
    0x23b872dd00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_from_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_to_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_amount_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant ERC20_transferFrom_length = 0x64; // 4 + 32 * 3 == 100
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "safeTransferFrom(address,address,uint256,uint256,bytes)"
// )
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_signature = (
    0xf242432a00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_from_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_to_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_id_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_amount_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_offset_ptr = 0x84;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_ptr = 0xa4;
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_length = 0xc4; // 4 + 32 * 6 == 196
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeTransferFrom_data_length_offset = 0xa0;
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "safeBatchTransferFrom(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)"
// )
uint256 constant ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_signature = (
    0x2eb2c2d600000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
bytes4 constant ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_selector = bytes4(
    bytes32(ERC1155_safeBatchTransferFrom_signature)
);
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_signature = ERC20_transferFrom_signature;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_from_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_to_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_id_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant ERC721_transferFrom_length = 0x64; // 4 + 32 * 3 == 100
// abi.encodeWithSignature("NoContract(address)")
uint256 constant NoContract_error_signature = (
    0x5f15d67200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant NoContract_error_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant NoContract_error_token_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant NoContract_error_length = 0x24; // 4 + 32 == 36
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "TokenTransferGenericFailure(address,address,address,uint256,uint256)"
// )
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_signature = (
    0xf486bc8700000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_token_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_from_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_to_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_id_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_amount_ptr = 0x84;
// 4 + 32 * 5 == 164
uint256 constant TokenTransferGenericFailure_error_length = 0xa4;
// abi.encodeWithSignature(
//     "BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer(address,address,address,uint256)"
// )
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_signature = (
    0x9889192300000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_sig_ptr = 0x0;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_token_ptr = 0x4;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_from_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_to_ptr = 0x44;
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_amount_ptr = 0x64;
// 4 + 32 * 4 == 132
uint256 constant BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer_error_length = 0x84;
uint256 constant ExtraGasBuffer = 0x20;
uint256 constant CostPerWord = 3;
uint256 constant MemoryExpansionCoefficient = 0x200;
// Values are offset by 32 bytes in order to write the token to the beginning
// in the event of a revert
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ptr = 0x24;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_head_ptr = 0x64;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_head_ptr = 0x84;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_data_head_ptr = 0xa4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_data_length_basePtr = 0xc4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_calldata_baseSize = 0xc4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_ptr = 0xc4;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_ids_length_offset = 0xa0;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_amounts_length_baseOffset = 0xc0;
uint256 constant BatchTransfer1155Params_data_length_baseOffset = 0xe0;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_usable_head_size = 0x80;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_from_offset = 0x20;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_head_offset = 0x60;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_amounts_head_offset = 0x80;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_ids_length_offset = 0xa0;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_amounts_length_baseOffset = 0xc0;
uint256 constant ConduitBatch1155Transfer_calldata_baseSize = 0xc0;
// Note: abbreviated version of above constant to adhere to line length limit.
uint256 constant ConduitBatchTransfer_amounts_head_offset = 0x80;
uint256 constant Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_ptr = 0x00;
uint256 constant Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_length = 0x04;
uint256 constant Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding_selector = (
    0xeba2084c00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_error_signature = (
    0xafc445e200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
);
uint256 constant ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_token_ptr = 0x04;
uint256 constant ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure_ids_offset = 0xc0;
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity >=0.8.7;
/**
 * @title TokenTransferrerErrors
 */
interface TokenTransferrerErrors {
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an ERC721 transfer with amount other than
     *      one is attempted.
     */
    error InvalidERC721TransferAmount();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fulfill an order where an
     *      item has an amount of zero.
     */
    error MissingItemAmount();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to fulfill an order where an
     *      item has unused parameters. This includes both the token and the
     *      identifier parameters for native transfers as well as the identifier
     *      parameter for ERC20 transfers. Note that the conduit does not
     *      perform this check, leaving it up to the calling channel to enforce
     *      when desired.
     */
    error UnusedItemParameters();
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an ERC20, ERC721, or ERC1155 token
     *      transfer reverts.
     *
     * @param token      The token for which the transfer was attempted.
     * @param from       The source of the attempted transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the attempted transfer.
     * @param identifier The identifier for the attempted transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount for the attempted transfer.
     */
    error TokenTransferGenericFailure(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 identifier,
        uint256 amount
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when a batch ERC1155 token transfer reverts.
     *
     * @param token       The token for which the transfer was attempted.
     * @param from        The source of the attempted transfer.
     * @param to          The recipient of the attempted transfer.
     * @param identifiers The identifiers for the attempted transfer.
     * @param amounts     The amounts for the attempted transfer.
     */
    error ERC1155BatchTransferGenericFailure(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] identifiers,
        uint256[] amounts
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an ERC20 token transfer returns a falsey
     *      value.
     *
     * @param token      The token for which the ERC20 transfer was attempted.
     * @param from       The source of the attempted ERC20 transfer.
     * @param to         The recipient of the attempted ERC20 transfer.
     * @param amount     The amount for the attempted ERC20 transfer.
     */
    error BadReturnValueFromERC20OnTransfer(
        address token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    );
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when an account being called as an assumed
     *      contract does not have code and returns no data.
     *
     * @param account The account that should contain code.
     */
    error NoContract(address account);
    /**
     * @dev Revert with an error when attempting to execute an 1155 batch
     *      transfer using calldata not produced by default ABI encoding or with
     *      different lengths for ids and amounts arrays.
     */
    error Invalid1155BatchTransferEncoding();
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract OwnableUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    function __Ownable_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        __Ownable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __Ownable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (finance/PaymentSplitter.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title PaymentSplitter
 * @dev This contract allows to split Ether payments among a group of accounts. The sender does not need to be aware
 * that the Ether will be split in this way, since it is handled transparently by the contract.
 *
 * The split can be in equal parts or in any other arbitrary proportion. The way this is specified is by assigning each
 * account to a number of shares. Of all the Ether that this contract receives, each account will then be able to claim
 * an amount proportional to the percentage of total shares they were assigned. The distribution of shares is set at the
 * time of contract deployment and can't be updated thereafter.
 *
 * `PaymentSplitter` follows a _pull payment_ model. This means that payments are not automatically forwarded to the
 * accounts but kept in this contract, and the actual transfer is triggered as a separate step by calling the {release}
 * function.
 *
 * NOTE: This contract assumes that ERC20 tokens will behave similarly to native tokens (Ether). Rebasing tokens, and
 * tokens that apply fees during transfers, are likely to not be supported as expected. If in doubt, we encourage you
 * to run tests before sending real value to this contract.
 */
contract PaymentSplitterUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    event PayeeAdded(address account, uint256 shares);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event ERC20PaymentReleased(IERC20Upgradeable indexed token, address to, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReceived(address from, uint256 amount);
    uint256 private _totalShares;
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _shares;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    address[] private _payees;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => uint256) private _erc20TotalReleased;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => mapping(address => uint256)) private _erc20Released;
    /**
     * @dev Creates an instance of `PaymentSplitter` where each account in `payees` is assigned the number of shares at
     * the matching position in the `shares` array.
     *
     * All addresses in `payees` must be non-zero. Both arrays must have the same non-zero length, and there must be no
     * duplicates in `payees`.
     */
    function __PaymentSplitter_init(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(payees, shares_);
    }
    function __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        require(payees.length == shares_.length, "PaymentSplitter: payees and shares length mismatch");
        require(payees.length > 0, "PaymentSplitter: no payees");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < payees.length; i++) {
            _addPayee(payees[i], shares_[i]);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev The Ether received will be logged with {PaymentReceived} events. Note that these events are not fully
     * reliable: it's possible for a contract to receive Ether without triggering this function. This only affects the
     * reliability of the events, and not the actual splitting of Ether.
     *
     * To learn more about this see the Solidity documentation for
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/contracts.html#fallback-function[fallback
     * functions].
     */
    receive() external payable virtual {
        emit PaymentReceived(_msgSender(), msg.value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total shares held by payees.
     */
    function totalShares() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalShares;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of `token` already released. `token` should be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function totalReleased(IERC20Upgradeable token) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20TotalReleased[token];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of shares held by an account.
     */
    function shares(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _shares[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of `token` tokens already released to a payee. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function released(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20Released[token][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the address of the payee number `index`.
     */
    function payee(uint256 index) public view returns (address) {
        return _payees[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = address(this).balance + totalReleased();
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable `token` tokens. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function releasable(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = token.balanceOf(address(this)) + totalReleased(token);
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(token, account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of Ether they are owed, according to their percentage of the
     * total shares and their previous withdrawals.
     */
    function release(address payable account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _totalReleased is the sum of all values in _released.
        // If "_totalReleased += payment" does not overflow, then "_released[account] += payment" cannot overflow.
        _totalReleased += payment;
        unchecked {
            _released[account] += payment;
        }
        AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(account, payment);
        emit PaymentReleased(account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of `token` tokens they are owed, according to their
     * percentage of the total shares and their previous withdrawals. `token` must be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function release(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(token, account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _erc20TotalReleased[token] is the sum of all values in _erc20Released[token].
        // If "_erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment" does not overflow, then "_erc20Released[token][account] += payment"
        // cannot overflow.
        _erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment;
        unchecked {
            _erc20Released[token][account] += payment;
        }
        SafeERC20Upgradeable.safeTransfer(token, account, payment);
        emit ERC20PaymentReleased(token, account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev internal logic for computing the pending payment of an `account` given the token historical balances and
     * already released amounts.
     */
    function _pendingPayment(
        address account,
        uint256 totalReceived,
        uint256 alreadyReleased
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        return (totalReceived * _shares[account]) / _totalShares - alreadyReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a new payee to the contract.
     * @param account The address of the payee to add.
     * @param shares_ The number of shares owned by the payee.
     */
    function _addPayee(address account, uint256 shares_) private {
        require(account != address(0), "PaymentSplitter: account is the zero address");
        require(shares_ > 0, "PaymentSplitter: shares are 0");
        require(_shares[account] == 0, "PaymentSplitter: account already has shares");
        _payees.push(account);
        _shares[account] = shares_;
        _totalShares = _totalShares + shares_;
        emit PayeeAdded(account, shares_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[43] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initialized`
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initializing`
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
abstract contract ERC2981Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC2981Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC2981_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC2981_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }
    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981Upgradeable
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 _tokenId, uint256 _salePrice) public view virtual override returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[_tokenId];
        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }
        uint256 royaltyAmount = (_salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();
        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }
    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: invalid receiver");
        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: Invalid parameters");
        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[48] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/extensions/draft-IERC20Permit.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 */
interface IERC20PermitUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Sets `amount` as the allowance of `spender` over the caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `amount` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../extensions/draft-IERC20PermitUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20Upgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    function safePermit(
        IERC20PermitUpgradeable token,
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal {
        uint256 nonceBefore = token.nonces(owner);
        token.permit(owner, spender, value, deadline, v, r, s);
        uint256 nonceAfter = token.nonces(owner);
        require(nonceAfter == nonceBefore + 1, "SafeERC20: permit did not succeed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20Upgradeable token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/finance/PaymentSplitterUpgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
struct PhaseSettings {
    /// @dev phase supply. This can be released to public by ending the phase.
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the phase
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev wallet maximum for the phase
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev merkle root for the phase (if applicable, otherwise bytes32(0))
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev whether the phase is active
    bool isActive;
    /// @dev price for the phase (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct BaseSettings {
    /// @dev public sale supply. ending a phase will carry supply into this value
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev global wallet maximum across all phases (including public)
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the public sale
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev price for the public sale (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct SaleState {
    uint64 numPhases;
    mapping(uint256 => PhaseSettings) phases;
}
struct PaymentSplitterSettings {
    address[] payees;
    uint256[] shares;
}
struct RoyaltySettings {
    address royaltyAddress;
    uint96 royaltyAmount;
}
error SaleInactive();
error SoldOut();
error InvalidPrice();
error ExceedMaxPerWallet();
error InvalidProof();
error PhaseNotActive();
error NotAllowlisted();
error InvalidMintFunction();
error InvalidAirdrop();
error InvalidPhase();
error BurningNotAllowed();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-721 Multi-Phase Drop Contract
contract Bueno721Drop is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    PaymentSplitterUpgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public _baseTokenURI;
    SaleState public saleState;
    BaseSettings public baseSettings;
    address[] public withdrawAddresses;
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint64)) private amountMintedForPhase;
    bool public isPublicActive;
    bool private allowBurning;
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event PhasesActivated(uint256[] phaseIds, bool activatedPublic);
    event PhasesPaused(uint256[] phaseIds, bool pausedPublic);
    event PhaseEnded(uint256 phaseIds);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event PhaseSettingsUpdated(uint256 phaseId, PhaseSettings settings);
    event BaseSettingsUpdated(BaseSettings settings);
    event BaseURIUpdated(string baseURI);
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializerERC721A initializer {
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __Ownable_init();
        __PaymentSplitter_init(
            _paymentSplitterSettings.payees,
            _paymentSplitterSettings.shares
        );
        uint64 numPhases = uint64(_phases.length);
        uint256 supplyValidationCount = _baseSettings.maxSupply;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            saleState.phases[i] = _phases[i];
            supplyValidationCount += _phases[i].maxSupply;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        require(
            supplyValidationCount == _maxIntendedSupply,
            "Supply of all phases must equal maxIntendedSupply"
        );
        _baseTokenURI = _baseUri;
        withdrawAddresses = _paymentSplitterSettings.payees;
        saleState.numPhases = numPhases;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    // ========= EXTERNAL MINTING METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for an allowlisted phase
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that doesn't have an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhaseAllowlist(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            proof,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a non-allowlist phase.
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that has an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhase(uint256 phaseIndex, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     */
    function mintPublic(uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPublicMintConditions(
            quantity,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in all possible phases (including public sale)
     */
    function mintBatch(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        bytes32[][] calldata proofs,
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        uint64 publicQuantity
    ) external payable {
        uint256 phaseLength = phaseIndices.length;
        if (
            phaseLength > saleState.numPhases ||
            phaseLength != quantities.length ||
            phaseLength != proofs.length
        ) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        uint256 balance = msg.value;
        uint256 quantityToMint;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseLength; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmount;
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            uint64 quantity = quantities[i];
            bytes32[] calldata proof = proofs[i];
            PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
            uint256 priceForPhase = phase.price * quantity;
            // Since price is strictly checked in the _check* functions below,
            // we have an additional check here to ensure that the balance doesn't underflow
            if (balance < priceForPhase) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
            // if the phase has no allowlist, the merkleRoot will be zeroed out.
            if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
                updatedAmount = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            } else {
                updatedAmount = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    proof,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            }
            // quantity & phaseLength have a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            // balance underflow is checked above
            unchecked {
                saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
                amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmount;
                balance -= priceForPhase;
                quantityToMint += quantity;
                ++i;
            }
        }
        uint256 totalMintQuantity = quantityToMint;
        if (publicQuantity > 0) {
            _checkPublicMintConditions(publicQuantity, balance);
            // publicQuantity has a max value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                baseSettings.amountMinted += publicQuantity;
                totalMintQuantity += publicQuantity;
            }
        }
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        _mint(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(tokenId, true);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, tokenId);
    }
    // ========= OWNER METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for a particular phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the phase that is specified in the airdropper.
     */
    function airdropForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = phase.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            phase.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for the public phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the public phase.
     */
    function airdropPublic(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted +
                quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are active.
     * Public sale can be activated by setting `activatePublic` to true.
     */
    function activatePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool activatePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        // activate all the phases provided in phaseIndices
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndices[i]].isActive = true;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with activatePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be activated, but it does not pause it.
        if (activatePublic) {
            isPublicActive = true;
        }
        emit PhasesActivated(phaseIndices, activatePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are inactive (paused).
     * Public sale can be paused by setting `pausePublic` to true.
     * Pausing is separate from ending, since ending permanently closes the phase.
     */
    function pausePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool pausePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = false;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with pausePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be paused, but it does not pause it.
        if (pausePublic) {
            isPublicActive = false;
        }
        emit PhasesPaused(phaseIndices, pausePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Permanently closes a phase by capping the supply & releasing it
     */
    function endPhase(uint256 phaseIndex) public onlyOwner {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        // if the phase never had supply, there is nothing to do
        if (phase.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        // transfer the remaining supply into the base settings (used for public sale accounting)
        baseSettings.maxSupply += phase.maxSupply - phase.amountMinted;
        // remove the supply from the phase
        phase.maxSupply = 0;
        emit PhaseEnded(phaseIndex);
    }
    function endPhases(uint64[] calldata phaseIndices) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 phaseIndicesLength = phaseIndices.length;
        // ensure that phaseIndices argument will only ever be as large as the number of phases
        if (phaseIndicesLength > saleState.numPhases) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseIndicesLength; ) {
            endPhase(phaseIndices[i]);
            // phaseIndicesLength has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the minting rules for a particular phase
     * @dev supply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updatePhaseSettings(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        PhaseSettings calldata phase
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted;
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply;
        bool existingStatus = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex] = phase;
        // ensure that the amountMinted, maxSupply, and status values cannot be set
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = existingStatus;
        emit PhaseSettingsUpdated(phaseIndex, phase);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the the base minting settings
     * The global maxPerWallet setting applies to all phases
     * Pricing and other fields will apply to the public sale
     *
     * @dev maxSupply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updateBaseSettings(
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = baseSettings.maxSupply;
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        // ensure that the maxSupply & amountMinted value cannot be set
        baseSettings.maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        baseSettings.amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        emit BaseSettingsUpdated(_baseSettings);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Payment can be pulled via PaymentSplitter.release
     * this method is provided for convenience to release all payee funds
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numAddresses = withdrawAddresses.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numAddresses; ) {
            address payable withdrawAddress = payable(withdrawAddresses[i]);
            if (releasable(withdrawAddress) > 0) {
                release(withdrawAddress);
            }
            // numAddresses has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    function setBaseURI(string memory baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _baseTokenURI = baseURI;
        emit BaseURIUpdated(baseURI);
    }
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    // ========= VIEW METHODS =========
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // there should be a valid merkle root for the phase
        if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                phase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(wallet))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // the phase should not have a merkleRoot
        if (phase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPublicMintConditions(
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        if (!isPublicActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted + quantity;
        if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * baseSettings.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal view {
        if (
            baseSettings.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
            _numberMinted(wallet) + quantity > baseSettings.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
    }
    function getDataForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex
    ) external view returns (PhaseSettings memory) {
        return saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
    }
    function getMintBalance(address wallet) external view returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(wallet);
    }
    function getAmountMintedForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint64) {
        return amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
    }
    function getAmountMintedForOwner(
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory amountMintedPerPhase = new uint256[](
            saleState.numPhases + 1
        );
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < saleState.numPhases; ) {
            amountMintedPerPhase[i] = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][i];
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        amountMintedPerPhase[saleState.numPhases] = _numberMinted(wallet);
        return amountMintedPerPhase;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC721-_baseURI}.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _baseTokenURI;
    }
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721AUpgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981Upgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    // ========= OPERATOR FILTERER OVERRIDES =========
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    )
        public
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    function approve(
        address operator,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If not burned.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
                if (packed == 0) {
                    if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
                    // Invariant:
                    // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // before an unintialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                    //
                    // We can directly compare the packed value.
                    // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                    for (;;) {
                        unchecked {
                            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                        }
                        if (packed == 0) continue;
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise, the data exists and is not burned. We can skip the scan.
                // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
                // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
                return packed;
            }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck)
            if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "../IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Initializable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is Initializable {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant operatorFilterRegistry =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe)
        internal
        onlyInitializing
    {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isRegistered(address(this))) {
                if (subscribe) {
                    operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    if (subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy != address(0)) {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                    } else {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.register(address(this));
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
            // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
            // from an EOA.
            if (from == msg.sender) {
                _;
                return;
            }
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/Context.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract Ownable is Context {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    constructor() {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol)
// This file was procedurally generated from scripts/generate/templates/EnumerableSet.js.
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Library for managing
 * https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Set_(abstract_data_type)[sets] of primitive
 * types.
 *
 * Sets have the following properties:
 *
 * - Elements are added, removed, and checked for existence in constant time
 * (O(1)).
 * - Elements are enumerated in O(n). No guarantees are made on the ordering.
 *
 * ```
 * contract Example {
 *     // Add the library methods
 *     using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.AddressSet;
 *
 *     // Declare a set state variable
 *     EnumerableSet.AddressSet private mySet;
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * As of v3.3.0, sets of type `bytes32` (`Bytes32Set`), `address` (`AddressSet`)
 * and `uint256` (`UintSet`) are supported.
 *
 * [WARNING]
 * ====
 * Trying to delete such a structure from storage will likely result in data corruption, rendering the structure
 * unusable.
 * See https://github.com/ethereum/solidity/pull/11843[ethereum/solidity#11843] for more info.
 *
 * In order to clean an EnumerableSet, you can either remove all elements one by one or create a fresh instance using an
 * array of EnumerableSet.
 * ====
 */
library EnumerableSet {
    // To implement this library for multiple types with as little code
    // repetition as possible, we write it in terms of a generic Set type with
    // bytes32 values.
    // The Set implementation uses private functions, and user-facing
    // implementations (such as AddressSet) are just wrappers around the
    // underlying Set.
    // This means that we can only create new EnumerableSets for types that fit
    // in bytes32.
    struct Set {
        // Storage of set values
        bytes32[] _values;
        // Position of the value in the `values` array, plus 1 because index 0
        // means a value is not in the set.
        mapping(bytes32 => uint256) _indexes;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function _add(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private returns (bool) {
        if (!_contains(set, value)) {
            set._values.push(value);
            // The value is stored at length-1, but we add 1 to all indexes
            // and use 0 as a sentinel value
            set._indexes[value] = set._values.length;
            return true;
        } else {
            return false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function _remove(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private returns (bool) {
        // We read and store the value's index to prevent multiple reads from the same storage slot
        uint256 valueIndex = set._indexes[value];
        if (valueIndex != 0) {
            // Equivalent to contains(set, value)
            // To delete an element from the _values array in O(1), we swap the element to delete with the last one in
            // the array, and then remove the last element (sometimes called as 'swap and pop').
            // This modifies the order of the array, as noted in {at}.
            uint256 toDeleteIndex = valueIndex - 1;
            uint256 lastIndex = set._values.length - 1;
            if (lastIndex != toDeleteIndex) {
                bytes32 lastValue = set._values[lastIndex];
                // Move the last value to the index where the value to delete is
                set._values[toDeleteIndex] = lastValue;
                // Update the index for the moved value
                set._indexes[lastValue] = valueIndex; // Replace lastValue's index to valueIndex
            }
            // Delete the slot where the moved value was stored
            set._values.pop();
            // Delete the index for the deleted slot
            delete set._indexes[value];
            return true;
        } else {
            return false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function _contains(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private view returns (bool) {
        return set._indexes[value] != 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values on the set. O(1).
     */
    function _length(Set storage set) private view returns (uint256) {
        return set._values.length;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function _at(Set storage set, uint256 index) private view returns (bytes32) {
        return set._values[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function _values(Set storage set) private view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        return set._values;
    }
    // Bytes32Set
    struct Bytes32Set {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(Bytes32Set storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(Bytes32Set storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (bytes32) {
        return _at(set._inner, index);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(Bytes32Set storage set) internal view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        bytes32[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
    // AddressSet
    struct AddressSet {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(AddressSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(AddressSet storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(uint256(_at(set._inner, index))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(AddressSet storage set) internal view returns (address[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        address[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
    // UintSet
    struct UintSet {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(UintSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(UintSet storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return uint256(_at(set._inner, index));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(UintSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        uint256[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {EnumerableSet} from "openzeppelin-contracts/utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol";
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "./IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Ownable} from "openzeppelin-contracts/access/Ownable.sol";
import {EnumerableSet} from "openzeppelin-contracts/utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol";
import {OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents} from "./OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents.sol";
/**
 * @title  OperatorFilterRegistry
 * @notice Borrows heavily from the QQL BlacklistOperatorFilter contract:
 *         https://github.com/qql-art/contracts/blob/main/contracts/BlacklistOperatorFilter.sol
 * @notice This contracts allows tokens or token owners to register specific addresses or codeHashes that may be
 * *       restricted according to the isOperatorAllowed function.
 */
contract OperatorFilterRegistry is IOperatorFilterRegistry, OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents {
    using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.AddressSet;
    using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set;
    /// @dev initialized accounts have a nonzero codehash (see https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1052)
    /// Note that this will also be a smart contract's codehash when making calls from its constructor.
    bytes32 constant EOA_CODEHASH = keccak256("");
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.AddressSet) private _filteredOperators;
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set) private _filteredCodeHashes;
    mapping(address => address) private _registrations;
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.AddressSet) private _subscribers;
    /**
     * @notice restricts method caller to the address or EIP-173 "owner()"
     */
    modifier onlyAddressOrOwner(address addr) {
        if (msg.sender != addr) {
            try Ownable(addr).owner() returns (address owner) {
                if (msg.sender != owner) {
                    revert OnlyAddressOrOwner();
                }
            } catch (bytes memory reason) {
                if (reason.length == 0) {
                    revert NotOwnable();
                } else {
                    /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                    assembly {
                        revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if operator is not filtered for a given token, either by address or codeHash. Also returns
     *         true if supplied registrant address is not registered.
     */
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef;
            EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef;
            filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registration];
            filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registration];
            if (filteredOperatorsRef.contains(operator)) {
                revert AddressFiltered(operator);
            }
            if (operator.code.length > 0) {
                bytes32 codeHash = operator.codehash;
                if (filteredCodeHashesRef.contains(codeHash)) {
                    revert CodeHashFiltered(operator, codeHash);
                }
            }
        }
        return true;
    }
    //////////////////
    // AUTH METHODS //
    //////////////////
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry. May be called by address itself or by EIP-173 owner.
     */
    function register(address registrant) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (_registrations[registrant] != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Unregisters an address with the registry and removes its subscription. May be called by address itself or by EIP-173 owner.
     *         Note that this does not remove any filtered addresses or codeHashes.
     *         Also note that any subscriptions to this registrant will still be active and follow the existing filtered addresses and codehashes.
     */
    function unregister(address registrant) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
            emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = address(0);
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, false);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry and "subscribes" to another address's filtered operators and codeHashes.
     */
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        if (registrant == subscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToSelf();
        }
        address subscriptionRegistration = _registrations[subscription];
        if (subscriptionRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(subscription);
        }
        if (subscriptionRegistration != subscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(subscription);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = subscription;
        _subscribers[subscription].add(registrant);
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, subscription, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry and copies the filtered operators and codeHashes from another
     *         address without subscribing.
     */
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        if (registrantToCopy == registrant) {
            revert CannotCopyFromSelf();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        address registrantRegistration = _registrations[registrantToCopy];
        if (registrantRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrantToCopy);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
        _copyEntries(registrant, registrantToCopy);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update an operator address for a registered address - when filtered is true, the operator is filtered.
     */
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrant];
        if (!filtered) {
            bool removed = filteredOperatorsRef.remove(operator);
            if (!removed) {
                revert AddressNotFiltered(operator);
            }
        } else {
            bool added = filteredOperatorsRef.add(operator);
            if (!added) {
                revert AddressAlreadyFiltered(operator);
            }
        }
        emit OperatorUpdated(registrant, operator, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update a codeHash for a registered address - when filtered is true, the codeHash is filtered.
     */
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        if (codeHash == EOA_CODEHASH) {
            revert CannotFilterEOAs();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant];
        if (!filtered) {
            bool removed = filteredCodeHashesRef.remove(codeHash);
            if (!removed) {
                revert CodeHashNotFiltered(codeHash);
            }
        } else {
            bool added = filteredCodeHashesRef.add(codeHash);
            if (!added) {
                revert CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(codeHash);
            }
        }
        emit CodeHashUpdated(registrant, codeHash, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update multiple operators for a registered address - when filtered is true, the operators will be filtered. Reverts on duplicates.
     */
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrant];
        uint256 operatorsLength = operators.length;
        unchecked {
            if (!filtered) {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < operatorsLength; ++i) {
                    address operator = operators[i];
                    bool removed = filteredOperatorsRef.remove(operator);
                    if (!removed) {
                        revert AddressNotFiltered(operator);
                    }
                }
            } else {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < operatorsLength; ++i) {
                    address operator = operators[i];
                    bool added = filteredOperatorsRef.add(operator);
                    if (!added) {
                        revert AddressAlreadyFiltered(operator);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit OperatorsUpdated(registrant, operators, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update multiple codeHashes for a registered address - when filtered is true, the codeHashes will be filtered. Reverts on duplicates.
     */
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant];
        uint256 codeHashesLength = codeHashes.length;
        unchecked {
            if (!filtered) {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < codeHashesLength; ++i) {
                    bytes32 codeHash = codeHashes[i];
                    bool removed = filteredCodeHashesRef.remove(codeHash);
                    if (!removed) {
                        revert CodeHashNotFiltered(codeHash);
                    }
                }
            } else {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < codeHashesLength; ++i) {
                    bytes32 codeHash = codeHashes[i];
                    if (codeHash == EOA_CODEHASH) {
                        revert CannotFilterEOAs();
                    }
                    bool added = filteredCodeHashesRef.add(codeHash);
                    if (!added) {
                        revert CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(codeHash);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit CodeHashesUpdated(registrant, codeHashes, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Subscribe an address to another registrant's filtered operators and codeHashes. Will remove previous
     *         subscription if present.
     *         Note that accounts with subscriptions may go on to subscribe to other accounts - in this case,
     *         subscriptions will not be forwarded. Instead the former subscription's existing entries will still be
     *         used.
     */
    function subscribe(address registrant, address newSubscription) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (registrant == newSubscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToSelf();
        }
        if (newSubscription == address(0)) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToZeroAddress();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration == newSubscription) {
            revert AlreadySubscribed(newSubscription);
        }
        address newSubscriptionRegistration = _registrations[newSubscription];
        if (newSubscriptionRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(newSubscription);
        }
        if (newSubscriptionRegistration != newSubscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(newSubscription);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
            emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = newSubscription;
        _subscribers[newSubscription].add(registrant);
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, newSubscription, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Unsubscribe an address from its current subscribed registrant, and optionally copy its filtered operators and codeHashes.
     */
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration == registrant) {
            revert NotSubscribed();
        }
        _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        if (copyExistingEntries) {
            _copyEntries(registrant, registration);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Copy filtered operators and codeHashes from a different registrantToCopy to addr.
     */
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (registrant == registrantToCopy) {
            revert CannotCopyFromSelf();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        address registrantRegistration = _registrations[registrantToCopy];
        if (registrantRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrantToCopy);
        }
        _copyEntries(registrant, registrantToCopy);
    }
    /// @dev helper to copy entries from registrantToCopy to registrant and emit events
    function _copyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) private {
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrantToCopy];
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrantToCopy];
        uint256 filteredOperatorsLength = filteredOperatorsRef.length();
        uint256 filteredCodeHashesLength = filteredCodeHashesRef.length();
        unchecked {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < filteredOperatorsLength; ++i) {
                address operator = filteredOperatorsRef.at(i);
                bool added = _filteredOperators[registrant].add(operator);
                if (added) {
                    emit OperatorUpdated(registrant, operator, true);
                }
            }
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < filteredCodeHashesLength; ++i) {
                bytes32 codehash = filteredCodeHashesRef.at(i);
                bool added = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].add(codehash);
                if (added) {
                    emit CodeHashUpdated(registrant, codehash, true);
                }
            }
        }
    }
    //////////////////
    // VIEW METHODS //
    //////////////////
    /**
     * @notice Get the subscription address of a given registrant, if any.
     */
    function subscriptionOf(address registrant) external view returns (address subscription) {
        subscription = _registrations[registrant];
        if (subscription == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        } else if (subscription == registrant) {
            subscription = address(0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the set of addresses subscribed to a given registrant.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function subscribers(address registrant) external view returns (address[] memory) {
        return _subscribers[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the subscriber at a given index in the set of addresses subscribed to a given registrant.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (address) {
        return _subscribers[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if operator is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].contains(operator);
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].contains(operator);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if a codeHash is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].contains(codeHash);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].contains(codeHash);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if the hash of an address's code is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external view returns (bool) {
        bytes32 codeHash = operatorWithCode.codehash;
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].contains(codeHash);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].contains(codeHash);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if an address has registered
     */
    function isRegistered(address registrant) external view returns (bool) {
        return _registrations[registrant] != address(0);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns a list of filtered operators for a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function filteredOperators(address registrant) external view returns (address[] memory) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].values();
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the set of filtered codeHashes for a given address or its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredCodeHashes(address registrant) external view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].values();
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the filtered operator at the given index of the set of filtered operators for a given address or
     *         its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (address) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].at(index);
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the filtered codeHash at the given index of the list of filtered codeHashes for a given address or
     *         its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (bytes32) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].at(index);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /// @dev Convenience method to compute the code hash of an arbitrary contract
    function codeHashOf(address a) external view returns (bytes32) {
        return a.codehash;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
contract OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents {
    error CannotFilterEOAs();
    error AddressAlreadyFiltered(address operator);
    error AddressNotFiltered(address operator);
    error CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(bytes32 codeHash);
    error CodeHashNotFiltered(bytes32 codeHash);
    error OnlyAddressOrOwner();
    error NotRegistered(address registrant);
    error AlreadyRegistered();
    error AlreadySubscribed(address subscription);
    error NotSubscribed();
    error CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(address subscription);
    error CannotSubscribeToSelf();
    error CannotSubscribeToZeroAddress();
    error NotOwnable();
    error AddressFiltered(address filtered);
    error CodeHashFiltered(address account, bytes32 codeHash);
    error CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(address registrant);
    error CannotCopyFromSelf();
    event RegistrationUpdated(address indexed registrant, bool indexed registered);
    event OperatorUpdated(address indexed registrant, address indexed operator, bool indexed filtered);
    event OperatorsUpdated(address indexed registrant, address[] operators, bool indexed filtered);
    event CodeHashUpdated(address indexed registrant, bytes32 indexed codeHash, bool indexed filtered);
    event CodeHashesUpdated(address indexed registrant, bytes32[] codeHashes, bool indexed filtered);
    event SubscriptionUpdated(address indexed registrant, address indexed subscription, bool indexed subscribed);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.7;
import { PayableProxyInterface } from "../interfaces/PayableProxyInterface.sol";
interface IUpgradeBeacon {
    /**
     * @notice An external view function that returns the implementation.
     *
     * @return The address of the implementation.
     */
    function implementation() external view returns (address);
}
/**
 * @title   PayableProxy
 * @author  OpenSea Protocol Team
 * @notice  PayableProxy is a beacon proxy which will immediately return if
 *          called with callvalue. Otherwise, it will delegatecall the beacon
 *          implementation.
 */
contract PayableProxy is PayableProxyInterface {
    // Address of the beacon.
    address private immutable _beacon;
    constructor(address beacon) payable {
        // Ensure the origin is an approved deployer.
        require(
            (tx.origin == address(0x939C8d89EBC11fA45e576215E2353673AD0bA18A) ||
                tx.origin ==
                address(0xe80a65eB7a3018DedA407e621Ef5fb5B416678CA) ||
                tx.origin ==
                address(0x86D26897267711ea4b173C8C124a0A73612001da) ||
                tx.origin ==
                address(0x3B52ad533687Ce908bA0485ac177C5fb42972962)),
            "Deployment must originate from an approved deployer."
        );
        // Set the initial beacon.
        _beacon = beacon;
    }
    function initialize(address ownerToSet) external {
        // Ensure the origin is an approved deployer.
        require(
            (tx.origin == address(0x939C8d89EBC11fA45e576215E2353673AD0bA18A) ||
                tx.origin ==
                address(0xe80a65eB7a3018DedA407e621Ef5fb5B416678CA) ||
                tx.origin ==
                address(0x86D26897267711ea4b173C8C124a0A73612001da) ||
                tx.origin ==
                address(0x3B52ad533687Ce908bA0485ac177C5fb42972962)),
            "Initialize must originate from an approved deployer."
        );
        // Get the implementation address from the provided beacon.
        address implementation = IUpgradeBeacon(_beacon).implementation();
        // Create the initializationCalldata from the provided parameters.
        bytes memory initializationCalldata = abi.encodeWithSignature(
            "initialize(address)",
            ownerToSet
        );
        // Delegatecall into the implementation, supplying initialization
        // calldata.
        (bool ok, ) = implementation.delegatecall(initializationCalldata);
        // Revert and include revert data if delegatecall to implementation
        // reverts.
        if (!ok) {
            assembly {
                returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
                revert(0, returndatasize())
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Fallback function that delegates calls to the address returned by
     *      `_implementation()`. Will run if no other function in the contract
     *      matches the call data.
     */
    fallback() external payable override {
        _fallback();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal fallback function that delegates calls to the address
     *      returned by `_implementation()`. Will run if no other function
     *      in the contract matches the call data.
     */
    function _fallback() internal {
        // Delegate if call value is zero.
        if (msg.value == 0) {
            _delegate(_implementation());
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Delegates the current call to `implementation`.
     *
     * This function does not return to its internal call site, it will
     * return directly to the external caller.
     */
    function _delegate(address implementation) internal virtual {
        assembly {
            // Copy msg.data. We take full control of memory in this
            // inline assembly block because it will not return to
            // Solidity code. We overwrite the Solidity scratch pad
            // at memory position 0.
            calldatacopy(0, 0, calldatasize())
            // Call the implementation.
            // out and outsize are 0 because we don't know the size yet.
            let result := delegatecall(
                gas(),
                implementation,
                0,
                calldatasize(),
                0,
                0
            )
            // Copy the returned data.
            returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
            switch result
            // delegatecall returns 0 on error.
            case 0 {
                revert(0, returndatasize())
            }
            default {
                return(0, returndatasize())
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev This function returns the address to which the fallback function
     *      should delegate.
     */
    function _implementation() internal view returns (address) {
        return IUpgradeBeacon(_beacon).implementation();
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.7;
/**
 * @title   PayableProxyInterface
 * @author  OpenSea Protocol Team
 * @notice  PayableProxyInterface contains all external function interfaces
 *          for the payable proxy.
 */
interface PayableProxyInterface {
    /**
     * @dev Fallback function that delegates calls to the address returned by
     *      `_implementation()`. Will run if no other function in the contract
     *      matches the call data.
     */
    fallback() external payable;
}